Garmin | G1000 NXi: Diamond DA40NG | Garmin G1000 NXi: Diamond DA40NG G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG

Garmin G1000 NXi: Diamond DA40NG G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
G1000® NXi Pilot’s Guide
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503.581.8101
Fax 503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Tel: +44 (0) 238 052 4000
Fax: +44 (0) 238 052 4004
Aviation Support: +44 (0) 370 850 1243
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District,
New Taipei City, Taiwan
Tel: 34-93-357-2608
Fax: 34-93-429-4484
Diamond DA40NG
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913.397.8200
Fax: 913.397.8282
Aircraft On Ground (AOG)
Hotline: 913.397.0836
Aviation Dealer Technical
Support: 888.606.5482
www.garmin.com
190-02257-00
Revision A
®
Pilot’s Guide
Cirrus SR2x
Diamond DA40NG
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL & CNS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Copyright © 2017 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 1929.00 or later for the Diamond DA40NG. Some differences in operation
may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913.397.8200
Fax: 913.397.8282
Aircraft On Ground (AOG) Hotline: 913.397.0836
Aviation Dealer Technical Support: 888.606.5482
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503.581.8101
Fax 503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Tel: +44 (0) 238 052 4000
Fax: +44 (0) 238 052 4004
Aviation Support: +44 (0) 370 850 1243
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District, New Taipei City, Taiwan
Tel: 34-93-357-2608
Fax: 34-93-429-4484
Website Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin®, G1000® NXi, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries. Garmin ESP™,
Garmin SVT™, and Connext™ are trademarks of Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without
the express permission of Garmin.
Stormscope® is a registered trademark of L-3 Communications. Avidyne® is a registered trademark of Avidyne Corporation. AC-U-KWIK® is
a registered trademark of Penton Business Media Inc. Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International,
Inc. NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Sirius, XM, and all related
marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio, Inc. and its subsidiaries. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Garmin is under license.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”) expressly disclaim all warranties,
with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including negligence, shall AOPA be liable for any
incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even if
AOPA or an AOPA authorized representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action, claims or losses related to any actual
or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for
incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
AC-U-KWIK and its related organizations (hereafter collectively “AC-U-KWIK Organizations”) expressly disclaim all warranties with
respect to the AC-U-KWIK information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AC-U-KWIK Organizations do not warrant or
make any representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Licensee agrees not to sue AC-U-KWIK Organizations and, to the
maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AC-U-KWIK Organizations from any cause of action, claims or losses related
to any actual or alleged inaccuracies in the information arising out of Garmin’s use of the information in the datasets. Some jurisdictions
do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to licensee.
Printed in the U.S.A.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not use terrain avoidance displays as the sole source of information for maintaining separation
from terrain and obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data from third party sources and cannot
independently verify the accuracy of the information.
WARNING: Always refer to current aeronautical charts and NOTAMs for verification of displayed aeronautical
information. Displayed aeronautical data may not incorporate the latest NOTAM information.
WARNING: Do not use geometric altitude for compliance with air traffic control altitude requirements. The
primary barometric altimeter must be used for compliance with all air traffic control altitude regulations,
requirements, instructions, and clearances.
WARNING: Do not use basemap information (land and water data) as the sole means of navigation. Basemap
data is intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered only
an aid to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be older than the indicated weather product age.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitude (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be relied
upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current aeronautical
charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: Always obtain qualified instruction prior to operational use of this equipment.
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not operate properly
with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QNH altimeter setting for height above mean sea level, or the
standard pressure setting, as applicable.
WARNING: Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ by a
system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that
may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be positioned
in error as displayed.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
i
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: When using the autopilot to fly an approach with vertical guidance, the autopilot will not level
the aircraft at the MDA/DH even if the MDA/DH is set in the altitude preselect.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, do not rely on the accuracy of attitude and
heading indications in the following geographic areas: North of 72° North latitude at all longitudes; South
of 70° South latitude at all longitudes; North of 65° North latitude between longitude 75° W and 120° W.
(Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W. (Northern Canada);
North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia); South of 55° South
latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New Zealand).
WARNING: Do not rely on information from a lightning detection system display as the sole basis for hazardous
weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate or
incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
Garmin SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or
reliability upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the Garmin SVT display or may
appear as a partial symbol.
WARNING: Do not use the Garmin SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of
the aircraft to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
WARNING: Steep approaches are not supported by Landing Data calculations.
WARNING: Do not operate the weather radar in a transmitting mode when personnel or objects are within
the MPEL boundary.
WARNING: Always position the weather radar gain setting to Calibrated for viewing the actual intensity of
precipitation. Changing the gain in weather mode causes precipitation intensity to be displayed as a color
not representative of the true intensity.
ii
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not rely on information from the reactive wind shear detection system display as the sole
basis for detecting wind shear conditions. The system cannot predict the conditions in which wind shear is
likely to develop.
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain or obstacle avoidance. TAWS is intended only
to enhance situational awareness.
CAUTION: Do not clean display surfaces with abrasive cloths or cleaners containing ammonia. They will
harm the anti-reflective coating.
CAUTION: Repairs should only be made by an authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or
modifications could void both the warranty and affect the airworthiness of the aircraft.
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the system panel
and displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current system and aviation databases.
Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible for
its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and
performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the system utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation
AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the system can be misused or
misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of
attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to
our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
iii
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: Operating the system in the vicinity of metal buildings, metal structures, or electromagnetic fields
can cause sensor differences that may result in nuisance miscompare annunciations during start up, shut
down, or while taxiing. If one or more of the sensed values are unavailable, the annunciation indicates no
comparison is possible.
NOTE: The system responds to a terminal procedure based on data coded within that procedure in the
Navigation Database. Differences in system operation may be observed among similar types of procedures
due to differences in the Navigation Database coding specific to each procedure.
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent avionics of the
following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory guidance and information
related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System.
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen that have a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the FAA are assured
compliance with all data quality requirements (DQRs). A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each applicable
database and can be viewed at http://fly.garmin.com by selecting ‘Aviation Database Declarations.’
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for compliance with
established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures
that may be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established
AFM(S) and regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusion list as discussed in
SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what data may be incomplete. The database exclusion list can be viewed at
www.flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Database Exclusions List.’
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts and consider their
impact on the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed at www.flygarmin.com by
selecting ‘Aviation Database Alerts.’
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product Support.
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.
These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles
and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go
to FlyGarmin.com and select ‘Aviation Data Error Report’.
iv
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: The system supports approval of AC 120-76C Hardware Class 3, Software Type B Electronic Flight Bag
(EFB) electronic aeronautical chart applications. Possible additional requirements may make a secondary
source (traditional paper or additional electronic display) necessary onboard the aircraft. If the secondary
source is a Portable Electronic Device (PED), its use must be consistent with guidance in AC 120-76C.
NOTE: When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby thunderstorms
that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of two or more
discharge points in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points reappear after
the screen has been cleared.
NOTE: Operate G1000NXi system power through at least one cycle in a period of four days of continuous
operation to avoid an autonomous system reboot.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
v
REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Revisions
Part Number
190-02257-00
vi
Revision
A
Date
05/2017
Page Range
All
Initial Release
Description
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Description.................................................... 1
Line Replaceable Units (LRU).......................................... 1
System Controls......................................................... 4
PFD/MFD Controls......................................................... 4
Secure Digital Cards....................................................... 7
System Operation...................................................... 8
System Power-up........................................................... 8
Normal Operation.......................................................... 9
Reversionary Mode...................................................... 10
System Annunciations.................................................. 11
System Status.............................................................. 13
AHRS Operation.......................................................... 14
GPS Receiver Operation............................................... 16
Accessing System Functionality............................. 21
Softkey Function.......................................................... 21
Menus........................................................................ 26
MFD Page Groups........................................................ 27
System Settings........................................................... 30
System Utilities............................................................ 39
Display Backlighting................................................ 43
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Flight Instruments.................................................... 48
Airspeed Indicator....................................................... 48
Attitude Indicator........................................................ 50
Altimeter.................................................................... 51
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)........................................ 54
Vertical Deviation........................................................ 54
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................... 56
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)................................... 60
Supplemental Flight Data....................................... 67
Temperature Displays................................................... 67
Wind Data.................................................................. 68
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications............................ 69
PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions........... 70
Marker Beacon Annunciations...................................... 70
Altitude Alerting.......................................................... 70
Low Altitude Annunciation........................................... 71
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting....... 71
Garmin Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)............ 73
SVT Operation............................................................. 74
SVT Features............................................................... 75
Field of View............................................................... 84
190-02257-00 Rev. A
2.5 Abnormal Operations.............................................. 86
Abnormal GPS Conditions............................................ 86
SVT Troubleshooting.................................................... 87
Unusual Attitudes........................................................ 87
SVT Unusual Attitudes.................................................. 88
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM (EIS)
3.1 Engine Display.......................................................... 90
3.2 Engine Page.............................................................. 92
Fuel Calculations......................................................... 94
3.3 Reversionary Mode.................................................. 95
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Overview................................................................... 97
PFD Controls and Frequency Display.............................. 98
Audio Panel Controls................................................. 100
COM Operation...................................................... 102
COM TUNING BOXES................................................. 102
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning................................. 103
Auto-Tuning the COM Frequency................................. 103
Frequency Spacing.................................................... 106
NAV Operation....................................................... 107
NAV Tuning Boxes..................................................... 107
NAV Radio Selection and Activation............................ 108
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning...................................... 108
Auto-Tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD............... 109
Marker Beacon Receiver............................................. 111
ADF/DME Tuning....................................................... 112
DME Tuning.............................................................. 115
Mode S Transponder.............................................. 116
Transponder Controls................................................. 116
Transponder Mode Selection....................................... 117
IDENT Function......................................................... 119
Flight ID Reporting.................................................... 120
Additional Audio Panel Functions........................ 121
Power-Up.................................................................. 121
Mono/Stereo Headsets............................................... 121
Speaker.................................................................... 121
Intercom................................................................... 121
Split COM................................................................. 123
Clearance Recorder and Player.................................... 123
Entertainment Inputs................................................. 123
Audio Panels Preflight Procedure........................ 124
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.7 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 125
Stuck Microphone...................................................... 125
COM Tuning Failure.................................................... 125
Audio Panel Fail-Safe Operation.................................. 125
Reversionary Mode.................................................... 125
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
viii
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Introduction............................................................ 127
Navigation Status Box................................................ 129
Using Map Displays............................................... 131
Map Orientation........................................................ 131
Map Range............................................................... 133
Map Panning............................................................. 136
Measuring Bearing and Distance................................. 138
Topography............................................................... 139
Map Symbols............................................................ 142
Airways.................................................................... 147
Additional Navigation Map Items................................ 149
IFR/VFR Charts.......................................................... 152
Waypoints............................................................... 156
Airports.................................................................... 157
Intersections............................................................. 164
NDBs........................................................................ 166
VORs........................................................................ 168
VRPs........................................................................ 170
User Waypoints......................................................... 172
Airspaces................................................................. 177
Direct-to-Navigation ............................................ 181
Flight Planning....................................................... 186
Flight Plan Creation................................................... 187
Flight Plan Import/Export........................................... 190
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan................. 192
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan.................................. 194
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan................... 196
Flight Plan Storage.................................................... 200
Flight Plan Editing..................................................... 203
Along Track Offsets.................................................... 207
Parallel Track............................................................. 208
Activating a Flight Plan Leg........................................ 210
Inverting a Flight Plan................................................ 210
Flight Plan Views....................................................... 210
Closest Point of FPL................................................... 212
User-Defined Holding Patterns.................................... 212
5.7 Vertical Navigation................................................ 217
Altitude Constraints................................................... 219
5.8 Procedures.............................................................. 225
Departures................................................................ 227
Arrivals..................................................................... 229
Approaches............................................................... 231
5.9 Trip Planning........................................................... 239
Trip Planning............................................................. 239
5.10 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 243
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 Data Link Weather................................................. 246
Activating Data Link Weather Services......................... 247
Weather Product Age................................................. 250
Displaying Data Link Weather Products........................ 254
Connext Data Requests.............................................. 264
Weather Product Overview......................................... 268
FIS-B Weather Status................................................. 304
Abnormal Operations for Garmin Connext Weather...... 305
6.2 Stormscope Lightning Detection System............ 307
Using the Stormscope Page........................................ 307
Setting Up Stormscope on the Navigation Map............ 309
6.3 Terrain Displays...................................................... 311
Relative Terrain Symbology......................................... 312
Terrain-SVT Alerting Displays...................................... 317
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance............................. 319
System Status............................................................ 320
6.4 Traffic Information Service (TIS)........................... 322
Displaying Traffic Data............................................... 323
Traffic Map Page........................................................ 324
TIS Alerts.................................................................. 325
System Status............................................................ 327
6.5 Avidyne TAS600 Traffic.......................................... 329
TAS Theory of Operation............................................. 329
TAS Alerts................................................................. 331
System Test............................................................... 332
Operation................................................................. 333
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.7 ADS-B Traffic........................................................... 339
ADS-B System Overview............................................. 339
Conflict Situational Awareness & Alerting (CSA)........... 341
Airborne and Surface Applications............................... 343
Traffic Description...................................................... 345
Operation................................................................. 345
ADS-B System Status................................................. 351
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 AFCS Overview....................................................... 355
Additional AFCS Controls........................................... 357
7.2 Flight Director Operation...................................... 358
Activating the Flight Director...................................... 358
AFCS Status Box........................................................ 359
Flight Director Modes................................................. 360
Command Bars.......................................................... 360
7.3 AFCS MODES........................................................... 361
Vertical Modes.......................................................... 361
Lateral Modes........................................................... 367
Combination modes (VNV, APR, NAV, BC, GA).............. 371
7.4 Autopilot Operation.............................................. 383
Flight Control............................................................ 383
Engagement.............................................................. 384
Control Wheel Steering.............................................. 384
Disengagement......................................................... 385
7.5 AFCS Annunciations and Alerts............................ 386
Overspeed Protection................................................. 387
7.6 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 388
Suspected Autopilot malfunction................................. 388
Overpowering Autopilot Servos................................... 388
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5 Flight Data Logging............................................... 415
8.6 Satellite Telephone and sms messaging............. 417
Registering with Garmin Connext ............................... 417
Disable/Enable Iridium Transceiver.............................. 417
Telephone Communication......................................... 418
8.7 Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP)............ 437
Roll Engagement....................................................... 438
Pitch Engagement..................................................... 439
Angle of Attack Protection.......................................... 441
High Airspeed Protection............................................ 441
8.8 Electronic Checklists.............................................. 442
8.9 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 444
SiriusXM Data Link Receiver Troubleshooting............... 444
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts................................................ 445
Alert Level Definitions................................................ 446
System Message Advisory Annunciations..................... 447
System Message Advisories........................................ 449
Database Management................................................... 459
Loading Updated Databases....................................... 459
Magnetic Field Variation Database Update................... 462
Garmin Aviation Glossary............................................... 465
Frequently Asked Questions........................................... 475
Miscellaneous Map Symbols.......................................... 479
INDEX
Index ................................................................................... I-1
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SafeTaxi................................................................... 390
Charts...................................................................... 393
ChartView................................................................. 394
FliteCharts................................................................ 402
IFR/VFR Charts.......................................................... 407
Airport Directory........................................................ 408
Database Cycle number and revisions................ 409
Cycle Number and Revision........................................ 409
SiriusXM Radio Entertainment............................. 411
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services................. 411
Using SiriusXM Radio................................................. 412
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Blank Page
x
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section provides an overview of the G1000 NXi Integrated Avionics System as installed in the Diamond
DA40NG. The system presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation, communication, and identification
information to the pilot through large-format displays.
EIS
NOTE: Refer to the Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) Section for details on the Garmin AFCS.
LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS (LRU)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system consists of the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GDU 1050 (1) – The GDU 1050 is configured as a Primary Flight Display (PFD) that features a 10-inch, high
resolution LED backlit display. The display communicates with the Multi Function Display (MFD) and with
the #1 GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit through a High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GDU 1054 (1) – Features a 10-inch, high resolution LED backlit display and is configured as an MFD. The
display communicates with the PFD and with the #2 GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit through a HighSpeed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GIA 63W (2) – Functions as the main communication hub, linking all LRUs with the PFD and MFD. Each
GIA 63W contains a GPS SBAS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, a flight director (FD--if Garmin AFCS
is installed) system integration microprocessors. Each GIA 63W is paired with the PFD and MFD via HSDB
connection. The GIA 63Ws are not paired together and do not communicate with each other directly.
• GDC 72 (1) – Processes data from the pitot/static system as well as the OAT probe. This unit provides
pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed and OAT information to the system, and it communicates with the
GIA 63Ws, the displays, and the GRS 79, using an ARINC 429 digital interface.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GRS 79 (1) – The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) provides aircraft attitude and heading
information via ARINC 429 to both displays and both GIAs. The GRS 79 contains advanced sensors (including
accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the GMU 44 to obtain magnetic field information, the
GDC 72 to obtain air data, and both GIAs to obtain GPS information.
• GEA 71 (1) – Receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors. This unit communicates
with both GIAs using an RS-485 digital interface.
APPENDICES
• GMU 44 (1) – Measures local magnetic field. Data is sent to the GRS unit for processing to determine aircraft
magnetic heading. The GMU 44 receives power directly from the GRS unit and communicates with the
GRS unit using an RS-485 digital interface.
• GMA 1347 (1) – Integrates NAV/COM digital audio, intercom system and marker beacon controls. This
unit also enables the manual control of the display reversionary mode (red DISPLAY BACKUP button) and
communicates with both GIA 63Ws, using an RS-232 digital interface.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• GTX 335R (Standard)/GTX345R (Alternate)(1) – Solid-state transponder that provides Mode A, C, S with an
ADS-B In (and Out capability with the GTX345R). The transponder can be controlled from the PFD. The
transponder communicates with the both GIA 63Ws through an RS-232 digital interface.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GSA 8x/GSM 85 or GSM 86 (all Optional) – The GSA servos are used for the automatic control of pitch, pitch
trim, roll and yaw if the optional GFC 700 autopilot is installed. These units interface with each GIA 63W.
The GSM 85 or 86 servo mounts are responsible for transferring the output torque of the servo actuators to
the mechanical flight-control surface linkages (not displayed in Figure 1-1).
EIS
• GDL 69A SXM (1) (Optional) – A satellite radio receiver that provides data link weather information to the
MFD and PFD map as well as digital audio entertainment. The GDL 69A SXM communicates with the MFD
via an HSDB connection. Subscriptions to the SiriusXM Weather or SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are
required to enable the GDL 69A SXM capability.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GSR 56 (1) (Optional) – The Iridium Transceiver operation for voice communication is by means of a
telephone handset in the cabin and pilot and copilot headsets in the cockpit.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-1 shows interactions between the LRUs and optional equipment. The system is capable of interfacing
with the following optional equipment:
• GDL 69A SXM Data Link Receiver
• KN 63 DME
• GSA 8x Servos
• RA 3502 ADF Receiver
• GSM 85/86 Servo Mounts
• TAS 600 Traffic Advisory System
• GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver
• WX-500 Stormscope Lightning Sensor
• GTX 345R Transponder ADS-B In/Out
NOTE: For information on the additional equipment shown in Figure 1-1, consult the applicable optional
AFCS
interface user’s guide. This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with the operation of this
additional equipment.
NOTE: For information on non-Garmin equipment, consult the applicable optional interface user’s guide.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with the operation of this additional equipment.
2
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
#2
GDU 1054
(MFD)
GDL 69A SXM
(Datalink Receiver)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
#1
GDU 1050
(PFD)
EIS
GMA 1347 (Audio Panel)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GDC 72
(Air Data Computer)
GRS 79
(AHRS)
#2 GIA 63W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)
GMU 44
(Magnetometer)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
#1 GIA 63W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)
VHF COM
VHF COM
GEA 71
(Engine &
Airframe I/F)
GPS/SBAS
VOR/LOC
GPS/SBAS
VOR/LOC
GSA 8x
(Servos)
Flight
Director
G/S
Flight
Director
GSR 56
(Satellite Radio)
AFCS Mode
Logic
TAS 600
(Traffic Advisory)
Servo Logic
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS Mode
Logic
AFCS
G/S
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GTX 335R
GTX 345R (alternate)
(Transponder)
Servo Logic
WX-500 Stormscope
(Lightning Sensor)
KN-63 (DME)
Garmin Equipment
Non-Garmin Equipment
Optional
Non-Garmin Equipment
INDEX
Optional
Garmin Equipment
APPENDICES
RA 3502 (ADF)
Figure 1-1 System (LRU Configuration)
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.2 SYSTEM CONTROLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Audio Panel (GMA 1347) is described in the CNS & Audio Panel section.
The system controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and audio panel. The controls for the PFD and
MFD are discussed within the following pages of this section.
EIS
PFD/MFD CONTROLS
2
5
4
3
6
7
8
9
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
17
APPENDICES
18
INDEX
13
19
24
11
14
20
25
12
15
21
26
22
27
23
28
MFD Only
4
10
16
Figure 1-2 PFD/MFD Controls
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1 NAV VOL/ID Knob
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Turn to control NAV audio volume (shown in the NAV Frequency Box as a percentage)
Press to toggle Morse code identifier audio ON/OFF
2 NAV Frequency Trans- Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies
fer Key
3 NAV Knob
Turn to tune NAV receiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz)
Press to toggle cyan tuning box between NAV1 and NAV2
4 *Heading Knob
9
12 CLR Key
(DFLT MAP)
13 MENU Key
15 ENT Key
Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus.
Press and hold to display the MFD Navigation Map Page (MFD only).
Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or making setting
changes
Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport
Validates/confirms menu selection or data entry
APPENDICES
14 PROC Key
Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier, chosen from the
active route)
Displays flight plan information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
11 FPL Key
)
AFCS
10 Direct-to Key (
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6
EIS
5
Turn to manually select a heading. When operating in Heading Select mode, this knob provides the heading reference to the flight director.
Press to display a digital heading momentarily to the left of the HSI and synchronize the Selected Heading to the current heading (MFD Only)
Turn to change map range
Joystick
Press to activate Map Pointer for map panning
Turn large knob for altimeter barometric pressure setting
CRS/BARO Knob
Turn the small knob to set the pilot-selected course on the HSI when the VOR1, VOR2, or
OBS/SUSP mode is selected. Pressing this knob centers the CDI on the currently selected
VOR. The pilot-selected course provides course reference to the pilot-side flight director
when operating in Navigation and Approach modes.
Press to re-center the CDI and return course pointer directly TO bearing of active waypoint/
station.
Turn to tune COM transceiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz).
COM Knob
Press to toggle cyan tuning box between COM1 and COM2.
The selected COM (green) is controlled with the COM MIC Key (Audio Panel).
Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies.
COM Frequency
Transfer Key (EMERG) Press and hold two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into
the active frequency field.
COM VOL/SQ Knob Turn to control COM audio volume level (shown as a percentage in the COM Frequency
Box).
Press to turn the COM automatic squelch ON/OFF.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
5
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
16 FMS Knob
EIS
17
18
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
19
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
20
Press to turn the selection cursor ON/OFF.
(Flight Management Data Entry: With cursor ON, turn to enter data in the highlighted field (large knob moves
cursor location; small knob selects character for highlighted cursor location).
System Knob)
Scrolling: When a list of information is too long for the window/box, a scroll bar appears,
indicating more items to view. With cursor ON, turn large knob to scroll through the list.
Page Selection: Turn knob on MFD to select the page to view (large knob selects a page
group; small knob selects a specific page from the group).
Sets the selected altitude in the Selected Altitude Box (the large knob selects the thousands,
*ALT SEL Knob
the small knob selects the hundreds). In addition to providing the standard system altitude
alerter function, selected altitude provides an altitude setting for the Altitude Capture/Hold
mode of the AFCS (MFD only).
Engages/disengages the Autopilot and Flight Director in the default vertical and lateral
*AP Key
modes.
*FD Key
Activates/deactivates the Flight Director only. Pressing the FD key turns on the Flight Director in the default vertical and lateral modes. Pressing the FD key again deactivates the Flight
Director and removes the command bars, unless the Autopilot is engaged. If the Autopilot
is engaged, the FD key is disabled.
Selects/deselects the Navigation mode.
*NAV Key
21
*ALT Key
Selects/deselects the Altitude Hold mode.
22
*VS Key
Selects/deselects the Vertical Speed mode.
23
*FLC Key
Selects/deselects the Flight Level Change mode.
24
*HDG Key
Selects/deselects the Heading Select mode.
25
*APR Key
Selects/deselects the Approach mode.
26
Selects/deselects Vertical Navigation mode
27
*VNV Key
(if equipped)
*NOSE UP Key
28
*NOSE DN Key
Controls the active pitch reference for the Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level
Change modes.
Controls the active pitch reference for the Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level
Change modes.
INDEX
APPENDICES
*This Key only appears on the MFD
6
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECURE DIGITAL CARDS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for instructions on updating the aviation databases.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Ensure that the system is powered off before inserting the SD card.
EIS
The GDU 1050/1054 data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the top right portion
of the display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for aviation
database and system software updates. Also, flight plans may be imported or exported from an SD card in the
MFD.
Inserting and Removing an SD card
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch engages. The front of the card
should remain flush with the face of the display bezel. To remove, gently press on the SD card to release the
spring latch and eject the card.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SD Card Slots
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-3 PFD/MFD Display Bezel SD Card Slots
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
7
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section discusses powering up the system, normal and reversionary display operation, system status, AHRS
modes of operation, and GPS receiver operation.
SYSTEM POWER-UP
NOTE: See the Appendices for additional information regarding system-specific annunciations and alerts.
EIS
NOTE: See the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for specific procedures concerning avionics power
application and emergency power supply operation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical busses.
The PFD, MFD, and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features that
exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, and external inputs and outputs to provide safe operation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When powering up the system, test annunciations are displayed and key annunciator lights also become
momentarily illuminated on the audio panel and the display bezels. On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize
and displays ‘AHRS ALIGN: Remain Stationary’. All system annunciations should disappear typically within
one minute of power-up.
When the MFD powers up, the MFD Power-up Page displays the following information:
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• System version
• Land database name and version
• Safe Taxi database name and effective dates
• Terrain database name and version
• Obstacle database name and effective dates
• IFR/VFR charts
• Navigation database name and effective dates
• Airport Directory name and effective dates
• FliteCharts/ChartView database information
• Crew Profile
• Copyright
• Checklist File
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Current database information includes the valid operating dates, cycle number and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted
to continue.
8
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NORMAL OPERATION
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD (see Section 1.5). In
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
reversionary mode, it can be adjusted from the remaining display.
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information). The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see
the Flight Management Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System
(see the EIS Section). Both displays offer control for COM and NAV frequency selection.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-4 System Normal Operation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
9
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
REVERSIONARY MODE
NOTE: The system alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to the Appendices for
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
further information regarding system-specific alerts.
In the event of a display failure, the system can be manually switched to reversionary (backup) mode (all
remaining displays enter reversionary mode). In reversionary mode, all important flight information is presented
on the remaining display(s) in the same format as in normal operating mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
If a display fails, the appropriate IAU-display Ethernet interface is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer
communicate with the remaining display (refer to Figure 1-5), and the NAV and COM functions provided to
the failed display by the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup
paths for the AHRS, ADC, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is
completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.
Reversionary mode may be manually activated by pressing the Audio Panel’s red DISPLAY BACKUP Button.
Pressing this button again deactivates reversionary mode.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NAV1 and COM1 Flagged Invalid (provided by the failed PFD)
DISPLAY BACKUP Button
Manually Activates/Deactivates Reversionary Mode on All Displays
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-5 Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)
10
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
NOTE: Upon power-up, certain windows remain invalid as system equipment begins to initialize. All windows
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window continues to remain flagged, the
system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red or amber ‘X’ is typically displayed on windows associated
with the failed data (refer to Table 1-1 for all possible flags and the responsible LRUs). Refer to the Pilot’s
Operating Handbook (POH) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
EIS
The status of detected LRUs can be checked on the Aux - System Status Page. Active LRUs are indicated by
green check marks; failed by red ‘X’s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or Garmin-authorized
dealer informed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Viewing LRU information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘LRU Info’ Box,
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the LRU Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) With ‘Select LRU Window’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view LRU status information.
NOTE: Refer to the POH for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
11
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System Annunciation
Comment
System Annunciation
Comment
Air Data, Attitude and Heading
Reference System is aligning.
Display system is not receiving
vertical speed input from the
air data computer.
Display system is not receiving
attitude information from the
AHRS.
Display system is not receiving
valid heading input from the
AHRS or magnetometer.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Display system is not receiving
altitude input from the air data
computer.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AHRS calibration incomplete or
configuration module failure.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS information is either
not present or is invalid for
navigation use. Note that
AHRS utilizes GPS inputs
during normal operation.
AHRS operation may be
degraded if GPS signals are not
present (see POH).
Other Various Red and
Amber X Indications
Display system is not receiving
valid OAT information from the
air data computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid transponder information.
A red or amber ‘X’ through
any other display field (such as
engine instrumentation fields)
indicates that the field is not
receiving valid data.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Display system is not receiving
airspeed input from the air
data computer.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 1-1 System Annunciations
12
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The System Status Page displays the status and software version numbers for all detected system LRUs.
Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by green check marks
and failed LRUs are indicated by red “X”s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or Garmin dealer
informed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-6 Example System Status Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The LRU and ARFRM Softkeys on the System Status Page select the applicable list (LRU Information or
Airframe Window) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll information within the selected window.
AFCS
Pressing the MFD1 DB Softkey (label annunciator turns green indicting the softkey is pressed) places the
cursor in the database window. Use the FMS Knob to scroll through database information for the MFD.
Pressing the softkey again will change the softkey label to PFD1 DB. PFD 1 database information is now
displayed in the database window. Pressing the softkey a third time will change the softkey label back to MFD1
DB. MFD database information is displayed again in the database window.
The ANN Test Softkey, when selected, causes an annunciation test tone to be played.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
13
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AHRS OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for specific AHRS alert information.
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating normally may degrade AHRS accuracy.
EIS
In addition to using internal sensors, the AHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and air data
to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the AHRS relies upon GPS and magnetic field
measurements. If either of these external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the AHRS uses air data
information for attitude determination. Four AHRS modes of operation are available and depend upon the
combination of available sensor inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor inputs is communicated
to the pilot by message advisory alerts.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The AHRS corrects for shifts and variations in the Earth’s magnetic field by applying the Magnetic Field
Variation Database. The Magnetic Field Variation Database is derived from the International Geomagnetic
Reference Field (IGRF). The IGRF is a mathematical model that describes the Earth’s main magnetic field
and its annual rate of change. The database is updated approximately every 5 years. See the Appendices for
information on updating the Magnetic Field Variation Database. The system will prompt you on startup when
an update is available. Failure to update this database could lead to erroneous heading information being
displayed to the pilot.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Mag Data AND Air Data
Available and Reliable?
NO
YES
NO
YES
Mag Data Available and Reliable?
NO
YES
GPS Data Available and Reliable?
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
YES
APPENDICES
AHRS Normal
Mode
NO
Air Data Available and Reliable?
AHRS no-Mag
Mode
AHRS no-Mag/
no-Air Mode
Heading
HeadingInvalid
Invalid
Attitude/Heading
Invalid
Heading Invalid
AHRS no-GPS
Mode
AHRS coast-on-gyros
until invalid
Attitude/Heading
Invalid
Attitude/Heading Invalid
INDEX
Figure 1-7 AHRS Operation
14
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS INPUT FAILURE
NOTE: In-flight initialization of AHRS, when operating without any valid source of GPS data and at true
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
air speed values greater than approximately 200 knots, is not guaranteed. Under these rare conditions, it
is possible for in-flight AHRS initialization to take an indefinite amount of time which would result in an
extended period of time where valid AHRS outputs are unavailable.
EIS
The system provides two sources of GPS information. If a single GPS receiver fails, or if the information
provided from one of the GPS receivers is unreliable, the AHRS seamlessly transitions to using the other GPS
receiver. An alert message informs the pilot of the use of the backup GPS path. If both GPS inputs fail, the
AHRS continues to operate in reversionary No-GPS mode so long as the air data and magnetometer inputs
are available and valid.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIR DATA INPUT FAILURE
A failure of the air data input has no effect on AHRS output while AHRS is operating in normal mode. A
failure of the air data input while the AHRS is operating in reversionary No-GPS mode results in invalid
attitude and heading information on the PFD (as indicated by red “X” flags).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MAGNETOMETER FAILURE
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS transitions to one of the reversionary No-Magnetometer modes
and continues to output valid attitude information. However, if the aircraft is airborne, the heading output
on the PFD does become invalid (as indicated by a red “X”).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
15
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS RECEIVER OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
These GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has
acquired satellites before the other, or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired a SBAS signal. While
the aircraft is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by obstructions causing one GPS receiver to
have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning the aircraft may result in one of the GPS
receivers temporarily losing the SBAS signal.
Each GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Information collected by the specified
receiver (GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the Aux - GPS Status Page.
EIS
If the sensor annunciation persists, check for a system failure message in the Messages Window on the PFD.
If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Page and compare the information for GPS1 and GPS2.
Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
Satellite Signal
Information Status
GPS Receiver
Status
RAIM
Availability
Prediction
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Satellite Constellation
Diagram
EGNOS, MSAS
and WAAS
Selected
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Satellite Signal
Strength Bars
GPS Selection
Softkeys
RAIM Softkey
Selected
SBAS Softkey Selected
APPENDICES
Figure 1-8 GPS Status Page (RAIM or SBAS Selected)
The GPS Status Page provides the following information:
• Constellation
INDEX
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a sky view diagram. The sky view is
always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle representing
45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead.
Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite
identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
16
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Satellite Status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This box provides information regarding signal status. The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix is calculated
using Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution of Precision (DOP), and horizontal and vertical figures
of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a circle centered on an estimated horizontal position in
which actual position has 95% probability of laying. EPU is a statistical error indication and not an actual
error measurement.
EIS
DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are relative to
each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy. HFOM and VFOM,
measures of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95% confidence horizontal and
vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS receiver.
The current calculated GPS position, time, altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft are displayed
below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GPS Status
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active GPS
receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the receiver is in the
process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data (collected
continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be in view.
‘Acquiring’ is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired for computing
a solution.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D differential GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. SBAS (Satellite-Based Augmentation System)
indicates ‘Inactive’. When acquisition is complete, the solution status indicates 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS
indicates ‘Active’.
Viewing GPS receiver status information:
AFCS
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group (see Section 1.4 for information on navigating MFD
page groups).
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
Selecting the GPS receiver for which data may be reviewed:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
2) To change the selected GPS receiver:
Press the desired GPS Softkey.
APPENDICES
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
17
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) Prediction (RAIM Softkey is Pressed)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In most cases performing a RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected
approach may be outside the SBAS coverage area, and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for
the intended approach.
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to
calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0
nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of
flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
EIS
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
system automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by
the messages, “Approach is not active” and “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP”. If RAIM is not available
when crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure must be flown.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘Waypoint’ Field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window.
5) Enter the desired waypoint:
Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier, facility, or city name and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Or:
a) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan, Nearest, Recent, or User waypoints, if
required.
c) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint. The system automatically fills in the
identifier, facility, and city fields with the information for the selected waypoint.
INDEX
APPENDICES
d) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
18
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) With the cursor highlighting ‘Compute RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one of
the following is displayed:
• ‘Compute RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘Computing Availability’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM Available’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
• ‘RAIM not Available’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
EIS
Predicting RAIM availability at present position:
1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘Waypoint’ Field is highlighted.
4) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9) With the cursor highlighting ‘Compute RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one of
the following is displayed:
• ‘Compute RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘Computing Availability’—RAIM calculation in progress
AFCS
• ‘RAIM Available’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
• ‘RAIM not Available’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
19
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SBAS Selection (SBAS Softkey is pressed)
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the SBAS coverage area, it may
be desirable to disable EGNOS, WAAS or MSAS (although it is not recommended). When disabled, the SBAS
Field in the GPS Status box indicates Disabled. There may be a small delay for the GPS Status box to be
updated upon WAAS and MSAS enabling/disabling.
Disabling SBAS:
1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
2) If necessary, press the SBAS Softkey.
EIS
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘EGNOS’, ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’.
4) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GPS Satellite Signal Strengths
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor satellite
coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed
for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for WAAS) below
each bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal bar appearance:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
- Cyan bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
- Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
- “D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
20
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.4 ACCESSING SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY
SOFTKEY FUNCTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Selection softkeys are located along the bottom of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey
level previously selected. The bezel keys below the softkey labels can be used to select the appropriate softkey.
There are three types of softkeys. One selects a simple on/off state, indicated by an annunciator on the softkey
label displayed as green (on) or gray (off). The next type of softkey selects among several options, indicated by
the softkey label changing (with the exception of the Map Range keys) to reflect the name of the chosen option.
The last type of softkey, when selected displays another set of softkeys available for the selected function. Also,
these softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity. When a softkey function is disabled,
the softkey label is subdued (dimmed).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Softkey On Softkey Subdued
Softkey Names
(displayed)
Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (press)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-9 Softkeys (First-Level PFD Configuration)
PFD SOFTKEYS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PFD softkeys provide control over the PFD display and some flight management functions, including
GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic, and weather (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a Back Softkey which can be
Pressed to return to the previous level. If messages remain after acknowledgement, the Alerts Softkey is black
on white. The Alerts Softkey is visible in all softkey levels. For the top level softkeys and the transponder
(XPDR) levels, the Ident Softkey remains visible.
Level 2
Level 3
Map/HSI
Layout
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Description
Displays the PFD Map display settings softkeys.
Displays the PFD Map selection softkeys.
Removes the PFD map from display (Inset or Traffic).
Displays the Inset Map.
Displays the HSI Map.
Replaces the PFD Map with a dedicated traffic display.
Displays/removes the name of the selected data link weather provider
(SiriusXM) and the weather product icon and age box (for enabled
weather products).
APPENDICES
Map Off
Inset Map
HSI Map
TFC Map
Wx LGND
Level 4
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Level 1
AFCS
The following table describes PFD Softkey functions. Softkeys which display another set of softkeys are
indicated in the table by showing the given set as an increased level. For example, the Map/HSI softkey is
shown in the Level 1 column. When pressed, the Map/HSI Softkey will display another set of softkeys and
these softkeys are explained in the Level 2 column. If a softkey on Level 2 provides yet another set of softkey
functions, those new available softkeys are then explained in the Level 3 column, etc.
21
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Detail
Traffic
Topo
EIS
Rel Ter
NEXRAD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
METAR
Lightning
LTNG Off
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Datalink
STRMSCP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TFC Map
PFD Opt
SVT
AFCS
Pathways
Terrain
HDG LBL
APT Sign
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Wind
APPENDICES
Off
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Description
Selects desired amount of map detail:
All (No Declutter): All map features visible
Detail 3: Declutters land data
Detail 2: Declutters land and SUA data
Detail 1: Removes everything except for the active flight plan
Displays traffic information on PFD Map.
Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and
elevation scale on PFD Map.
Displays relative terrain information on the PFD Map.
Displays XM NEXRAD weather and coverage on PFD Map (subscription
optional).
Displays METAR information on PFD Map (subscription optional).
Adds/removes the display of SiriusXM lightning information on PFD Map.
Disables lightning function on PFD Map. The softkey annunciator is green
when the lightning function is off.
Selects the data link weather source for the PFD Map.
Adds or removes the display of Stormscope information on the PFD Map.
The softkey annunciator is green when the function is on. When the
function is off, the annunciator is gray (optional).
Replaces the PFD Map with a dedicated traffic display.
Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD options.
Displays additional SVT overlay softkeys.
Displays Pathway Boxes on the Synthetic Vision Display.
Enables synthetic terrain depiction.
Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line.
Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm of the
current aircraft position. Airport identifiers are displayed when the airport
is within approximately 9 nm.
Displays the wind option softkeys.
Wind information not displayed.
Headwind/Tailwind and crosswind components.
Wind direction arrow and speed.
Wind direction arrow with direction and speed.
Displays DME Information (optional).
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through NAV1, NAV2, GPS/
waypoint identifier and GPS-derived distance information, ADF/frequency,
and Off.
INDEX
DME
Bearing 1
Level 4
22
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 2
Level 3
Bearing 2
Meters
IN
HPA
STD Baro
XPDR
Displays the transponder selection softkeys.
Selects transponder Standby Mode (transponder does not reply to any
interrogations).
Standby
On
ALT
0-7
Ident
Ident
APPENDICES
Tmr/Ref
Nearest
Alerts or
Message
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Ident
AFCS
BKSP
Activates transponder (transponder replies to identification interrogations).
Altitude Reporting Mode (transponder replies to identification and altitude
interrogations).
Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in the U.S.A. only).
Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7.
Use numbers to enter code.
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen.
Removes numbers entered, one at a time.
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen.
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen.
Displays Timer/References Window.
Displays Nearest Airports Window.
Displays the Alerts Window when pressed. System generated messages
cause the Alerts Softkey label to change to a flashing ‘Message’ label.
Pressing the Message Softkey opens the Alerts Window, acknowledges the
message, and the softkey reverts to the ‘Alerts’ label.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VFR
Code
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Cycles through FMS, NAV1, and NAV2 navigation modes on the CDI.
Displays the ADF/DME Tuning Window, allowing selection and tuning of
the ADF and DME (optional).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CDI
ADF/DME
EIS
OBS
Description
Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through NAV1, NAV2, GPS/
waypoint identifier and GPS-derived distance information, ADF/frequency, and
Off.
Displays softkeys to select altitude unit parameters.
When enabled, displays altimeter in meters.
Press to display the BARO setting as inches of mercury.
Press to display the BARO setting as hectopascals.
Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if metric units are
selected).
Selects OBS mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with
active leg). When OBS is on, the softkey annunciator is green.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ALT Units
Level 4
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
Table 1-2 PFD Softkeys
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
23
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MFD SOFTKEYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The MFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and weather (optional). There are many softkey functions available on the MFD depending on the page group
and screen selected.
EIS
The following table provides an example of the MFD Softkey functions accessed from the Navigation Map
screen. Further information concerning softkeys providing more navigation and flight planning functions
may be found in the Flight Management Section. Terrain, traffic, and weather softkey descriptions may
be found in the Hazard Avoidance section. Further description of optional equipment and corresponding
softkey functions may be found in the Additional Features Section.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Level 1
Engine
Level 2
Level 3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Engine
DEC Fuel
INC Fuel
RST Fuel
Map Opt
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic
Inset
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Off
VSD
INDEX
APPENDICES
TER
Description
Displays EIS - Engine Page and second-level engine softkeys; press again to exit page
(see the EIS Section for more information).
Returns to previously shown softkeys.
Decreases calculated fuel remaining by 1 gallon for each softkey press.
Increases calculated fuel remaining by 1 gallon for each softkey press.
Resets calculated fuel remaining to default and resets fuel used to zero.
Displays system oil pressure and temperature, fuel calculations, and electrical system
information.
Displays traffic information on Navigation Map Page.
Displays inset window second level softkeys.
Removes VSD inset from Navigation Map Page.
Displays VSD profile information of terrain/obstacles along the current track, vertical
track vector, and selected altitude.
Auto: Automatically displays either VSD profile information for active flight plan information or along current track with no
active flight plan.
FPL: Displays VSD profile information for active flight plan.
TRK: Displays VSD profile information along current track.
Displays terrain on the map; cycles through the following:
Off: No terrain information shown on MFD Map.
Topo: Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and elevation scale on MFD Map.
REL: Displays relative terrain information on the MFD Map.
24
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 2
AWY
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Checklist
AFCS
DP
STAR
APR
WX
NOTAM
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CHRT Opt
Show Map
or Chart
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Charts
EIS
Detail
Description
Displays airways on the map; cycles through the following:
Off: No airways are displayed.
On: All airways are displayed.
LO: Only low altitude airways are displayed.
HI: Only high altitude airways are displayed.
Displays Stormscope information on Navigation Map (optional).
Displays XM NEXRAD weather and coverage on Navigation Map Page (optional).
Displays XM lightning information on Navigation Map Page (optional).
Displays METAR information on PFD Map (subscription optional).
Displays legends for the displayed XM Weather products (optional).
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through the following levels:
Detail All: All map features visible.
Detail-3: Declutters land data.
Detail-2: Declutters land and SUA data.
Detail-1: Removes everything except for the active flight plan.
When available, displays optional airport and terminal procedure charts.
Displays chart display settings softkeys (if available).
Show Map places the applicable WPT - Airport Information page depiction upon
the map for the chart currently selected. Chart displays the chart for the WPTAirport Information Page Softkey that is currently selected and returns to the Charts
Level 2 Softkeys.
Pressing the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view
is on a different chart.
Displays departure procedure chart.
Displays standard terminal arrival procedure chart.
Displays approach procedure chart.
Displays weather information.
Displays NOTAM information for selected airport, when available.
When available, displays optional checklists.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
STRMSCP
NEXRAD
XM LTNG
METAR
Legend
Level 3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
Table 1-3 MFD Navigation Map Page Softkeys
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
25
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MENUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system has a MENU Key that, when pressed, displays a context-sensitive list of options. This options list
allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to the currently
displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to additional
submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘No Options’ when there are
no options for the window/page selected. The main controls used in association with all window/page group
operations are described in Section 1.2. Softkey selection does not display menus or submenus.
Navigating the Page Menu Window:
EIS
1) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Window.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar appears to the right of the window
when the option list is longer than the window).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) The CLR Key may be pressed to remove the menu and cancel the operation. Pressing the FMS Knob also
removes the displayed menu.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
No Options with
NRST Window
Displayed on PFD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Options with
FPL Window
Displayed on MFD
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 1-10 Page Menu Examples
26
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MFD PAGE GROUPS
NOTE: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.
EIS
Active Page Title
Page Group
MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information on the MFD is presented on pages grouped according to function. The page group and active
page title are displayed in the upper center of the screen, below the Navigation Data Bar. In the bottom right
corner of the screen, a page group window is displayed by turning either FMS Knob. The page group tabs are
displayed along the bottom of the window. The page titles are displayed in a list above the page group tabs. The
current page group and current page within the group are shown in cyan. For some of these pages (Airport/
Procedures/Weather Information, XM, Procedure Loading), the active title of the page changes while the page
name in the list remains the same.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pages in
Current
Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Page Groups
Figure 1-11 Page Title and Page Groups
AFCS
The main page groups are navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary depending
on the configuration of optional equipment.
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to display the list of page groups; continue turning the large FMS Knob until the
desired page group is selected.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired page within a specific page group.
APPENDICES
There are several pages which may be selected by selecting the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page
(or from the page menu). In this case, the page title will change when a different page softkey is selected, but
the page will remain the same (i.e. the Radio and Info softkeys show different page titles (‘Aux - XM Radio’ and
‘Aux - XM Information’ respective) within the same page, ‘XM Radio’.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
27
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Page Group
Map (Map Page Group)
Pages within Page Group
• Navigation Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• IFR/VFR Charts
• Traffic Map
• Stormscope® (service optional)
• Weather Data Link (service optional)
EIS
WPT (Waypoint Page Group)
• Terrain-SVT (service optional)
• Airport Information
- Airport Information (Info 1 Softkey)
- Airport Directory Information (Info 2 Softkey)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Departure Information (DP Softkey)
- Arrival Information (STAR Softkey)
- Approach Information (APR Softkey)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Weather Information (optional) (WX Softkey)
• Intersection Information
• NDB Information
• VOR Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• VRP Information
Aux (Auxiliary Page Group)
• User Waypoint Information
• Trip Planning
• Utility
AFCS
• GPS Status
• System Setup 1/2
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• XM Radio (service optional)
- XM Radio (Radio Softkey)
- XM Information (Info Softkey)
• Satellite Phone (service optional)
- Telephone (Phone Softkey)
APPENDICES
- Text Messaging (SMS Softkey)
• Maintenance WiFi Setup
• System Status
• ADS-B Status
INDEX
• Databases
28
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Page Group
FPL (Flight Plan Page Group)
Pages within Page Group
• Active Flight Plan
• Flight Plan Catalog
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NRST (Nearest Page Group)
- Stored Flight Plan (New Softkey)
• Nearest Airports
• Nearest Intersections
• Nearest NDB
• Nearest VOR
EIS
• Nearest VRP
• Nearest User WPTS
EIS (Engine Indication System)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Nearest Frequencies
• Nearest Airspaces
• System Instruments and Fluid Quantities
Table 1-4 Page Group and Pages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PROCEDURE PAGES (PROC)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Procedure Pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu is
initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading Page is
opened. Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure pages.
• Approach Loading
• Arrival Loading
• Departure Loading
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
29
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM SETTINGS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System settings are managed from the System Setup Pages. The System Setup Pages allow management of the
crew profiles. Also, fields shown in cyan text may be edited for following system parameters:
• Time display format (local or UTC )
• Displayed measurement units
• Barometric Transition Alert
(see the Flight Instruments Section)
• GPS Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) range
(see the Flight Instruments Section)
• COM transceiver channel spacing (see the Audio Panel and CNS Section)
EIS
• Airspace alerts • Displayed nearest airports
(see the Flight Management Section)
(see the Flight Management Section)
• Arrival alert
• Electronic Stability & Protection (ESP)
(see the Additional Features Section)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Flight Director Format
(Single Cue Only - can not edit)
(see the Flight Instruments Section)
• Audio Voice Format
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• MFD Data Bar Fields
(see the Flight Management Section)
Restoring system setup defaults:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ or ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Defaults Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Restore Page Defaults’, and press the ENT Key.
The message ‘Restore Setup X Page Defaults?’ is displayed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
30
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Configure System
Time
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Fields shown in Cyan may
be edited
Change Display
Unit Settings
Configure arrival alert settings
- Enable / disable alert
- Set arrival alert trigger distance
EIS
Restore System Defaults
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Crew Profile
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Choose active profile
- Create new profile
- Edit, rename, and delete
existing profile (other than
default profile)
- Import / Export profile to
SD Card
Change audio
alert voice setting
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select System Setup Page
Figure 1-12 System Setup 1/2 Pages
- Setup 1
- Setup 2
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
31
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
DATE/TIME
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system obtains the current Universal Time Coordinated(UTC) date and time directly from the GPS
satellite signals (shown on the Aux - GPS Status Page). System time (displayed in the lower right corner of
the PFD) can be displayed in three formats: local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC. Local time is set by adding/
subtracting an offset (hours:minutes) to/from UTC.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-13 System Time (UTC Format)
Configuring the system time:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Time Format’ Field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm selection. If local time
format is selected, the ‘Time Offset’ Field is highlighted.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) If necessary, use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) and press the ENT Key to confirm
selection.
INDEX
Figure 1-14 Date/Time Settings (System Setup 1 Page)
32
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CREW PROFILES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System settings may be saved under a crew profile. When the system is powered on, the last selected crew
profile is shown on the MFD Power-up Splash Screen. The system can store up to 25 profiles; the currently
active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory available are shown at the top of
the System Setup Page in the box labeled ‘Crew Profile’. From here, crew profiles may be created, selected,
renamed, or deleted. Crew profiles may also be exported from the system to an SD card, or imported from
an SD card into the system.
Creating a profile:
EIS
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Create’ in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ Window is displayed.
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Crew profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or other previously created profile settings.
7) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) With ‘Create’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile.
Or:
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Create & Activate’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
9) To cancel the process, select ‘Cancel’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Selecting an active profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Active’ profile Field in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the crew profile list and highlight the desired profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The system loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
APPENDICES
Renaming a profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Rename’ in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
INDEX
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ Window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
33
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) With ‘Rename’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting a profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
EIS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete’ in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ Window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) With ‘Delete’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
Importing a profile from an SD card:
1) Insert an SD card containing the crew profile(s) into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the Import Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Import Crew Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
4) The system displays the ‘Crew Profile Importing’ Window with ‘Import’ highlighted. Turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight the ‘Profile Name’ Field, then scroll to the desired profile name with the large and small FMS Knobs,
then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key with ‘Import’ highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) If the imported profile name is the same as an existing profile on the system, the system displays an ‘Overwrite
existing profile? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace profile on the system with the profile
imported from the SD card, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to the
‘Crew Profile Importing’ Window.
INDEX
APPENDICES
6) If successful, the system displays ‘Crew profile import succeeded.’ in the Window below. With ‘OK’ highlighted,
press the ENT or CLR Keys or press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page. The
imported profile becomes the active profile.
34
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Crew Profile Importing and Import
Results Window
Crew Profiles Available for Import
from SD Card
Import Successful
EIS
Figure 1-15 Pilot Profile Import (Aux - System Setup Page)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Exporting a profile to an SD card:
1) Insert the SD card for storing the Crew Profile into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the Export Softkey. The system displays the ‘Crew Profile Exporting’ Window.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Export Crew Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) To export the crew profile using the current selected profile, press the ENT Key with ‘Export’ highlighted. To
change the selected profile, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Profile Name’ Field, then scroll to the
desired profile name with the large and small FMS Knobs, then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key
with ‘Export’ highlighted.
AFCS
5) If the selected profile to be exported is the same as an existing profile file name on the SD card, the system
displays an ‘Overwrite existing profile? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace the profile on
the SD card with the profile to be exported, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key
to return to the ‘Pilot Profile Exporting’ Window without exporting the profile.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) If successful, the window displays ‘Crew profile export succeeded.’ With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT or CLR
Keys, or press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page.
APPENDICES
Export Successful
INDEX
Crew Profile Exporting Window, Enter
a Name to Use for Exported Profile
Figure 1-16 Pilot Profile Export (Aux - System Setup Page)
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
35
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PILOT PROFILE IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
In some circumstances, some messages may appear in conjunction with others:
Displayed if the SD card does not have one or more valid pilot profile
filenames.
Displayed if the profile name matches the name of existing profile.
Displayed if the profile name is invalid.
Displayed if the maximum number for pilot profiles has been reached.
Displayed if the importing operation fails for any other reason.
Displayed if the importing operation succeeds.
Displayed if the filename matches the name of an existing file on the SD card.
Displayed if the export operation fails.
Displayed if the export operation succeeds.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
‘No pilot profile plan files found to
import.’
‘Overwrite existing profile?’
‘Profile name invalid. Enter a different
profile name.’
‘All available pilot profiles in use. Delete a
profile before importing another.’
‘Pilot profile import failed.’
‘Pilot profile import succeeded.’
‘Overwrite existing file?’
‘Pilot profile export failed.’
‘Pilot profile export succeeded.’
36
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DISPLAY UNITS
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the system screens are listed on the System Setup Page.
The Navigation Angle reference, the Temperature units, and the Position units can be set from here.
N/A
N/A
All positions
N/A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Position
Engine Indication System (EIS)
AFCS
Weight**
All temperatures on PFD
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
Fuel parameters (Trip Planning Page)
Altimeter
Vertical Speed Indicator
VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Fuel and Fuel Flow
APPENDICES
Celsius*
Fahrenheit
Gallons*
IMP GALS
Kilograms
Liters
Pounds
Pounds*
Kilograms
HDDD°MM.MM’
HDDD°MM’SS.S”*
MGRS 1m
MGRS 10m
UTM/UPS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Temperature
Airspeed Indicator
True Airspeed (PFD)
Wind speed vector
Map range (Traffic Page, Terrain
Proximity/TAWS Page)
CDI scaling (System Setup)
Fuel range calculation (EIS)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude and Vertical
Speed
Exceptions
EIS
Distance and Speed
Settings
Affected Quantities
Magnetic (North)* Heading
True (North)
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind direction (Trip Planning Page)
Metric
Crosstrack error (HSI)
Nautical*
Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK Fields (Navigation Data Bar)
All distances on MFD
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)
Arrival Alert trigger distance (System Setup)
All speeds on MFD
Feet*
All altitudes on MFD
Meters
All elevations on MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Category
Navigation Angle
* Default setting
** Contact a Garmin-authorized service center to change this setting
Table 1-5 Display Units Settings (System Setup Page)
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
37
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Changing a display unit setting:
1) While on the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Display Units’ Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired units.
4) Press the ENT Key. Press the CLR Key to cancel the action without changing the units.
ARRIVAL ALERTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Arrival Alert Box on the System Setup 1 Page allows the Alerts Window arrival alerts to be turned ‘On/
Off’ and the alert trigger distance (up to 99.9 units) set for alerts in the Alerts Window and the PFD Navigation
Status Box. An arrival alert can be set to notify the pilot with a message upon reaching a user-specified
distance from the final destination (the direct-to waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight plan). When
Arrival Alerts is set to ‘On’, and the set distance is reached, an “Arrival at waypoint” message is displayed in
the PFD Navigation Status Box, and a “WPT ARRIVAL - Arriving at waypoint - [xxxx]” is displayed in the
Alerts Window. When Arrival Alerts is set to ‘Off’, only the PFD Navigation Status Box message “Arriving at
waypoint” is displayed, and it is displayed when the time to the final destination is approximately ten seconds.
Figure 1-17 Arrival Alert Settings (System Setup 1 Page)
Enabling/disabling the Alerts Window arrival alert:
AFCS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘On/Off’ Field in the ‘Arrival Alert’ Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert On or counterclockwise to turn the alert Off.
Changing the arrival alert trigger distance:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Distance’ Field in the ‘Arrival Alert’ Box.
INDEX
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter a trigger distance and press the ENT Key.
38
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO ALERTS
The Audio Box on the System Setup 2 Page allows the audio alert voice setting (male or female).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Changing the audio alert voice:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Voice’ Field in the ‘Audio’ Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to select the desired voice setting and press the ENT Key.
EIS
SYSTEM UTILITIES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
For flight planning purposes, timers, trip statistics, and a scheduler feature are provided on the Aux - Utility
Page. The timers available include a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer, and a record of the
time of departure. Trip statistics—odometer, trip odometer, and average trip and maximum groundspeeds—are
displayed from the time of the last reset.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-18 Utility Page
TIMERS
APPENDICES
The system timers available on the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page include:
• Stopwatch-like generic timers
• Total-time-in-flight timer
• Time since departure
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the countdown
on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before reaching zero on
a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when reset, the digits return
to zero.
39
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Setting the generic timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (Up/Dn) and press the ENT Key.
4) If a desired starting time is desired:
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS ‘Generic’ Field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Start?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to
‘Stop?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Stop?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘Reset?’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Reset?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘Start?’ and the digits
are reset.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the
aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
Setting the flight timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Flight’ timer Field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (Pwr-On or In-Air) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the flight timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The system records the time at which departure occurs, depending on whether the pilot prefers the time
to be recorded from system power-up or from aircraft lift off. The displayed departure time can also be reset
to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in which the time is displayed is controlled from
the System Setup Page.
Setting the departure timer starting criterion:
APPENDICES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Departure Time’ Field.
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (Pwr-On or In-Air) and press the ENT Key.
40
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Resetting the departure time:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
TRIP STATISTICS
EIS
The odometer and trip odometer record the total mileage traveled from the last reset; these odometers can
be reset independently. Resetting the trip odometer also resets the average trip groundspeed. Maximum
groundspeed for the period of time since the last reset is also displayed.
Resetting trip statistics readouts:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key. The following reset options for trip statistics are displayed:
• Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS—Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer
• Reset Odometer—Resets odometer readout only
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Reset Maximum Speed—Resets maximum speed readout only
• Reset All—Resets flight timer, departure timer, odometers, and groundspeed readouts
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the desired reset option and press the ENT Key. The selected parameters are
reset to zero and begin to display data from the point of reset.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SCHEDULER
AFCS
The system’s Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., “Change oil”,
“Switch fuel tanks”, “Overhaul”) in the Alerts Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based on a
specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently
whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically
reset to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, messages are retained
until deleted, and message timer countdown is restarted.
Entering a scheduler message:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty field within the ‘Scheduler’ Box.
APPENDICES
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter text within the ‘Message’ Field to be displayed in the ‘Alerts’ Window and press the
ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the ‘Type’ Field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select set the message alert type:
INDEX
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
41
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
9) For event-based messages:
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HHH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MMM-YYY) and press the ENT Key.
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
EIS
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Message’ Field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm message deletion.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Scheduler messages appear in the ‘Alerts’ Window on the PFD and cause the Alerts Softkey label to change
to a flashing ‘Message’ label. Pressing the Message Softkey opens the ‘Alerts’ Window and acknowledges the
scheduler message. The softkey reverts to the ‘Alerts’ label. Pressing the Alerts Softkey again removes the
‘Alerts’ Window from the display and the scheduler message is deleted from the message queue.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 1-19 PFD Alerts Window
42
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.5 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PFD and MFD display backlighting, the PFD and MFD bezel, and the Audio Panel keys can be adjusted
manually in one of two ways:
• Using the individual dimmer bus control for the desired display, or
• Using the PFD Setup Menu and the following procedures. In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be
adjusted from the PFD. In reversionary mode, adjustments can be made from any remaining displays.
Adjusting display backlighting:
EIS
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the ‘PFD Setup Menu’. ‘Auto’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD Display’. If
desired, turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Auto’ next to ‘MFD Display’.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Manual’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.
4) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
Adjusting key backlighting:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the ‘PFD Setup Menu’. ‘Auto’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD Display’.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD Display’ or ‘MFD Display’, as desired.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD Key’ or ‘MFD Key’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Manual’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.
7) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-20 PFD Setup Menu
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
43
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Blank Page
44
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional readouts and bugs on selected flight
instruments. Refer to the AFCS Section for details on these bugs and readouts, as they appear on the display
during certain AFCS flight director modes.
EIS
The system increases pilot situational awareness by providing easy-to-scan Primary Flight Display (PFD)
featuring a large horizon, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and course deviation information. In addition
to the flight instruments, navigation, communication, terrain, traffic, and weather information are also presented
on the PFD and explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
• Horizontal Situation Indicator, showing
– Turn Rate Indicator
– True airspeed
– Bearing pointers and information windows
– Airspeed awareness ranges
– Navigation source
– Vspeed reference bugs
– Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid indication
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Indicated airspeed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Airspeed Indicator, showing
– DME Information Window (optional)
• ADF/DME Tuning Window
• Altimeter, showing
• Transponder Mode, Code, and Ident/Reply
– Barometric setting
• References Window, showing
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– Trend vector
– Generic timer
– Selected altitude
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope, and Glidepath
Indicators
• Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications
• Wind data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Outside air temperature (OAT)
– Barometric or temperature compensated
minimum descent altitude (MDA) or decision
height (DH)
AFCS
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
– Vspeed values
• ISA temperature deviation
The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
45
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
21
19
20
1
18
17
16
2
EIS
15
14
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
13
4
12
5
11
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6
10
7
9
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
1
NAV Frequency Box
12
Turn Rate Indicator
2
Airspeed Indicator
13
Barometric Altimeter Setting
3
True Airspeed
14
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
4
Current Heading
15
Selected Altitude Bug
5
Horizontal Situation Indicator ( HSI)
16
Altimeter
6
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
17
Selected Altitude
7
ISA Temperature Deviation
18
COM Frequency Box
8
Softkeys
19
Navigation Status Box
9
System Time
20
Slip/Skid Indicator
10
Transponder Data Box
21
Attitude Indicator
11
Heading Bug
INDEX
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
46
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
13
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
12
11
10
1
EIS
9
2
8
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7
4
6
8
Annunciation Window
2
Selected Heading
9
Selected Course
3
Wind Data Box
10
4
Inset Map
Required Vertical Speed
Indicator
11 Vertical Deviation Indication
5
Bearing Information Windows
12
VNV Target Altitude
6
Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height
Flight Plan Window
13
Terrain Annunciation
AFCS
Traffic Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
7
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
47
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for airspeed criteria and Vspeed values.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The true airspeed is
displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator. The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving
tape are shown at intervals of 10 knots. The minor tick marks on the moving tape are marked at intervals of
five knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 60 knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The indicated
airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until reaching never-exceed speed
(VNE), at which point it appears red.
Airspeed
Trend Vector
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flaps
Operating
Range
Vspeed
Bugs
Indicated
Airspeed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Speed
Ranges
True
Airspeed
AFCS
Airspeed Indicator
Operating Ranges
Low Speed Range
Red and White
Barber Pole at VNE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator Ranges
Color coded stripes appear on the Airspeed Indicator to show the operating ranges. The low speed range
stripe is red. Normal operating range is green, caution range is amber, and the never exceed speed (VNE) begins
with a red and white barber pole. The flap operating range is indicated by a white stripe.
APPENDICES
A red horizontal bar on the airspeed tape represents VMCA. A cyan horizontal bar represents VYSE.
INDEX
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line that appears to the right of the color-coded speed range
strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating. One end of the magenta line is anchored to the
tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down corresponding to the rate of
acceleration or deceleration. For any constant rate of acceleration or deceleration, the moving end of the line
shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will be in six seconds. The trend vector is absent if the
speed remains constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available.
48
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Vspeeds (Glide, VR, VX, VY,, VLE, and VLO) can be changed and their respective bugs turned on/off from the
References Window. When active (on), the Vspeed bugs are displayed to the right of the airspeed scale. All
Vspeed values are reset and all bugs turned off during power up.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling/disabling and modifying Vspeed bugs:
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey to show the References Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired vspeed bug value.
3) Turn the small FMS Knobs to adjust the value for the selected vspeed bug.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ON/OFF field.
EIS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
References Window
References Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-4 References Window and Menu
Vspeed bugs can be enabled/disabled individually, or collectively.
Enabling/disabling or restoring default values to all vspeed bugs as a group:
AFCS
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘All References On’, ‘All References Off’, or ‘Restore Defaults.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
49
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
GENERIC TIMER
The generic timer can be accessed via softkeys on the PFD and allows for quick access for timing functions
(either counting up or down) for the pilot.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the timer field (HH:MM:SS).
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Up/Dn field is now highlighted.
EIS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the UP/DOWN Window.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Up’ or ‘Dn’.
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘Start?’ is now highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to ‘Stop?’. If the timer is counting DOWN, it will start
counting UP after reaching zero.
9) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Stop?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘Reset?’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
10) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Reset?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘Start?’ and the digits
are reset.
11) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
9
8
AFCS
1
7
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2
6
3
APPENDICES
4
5
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
INDEX
Figure 2-5 Attitude Indicator
50
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks
occur every 2.5˚.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.
EIS
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator bar moves with the roll pointer and
moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate uncoordinated flight. Slip (inside the turn) or skid (outside
the turn) is indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When the optional Garmin Electronic Stability and Protection (Garmin ESP™) system is available, additional
indications may appear on the pitch and roll scales; refer to the Additional Features and AFCS Sections for more
information about Garmin ESP.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-6 Slip/Skid Indication
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ALTIMETER
AFCS
The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a moving tape rolling number gauge.
Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20
feet. The indicated altitude is displayed inside the black pointer.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the upper or lower edge of the tape. When the metric value is selected it is displayed
in a separate box above the Selected Altitude.
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in six seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown
if altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
APPENDICES
Setting the Selected Altitude:
T urn the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude. Turn the large knob for 1000-ft increments, small knob for 100ft increments. If set to Metric mode, the large knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 500-meter increments; the
small knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 50-meter increments..
INDEX
If a Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value has been set, this altitude is also available for
the Selected Altitude.
Altitudes can also be displayed in meters. Note that the altitude tape does not change scale.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
51
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reference
Altitude
Reference
Altitude
(Meters)
EIS
Indicated
Altitude
(Meters)
Altitude
Trend
Vector
Indicated
Altitude
Selected
Altitude
Bug
MDA/DH
Altitude
Bug
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Barometric
Setting
Barometric
Setting Box
(Hectopascals)
Figure 2-7 Altimeter
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying altitude in meters:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT Units Softkey.
3) Press the Meters Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
AFCS
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric pressure setting creates discontinuities
in VNV vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
aircraft to re-establish on the descent patch. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target
Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not operate properly
with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QHN altimeter setting for the height above mean sea level, or the
standard pressure setting, as applicable.
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
APPENDICES
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
Selecting standard barometric pressure (29.92 in Hg):
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
INDEX
2) Press the STD Baro Softkey.
52
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT Units Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).
Or, press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa).
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
EIS
The Baro Transition Alerts flash the barometric pressure setting to remind the pilot to change the barometric
pressure setting to or from standard. Two alerts are available. The altitude Baro Transition Alert occurs when
climbing through the transition altitude beginning at 200 below this altitude. The flight level Baro Transition
Alert occurs when descending through the transition flight level beginning at 200 feet above this flight level.
The barometric pressure setting stops flashing after the pilot changes the barometric pressure setting. The pilot
can enable/disable either Baro Transition Alert, and choose the altitude or flight level used to trigger the alerts.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting the Baro Transition Alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) To enable/disable the Baro Transition Alert based on altitude, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘On’ or
‘Off’ field for the BARO Transition Alert Altitude in the BARO Transition Alert Box.
4) If desired, turn the small FMS Knob to set the BARO Transition Alert Altitude On or Off.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Altitude field.
6) Use the FMS Knob to change the altitude and press the ENT Key to accept or press the CLR Key to return to the
previous altitude selection.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘On’ or ‘Off’ field for the BARO Transition Alert Level.
AFCS
8) If desired, turn the small FMS Knob to set the BARO Transition Alert Flight Level On or Off.
9) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Flight Level field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
10) Use the FMS Knob to change the Flight Level for the alert and press the ENT Key to accept or press the CLR Key
to return to the previous altitude selection.
11) Push the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
53
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator is only available on GPS approaches supporting SBAS vertical guidance when
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SBAS is available.
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) displays the aircraft vertical speed on a fixed scale with labels at 2000 and
4000 fpm and minor tick marks every 1000 fpm. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate
is greater than 100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 4000 fpm, the pointer appears at the edge of the
tape and the rate appears inside the pointer.
EIS
A magenta chevron is displayed on the VSI to indicate the Required Vertical Speed for reaching a VNV target
altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has generated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VERTICAL DEVIATION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI; Figure 2-8) is a magenta chevron indicating the baro-VNV vertical
deviation when Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used. The VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within
1 minute” alert. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight
Management Section for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more
information about VNV indications on the PFD.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Glideslope Indicator (Figure 2-9) appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is
tuned in the active NAV field. A green diamond acts as the Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on
a conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no glideslope, “NO GS” is displayed in
place of the diamond.
VNV Target
Altitude
AFCS
Vertical
Speed
Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Marker
Beacon
Annunciation
Glideslope
Indicator
APPENDICES
Required
Vertical
Speed
Figure 2-9 Glideslope Indicator
INDEX
Figure 2-8 Vertical Speed and
Deviation Indicator (VSI and VDI)
54
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
•
LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V, and LP+V, is +/- 148 feet (45 meters).
•
LPV is +/- 49 feet (15 meters).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Glidepath Indicator is a vertical deviation scale for GPS approach service levels supporting SBAS vertical
guidance (LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LPV, LP+V) or advisory vertical guidance (LNAV+V, LP+V). When one of these
approaches is loaded into the flight plan, GPS is the selected navigation source, and SBAS is used for vertical
approach guidance, the Glidepath Indicator appears as a magenta diamond (Figure 2-10). Full-scale deflection
(two dots), is angular with upper and lower limits. The upper limit is +/-492 feet (150 meters) and lower limits
depend on approach service level.
EIS
If the approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the
diamond.
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator appears on the display as soon as the Final Approach Fix (FAF) becomes the
Glidepath
Indicator
Glidepath
Indicator
Vertical
Deviation
Limit
Indicator
(excessive
deviation)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vertical
Deviation
Limit
Indicator
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
active waypoint. Depending on procedure design, pilot action, and/or ATC clearance, the aircraft may be
centered on or above the glidepath when the Glidepath Indicator appears.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-11 Glidepath Indicator and Vertical
Deviation Limit Indicators
AFCS
Figure 2-10 Glidepath Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
While executing an LNAV/VNAV approach, and between the FAF and MAP, the Vertical Deviation Limit
Indicators appear as vertical white lines (Figure 2-11) indicating the area where deviation exceeds allowable
limits for the glidepath. The Vertical Deviation Limit Indicator provides a scaled representation of +/- 75 feet
of the calculated glidepath. The “window” between the lines represents the area of acceptable deviation. The
length of the lines will change while progressing through the final approach. When the Glidepath Indicator
enters an excessive deviation area, the Glidepath and Vertical Deviation Limit Indicators are amber (Figure
2-11).
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
55
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points with numeric labels every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor
tick marks are at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI. The HSI also
presents turn rate, course deviation, bearing, and selected navigation source information. The HSI is available
in two formats: a 360˚ compass rose and a 210˚ HSI Map. The HSI Map is mutually exclusive with the Inset
Maps.
Enabling/disabling the HSI Map on the PFD:
EIS
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the HSI Map Softkey to enable the HSI Map.
Or:
Press the Map Off Softkey to disable the HSI Map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The HSI with the HSI map disabled presents a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) with a Course Pointer, To/
From Indicator, and a sliding deviation bar and scale. The Course Pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1,
and LOC) or a double line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/
From Indicator rotates with the Course Pointer and appears when the system is receiving the active NAVAID.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
16
15
14
13
12
1
11
2
3
10
AFCS
4
5
9
6
8
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7
1
Current Track Indicator
9
Lateral Deviation Scale
2
Selected Heading Bug
10
Flight Phase
3
11
Course Pointer
4
Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
Navigation Source
12
Selected Course
5
Aircraft Symbol
13
Lubber Line
6
To/From Indicator
14
Current Heading
7
Rotating Compass Card
8
OBS Mode Active
Turn Rate and Heading
Trend Vector
16 Selected Heading
15
Figure 2-12 Horizontal Situation Indicator
56
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The HSI Map is a 210 ˚ expanded compass rose which also includes a navigation map with overlay capabilities
such as topographical, weather, and land information. The HSI Map contains a Course Pointer, a combined To/
From Indicator with a sliding deviation indicator, and a lateral deviation scale. Upon passing a station, the To/
From Indicator points to the tail of the aircraft. Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the HSI Map
can appear either as an arrowhead (GPS, VOR, OBS) as a diamond (LOC). Refer to the Flight Management
Section for information about using HSI Map overlays.
Lateral Deviation Scale
Flight Phase
Annunciation
Navigation Source
Course Pointer
EIS
Course Deviation
Indicator and To/
From Indicator
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-13 HSI Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A digital reading of the current heading appears above the rotating compass card. A magenta diamond on
the HSI represents the current track over the ground the aircraft is flying. To the upper left of the HSI, the
Selected Heading is shown in cyan for three seconds after it is adjusted, which corresponds to the cyan heading
bug on the compass rose. The Desired Track (DTK) is shown in magenta to the upper right of the HSI when
the selected navigation source is GPS and OBS Mode is not active. The Selected Course (CRS) is shown to the
upper right of the HSI when the selected navigation source is VOR or LOC and in magenta when the selected
navigation source is GPS with OBS Mode active. Upon station passage, the To/From Indicator flips and points
to the tail of the aircraft, just like a conventional To/From flag. Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on
the can appear in two different ways: an arrowhead (GPS, VOR, OBS) or a diamond (LOC).
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adjusting the Selected Heading:
Turn the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading.
Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
APPENDICES
Adjusting the Selected Course:
Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course.
Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
57
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Current Track Indicator
Current Heading
Selected Heading
Selected Course
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Heading Bug
Figure 2-14 Heading and Course Indications
The Current Track Indicator, represented by a magenta diamond on the HSI, is the current over the ground
track the aircraft is flying.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag
Var) or referenced to true north (T), set on the Aux - System Setup 1 Page. When an approach referenced to
true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the navigation angle
setting to True at the appropriate time.
Figure 2-15 Heading and Course Indications (True)
Changing the navigation angle true/magnetic setting:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Nav Angle’ in the ‘Display Units’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
• True - References angles to true north (T)
• Magnetic - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag Var)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TURN RATE INDICATOR
APPENDICES
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than
4 deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
Half Standard
Turn Rate
INDEX
Standard
Turn Rate
Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 Degrees
per Second
Figure 2-16 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
58
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV and GPS sources
by pressing the PFD Softkey then a BRG Softkey. The bearing pointers are cyan and are single-line (BRG1)
or double-line (BRG2). A pointer symbol is shown in the information window to indicate the navigation
source. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually separated from the CDI by a white ring,
except when the HSI Map is enabled. Bearing pointers may be selected but not necessarily visible due to data
unavailability.
Bearing 1
Pointer
EIS
Tuning Mode
Frequency
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Bearing 2
Pointer
Distance
DME Information Window
(optional)
Bearing Pointer
Icon
Source
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Distance to
Bearing Source
Bearing 1 Information Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Bearing 2
Information
Window
Figure 2-17 HSI with Bearing and DME Information
When a bearing pointer is displayed, the associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information windows are displayed at the lower sides of the HSI and give the following information:
• Pointer icon (BRG1 = single line, BRG2 = double
line)
• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, GPS)
AFCS
• Bearing source (NAV, GPS, ADF)
• Frequency (ADF)
APPENDICES
When the NAV radio is tuned to an ILS frequency the bearing source and the bearing pointer is removed
from the HSI. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the station
identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier is
displayed instead of a frequency.
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and NO DATA is displayed in the information window if the
NAV radio is not receiving a VOR station or if GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not selected.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
59
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window
with a NAV source.
3) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey again to change the bearing source to GPS.
4) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey a third time to change the bearing source to ADF (note: ADF radio
installation is optional).
EIS
5) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey again.
DME INFORMATION WINDOW
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: DME radio installation is optional.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The DME Information Window is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window and shows the DME
label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD), frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance
is replaced by “–.– – NM”. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the radios.
Displaying the DME Information Window:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window above the BRG1 Information Window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
AFCS
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flight
Phase
Navigation
Source
Scale
Crosstrack
Error
APPENDICES
CDI
Figure 2-18 Course Deviation Indicator
INDEX
The CDI can display two sources of navigation, GPS or VOR/LOC. The color indicates the current navigation
source, magenta for GPS and green for VOR and LOC. The full scale limits for the CDI are defined by an GPSderived distance when coupled to the GPS. If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots)
while navigating with GPS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol. When
navigating using a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI uses the same angular deviation as a mechanical CDI.
60
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 2-19 Navigation Sources
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing navigation sources:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. This places the cyan tuning box over the NAV1
standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD.
2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This places the cyan tuning box
over the NAV2 standby frequency.
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
LOC1
Selected
VOR2
Selected
AFCS
FMS
Selected
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the CDI Softkey
Cycles through
Navigation Sources
Figure 2-20 Selecting a Navigation Source
APPENDICES
The system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling
accordingly when all of the following occur:
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
INDEX
• The final approach fix (FAF) is the active leg, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
• The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
61
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating a
Vector-to-Final (VTF) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source. GPS steering guidance is not
provided after the switch.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
On some ILS approaches where the glideslope intercept point is at or in close proximity to the fix prior to the
FAF, it is possible to be above the glideslope when the navigation source automatically switches from GPS to
LOC. The probability of this occurring varies based on air temperature.
Fix Prior to the FAF
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Glideslope Intercept Point
Figure 2-21 ILS Approach with Glideslope Intercept Point at Fix Prior to the FAF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS CDI SCALING
When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to amber. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, HDG LEG is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as System CDI on the Aux - System Setup 1 Page and the
full-scale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page. If the
selected scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled
accordingly and the selected setting is displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation.
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Format Allowed’ field in the ‘GPS CDI’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
INDEX
When set to Auto (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-22, Table 2-1).
62
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Enroute
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)
Terminal
Approach
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
Terminal
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CDI Full-scale Deflection
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Departure
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
Missed
Approach
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-22 Automatic CDI Scaling
• Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF (see
Glossary for leg type definitions)
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not a CA or FA
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• At 30 nm from the departure airport, the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or
the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
AFCS
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (4.0 nm).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- Upon reaching the first waypoint of an arrival route that is more than 31 nm from the destination airport,
the flight phase changes to terminal and the CDI scale begins to transition down from 2.0 nm to 1.0 nm
over a distance of 1.0 nm.
APPENDICES
• During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (Figures 2-23 and 2-24). This transition normally
occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling automatically
once the approach procedure is activated or if Vectors-To-Final (VTF) are selected.
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and the preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
63
2 nm
FAF
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2 nm
FAF
EIS
angle based
on database
information
course width
angle set
by system
CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
350 ft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CDI Full-scale Deflection
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Landing
Threshold
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
Figure 2-23 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach Service Level
CDI Scaling
Figure 2-24 Typical LNAV/VNAV, Visual, LP, LP+V and LPV
Approach Service Level CDI Scaling
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
• The system automatically switches back to terminal mode under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not a CA or FA
Flight Phase
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
Annunciation*
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN
Approach
(Non-precision)
LNAV
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Approach
(Non-precision with
Advisory Vertical
Guidance)
Approach
(LNAV/VNAV)
Approach
(LPV)
Approach
(Non-precision with
Advisory Vertical
Guidance)
Approach
(LP)
Missed Approach
Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
4.0 nm
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (Figure 2-22)
LNAV + V
L/VNAV
LPV
LP+V
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (Figure 2-23)
LP
MAPR
0.3 nm
* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary
conditions exist the color changes to amber.
Table 2-1 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
64
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OBS MODE
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current Active-to waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. OBS is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
EIS
While OBS is enabled, a course line is drawn through the Active-to waypoint on the moving map. If
desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the FMS flight
plan returns to normal operation, with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight plan on the moving map retains the modified course line.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Extended
Course
Line
OBS Mode
Enabled
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again
Disables OBS Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Enables
OBS Mode
Figure 2-25 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
AFCS
2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press the CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. SUSP appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey label changes
to indicate the suspension is active as shown in the following figure. Pressing the SUSP Softkey, deactivates
the suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
65
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
EIS
SUSP
Softkey
SUSP
Annunciation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-26 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
66
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information, including
temperatures, wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications.
TEMPERATURE DISPLAYS
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) and deviation from International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) temperature
are displayed in the lower left corner of the PFD under normal conditions, or below the true airspeed in
Reversionary Display Mode. Both are displayed in degrees Celsius (°C).
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-27 Outside Air Temperature (PFD)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Changing temperature display units:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD using the FMS Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘TEMPERATURE’ field in the Display Units box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight either ‘Celsius or Fahrenheit’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the
selection.
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
67
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
WIND DATA
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
No Data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Wind direction and speed in knots can be displayed relative to the aircraft in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
displays NO WIND DATA. Wind data can be displayed in three different ways.
Figure 2-28 Wind Data
Displaying wind data:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the Wind Softkey to display wind data to the left of the HSI.
3) Press one of the Option softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
• Option 1: Headwind/tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components
AFCS
• Option 2: Wind direction arrow and speed
• Option 3: Wind direction arrow with headwind/tailwind and crosswind components
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) To remove the window, press the Off Softkey.
68
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) INDICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RVSI, VDI) appear on the
PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD
according to the criteria listed in the table.
Top of Descent Message
EIS
VNV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Phase of
Flight
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-29 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
AFCS
VNV Indication Removed
Required Vertical
Vertical
VNV Target
Speed (RVSI)
Deviation (VDI)
Altitude*
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change
X
X
X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey pressed on MFD)
X
X
X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
X
X
X
Section)
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude
X
X
X
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit
X
X
X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
X
X
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed
Criteria
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Table 2-3 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
69
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.3 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following annunciations and alerting functions pertaining to flight instruments are displayed on the PFD.
Refer to Appendix A for more information on alerts and annunciations.
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
EIS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Altimeter. The outer marker (O)
reception is indicated in cyan, middle (M) in amber, and inner (I) in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS
Section for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Middle Marker
Inner Marker
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Outer Marker
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altimeter
Figure 2-30 Marker Beacon Annunciations
ALTITUDE ALERTING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude Alerting provides the pilot with a visual alert when approaching the Selected Altitude. Whenever the
Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The following occur when approaching the Selected
Altitude:
AFCS
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to black text on a cyan
background and flashes for five seconds.
• When the aircraft passes within 200 feet of the Selected Altitude an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude
changes to cyan text on a black background and flashes for five seconds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude) an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude changes to amber text on a black background and
flashes for five seconds.
APPENDICES
Within 1000 ft
Within 200 ft
Deviation of ±200 ft
INDEX
Figure 2-31 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
70
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
NOTE: A Low Altitude Annunciation is available only when SBAS is available. This annunciation is only
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
available when TAWS-B or Terrain-SVT alerting has been inhibited, is not available, or has failed.
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-amber LOW ALT annunciation appears to the top left of the Altimeter, flashes
for several seconds, then remains displayed until the condition is resolved.
EIS
Figure 2-32 Low Altitude Annunciation on PFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
For altitude awareness, a barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH) can be set in
the References Window and is reset when the power is cycled. When active, the altitude setting is displayed to
the bottom left of the Altimeter. Once the altitude is within the range of the tape, a bug appears at the reference
altitude on the Altimeter. The following visual annunciations occur when approaching the MDA/DH:
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, the BARO MIN or COMP
MIN box appears with the altitude in cyan text. The bug appears on the altitude tape in cyan (or magenta for
COMP MIN) once in range.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn white.
• Once the aircraft reaches MDA/DH, the bug and text turn amber and the voice alert, “Minimums. Minimums”,
is heard.
Within 2500 ft
Within 100 ft
Altitude Reached
AFCS
Barometric
Minimum
Bug
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected
Altitude
Bug
APPENDICES
Barometric
Minimum
Box
Figure 2-33 Barometric MDA/DH Alerting Visual Annunciations
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
71
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the MDA.
If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA, once it reaches 50 feet above the MDA, alerting
is disabled. The function is reset when the power is cycled or a new approach is activated.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Setting the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height and bug:
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Minimums field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select BARO, TEMP COMP, or OFF is selected by default. Press the ENT Key or turn
the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field.
EIS
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (from zero to 16,000 feet).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) If TEMP COMP was selected, press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field and then
enter the temperature (-59˚C to 59˚C)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-34 BARO and TEMP COMP MDA/DH
72
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.4 GARMIN SYNTHETIC VISION TECHNOLOGY (SVT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
EIS
The optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) is a visual enhancement to the Integrated Flight Deck. SVT
depicts a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The field of
view is 30 degrees to the left and 35 degrees to the right. SVT information is shown on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD), or on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. The depicted imagery is derived from the
aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a 4.9 arc-second database of terrain, obstacles,
and other relevant features. The terrain data resolution of nine arc-seconds, meaning that the terrain elevation
contours are stored in squares measuring nine arc-seconds on each side, is required for the operation of SVT. Loss
of any of the required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVT to be disabled until the
required data is restored.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The SVT terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural
features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed even
if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid with
lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the terrain.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) is integrated within SVT to provide visual and auditory
alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the projected flight path. Terrain alerts
are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of the TAWS terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVT.
AFCS
The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:
• Airport Signs
• Flight Path Marker
• Runway Display
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Terrain Alerting
• Traffic Display
• Obstacle Alerting
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Pathways
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
73
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-35 Synthetic Vision Imagery
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT OPERATION
SVT is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVT is enabled, the pitch attitude scale is reduced from 20
degrees up and down to 10 degrees up to 7.5 degrees down.
AFCS
SVT functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Opt Softkey leads into the PFD function
Softkeys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the SVT Softkey displays the SVT feature softkeys. The softkeys
are labeled Pathways, Terrain, HDG LBL, and APT Sign. The Back Softkey returns to the previous level of
softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVT feature may be activated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pathways, HDG LBL, and APT Sign Softkeys are only available when the Terrain Softkey is activated (gray
with black characters). After activating the Terrain Softkey, the Pathways, HDG LBL, and APT Sign softkeys
may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When system power is cycled, the last selected
state (on or off) of the Pathways, Terrain, HDG LBL, and APT Sign softkeys is remembered by the system.
APPENDICES
• Pathways Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
• Terrain Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
• HDG LBL Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
• APT Sign Softkey enables airport signposts.
INDEX
Activating and deactivating SVT:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the Terrain Softkey. The SVT display will cycle on or off with the Terrain Softkey.
74
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Pathways Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the Pathways Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
EIS
3) Press the HDG LBL Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the HDG LBL Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the APT Sign Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APT Sign Softkey.
Airport
Runway
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SVT FEATURES
Selected
Altitude
Synthetic
Terrain
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airplane
Symbol
AFCS
Flight
Path
Marker
Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Horizon
Heading
Marks
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pathways Color
Matches CDI
Indicating Nav
Source
APPENDICES
SVT
Softkeys
Figure 2-36 SVT on the Primary Flight Display
INDEX
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
75
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
PATHWAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored
rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box
size represents 700 feet wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During
an approach, the box width is 700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The
height is 200 feet or one half full scale deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the
pathway boxes are displayed is determined by the higher of either the selected altitude or the VNAV altitude
programmed for the active leg in the flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and
navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes
that correspond to the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a
green CDI. An inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a white line
drawn on the Inset map or MFD map indicating an inactive leg.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Programmed
Altitudes
APPENDICES
Figure 2-37 Programmed and Selected Altitude
INDEX
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath/glideslope information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV,
Visual, and some LNAV approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not
be used independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from
the display when the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the
active leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that
would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.
76
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Departure and Enroute
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg
of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the
first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVT
field of view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching
the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum
of four.
EIS
Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft performance. Flight
plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above the aircraft at the altitude
selected or programmed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Descent and Approach
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
During an approach, Pathways be can shown for the programmed descent, level transition flight, and
at the Selected Altitude within the approach segments. When an approach providing vertical guidance is
activated, the corresponding approach glideslope or glidepath will be displayed using a color corresponding
to the selected navigation source and conditions.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
White Pathways represent the next segment of the approach that is not yet active. Magenta Pathways
represent the active segment with GPS as the navigation source. Green Pathways indicate the ILS/LOC
navigation source. During the arrival/approach phases of flight, gray pathways indicate the anticipated
preview glidepath/glideslope. The gray Approach Preview Pathways will be displayed beginning at the start
of the segment leading to the FAF waypoint. With active approach vertical guidance, the selected altitude
will be displayed as a level gray Pathway if the Selected Altitude is lower than the glidepath/glideslope.
The gray Selected Altitude Preview Pathways are displayed until they converge with the green glideslope
or magenta glidepath pathways. If approach vertical guidance is not yet active, pathways at the Selected
Altitude will be displayed in magenta throughout the arrival/approach.
AFCS
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if GPS is the selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with the
LOC selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and
glideslope. VOR, LOC, BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are
displayed in magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or
VOR final approach courses are not displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
77
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
TOD
EIS
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-38 SVT Pathways, Enroute and Descent
Missed Approach
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
78
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FAF
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Descent displayed
by pathway
Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
by pathway
EIS
MAP Climbs NOT displayed
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MAHP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-39 SVT Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
AFCS
FLIGHT PATH MARKER
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.
APPENDICES
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes as shown.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by TAWS. However, decisions regarding terrain and/or
obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
79
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Wind
Vector
Figure 2-40 Flight Path Marker
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ZERO PITCH LINE
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the horizon when the terrain
horizon is difficult to distinguish from other terrain being displayed. It may not align with the terrain
horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.
AFCS
HORIZON HEADING
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30‑degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the HDG LBL Softkey.
TRAFFIC
APPENDICES
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVT display or may appear as a
partial symbol.
INDEX
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic within 250 feet laterally of the aircraft will not be displayed on the SVT
display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in the Inset map or
MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the SVT display. For
more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.
80
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIRPORT SIGNS
EIS
Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from
an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until
the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the
airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APTSIGNS Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-41 Airport Signs
AFCS
RUNWAYS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WARNING: Do not use SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft
to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not
APPENDICES
displayed.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are displayed in white. Other runways will be gray
in color. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be outlined
with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft gets closer
to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed.
81
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Airport
Runway
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Other
Runway
on Airport
Figure 2-42 Airport Runways
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TERRAIN ALERTING
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts, and corresponds to the yellow terrain shading for a caution alert and the red shading for a warning
alert on the Inset Map and MFD Map displays. For more detailed information regarding Terrain-SVT refer to
the Hazard Avoidance Section.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVT field of view to the left or right of the aircraft.
82
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Terrain
Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain
Caution
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Potential
Impact
Area
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-43 Terrain Caution
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols found
on the Inset map and MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative
height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. Unlike the Inset map and MFD moving map display,
obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors to warn of potential conflict with the aircraft’s
flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert. Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the
aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and altitude displays.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
83
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain
Annunciation
EIS
Potential
Impact
Area
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Potential
Impact
Point
Figure 2-44 Terrain Warning
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FIELD OF VIEW
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a
V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Configuring field of view:
AFCS
1) While viewing the ‘Navigation Map’ Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Map Settings and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Map Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Map Group options to Field of View.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select On or Off.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Navigation Map’ Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and Field of
View turned on.
84
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View
EIS
SVT View on the PFD
Field of View on the MFD
Figure 2-45 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
85
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.5 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS
The annunciations listed in Table 2-4 can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur (Figure
2-46). Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
GPS LOI
Right of HSI
phase of flight
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
GPS INTEG OK Right of HSI
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS
Lower left of
DR
position to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan
aircraft symbol
waypoints
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Annunciation
Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 2-4 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
Figure 2-46 Example HSI Annunciations
APPENDICES
In Dead Reckoning Mode the CDI is removed from the display when GPS is the selected navigation source.
The following items on the PFD are then shown in amber:
• Current Track Indicator
• Wind Data
• Ground Speed
INDEX
• Distances in the Bearing Information Windows
• GPS bearing pointers
These items should be verified when operating in Dead Reckoning Mode as they become increasingly
inaccurate over time.
86
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SVT TROUBLESHOOTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SVT is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs. SVT is
disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVT data, the
PFD display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
SVT becomes disabled without the following data resources:
• Attitude data
• Heading data
• GPS position data
EIS
• 4.9 Arc-second Terrain data
• Obstacle data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• TAWS function is not available, in test mode, or failed
• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
Nose High
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red chevrons pointing toward the horizon warn of extreme
pitch. The chevrons are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon
line.
Nose Low
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-47 Pitch Attitude Warnings
APPENDICES
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display
and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from each PFD and their softkeys are disabled when the aircraft experiences
unusual attitudes:
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
87
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
• Traffic Annunciations
• System Time
• AFCS Annunciations
• PFD Setup Menu
• Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height readout
• Inset Map
• Outside air temperature (OAT)
• Windows displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD:
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
• ISA temperature deviation
– References
• Altimeter Barometric Setting
• Wind data
– Nearest Airports
• Selected Altitude
• Selected Heading readout
– Flight Plan
• VNV Target Altitude
• Selected Course readout
– Messages
• Ground Speed
• Transponder Status Box
– Procedures
• True Airspeed
SVT UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
During extreme pitch attitudes, the display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or bottom
of the screen to represent earth or sky. The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great
enough to completely fill the display. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during extreme
pitch attitudes.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Blue Band
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Terrain
Completely
Fills Display
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-48 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain
88
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM (EIS)
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for limitations.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Engine Indication System (EIS) for the Diamond DA40NG displays critical engine, electrical, fuel, and
other system parameters on the left side of the Multi Function Display (MFD) during normal operations (Figure
3-1).
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-1 Multi Function Display (Normal Operations)
AFCS
The EIS instrument types include dial gauges, horizontal slide bar indicators, and digital displays. Green
bands indicate normal ranges of operation; amber and red bands indicate caution and warning, respectively.
When unsafe operating conditions occur, displays and labels may change color corresponding to the level of the
condition. The pointers on the horizontal bar indicators appear in white to indicate normal operation and change
to amber or red to indicate caution or warning conditions.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If sensory data to an instrument becomes invalid or unavailable, an amber “X” is shown across the instrument.
If a display value is out of range, dashes ‘---’ are shown instead of a display.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
89
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.1 ENGINE DISPLAY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Beneath the dial gauges are displays for fuel flow and horizontal bar indicators for oil temperature and pressure,
coolant temperature, and fuel temperature and quantity.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
EIS
1
3
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4
5
AFCS
6
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7
APPENDICES
8
INDEX
Figure 3-2 Engine Display
90
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1 Engine Load Indicator
Displays current engine load as a percentage
(Load %)
2 Tachometer
Displays propeller speeds in revolutions per minute (rpm)
3 Fuel Flow Indicator
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
(RPM)
Displays digital value of current fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
(FFlow GPH)
4 Oil Temperature Indicator
Displays engine oil temperature ranges
(Oil Temp)
5 Oil Pressure Indicator
Displays engine oil pressure ranges
EIS
(Oil Press)
6 Coolant Temperature Indicator
Displays coolant temperature ranges
(Coolant Temp)
(Fuel Temp)
8 Fuel Quantity Indicator
(Fuel Qty Gal)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7 Fuel Temperature Indicator
Displays fuel temperature for each main tank; pointers labeled L and R
indicate the fuel temperature in each tank
Displays the fuel quantity in gallons (gal) of fuel in the main tanks;
pointers labeled L and R indicate the fuel quantity in each tank.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
91
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.2 ENGINE PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ‘EIS - Engine’ Page displays all engine, fuel, electrical, and fuel calculation information. To access this
page, press the Engine Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob and select EIS. Refer to Table 3-1 for ‘EIS - Engine’
Page softkey functions.
Level 1
Engine
Level 2
EIS
DEC Fuel
INC Fuel
RST Fuel
Description
Displays ‘EIS - Engine’ Page and second-level engine softkeys; press again to exit page
Decreases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Resets displayed fuel remaining to maximum fuel capacity for aircraft and fuel used to zero
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 3-1 Engine Page Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
6
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4
3
7
AFCS
2
8
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1
9
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 3-3 Engine Page
92
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1 Oil Temperature Indicator
Displays engine oil temperature ranges in degrees Celsius (°C)
(Oil °C)
2 Oil Pressure Indicator
Displays engine oil pressure ranges in bar
3 Tachometer
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
(Oil bar)
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm)
(RPM)
4 Engine Load Indicator
Displays current engine load as percentages
(Load %)
6 Electrical
9 Fuel Calculator
Gallons Remain - Displays current fuel remaining (gal) as set by the
pilot and adjusted for fuel burn since last set
Gallons Used - Displays quantity of fuel used (gal) based on fuel flow
since last reset
Endurance - Displays flight time remaining in hours and minutes
(HH:MM) based on the calculated fuel remaining
Range NM - Displays aircraft range in nautical miles (nm) based on the
calculated fuel remaining
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displays fuel quantity in the main tanks in gallons (gal)
Displays fuel temperature for the main tanks in degrees Celsius (°C)
Displays current fuel flow gallons per hour (GPH)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8 Fuel System
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7 Total Service
Displays coolant temperature ranges
Displays the temperature of the gearbox in degrees Celsius (°C)
Displays primary bus voltage
Displays alternator load in amperes (amps)
Displays the aircraft’s total flight hours (hrs); activated when the aircraft
becomes airborne
EIS
5 Fluids
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
93
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FUEL CALCULATIONS
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the fuel was reset.
Fuel used (Gallons Used), Endurance, and range (in nautical miles, Range NM) are calculated based on the
displayed fuel remaining (Gallons Remain) and the fuel flow totalizer. The calculated range also takes into
account the aircraft’s heading and the wind direction and speed.
EIS
Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:
On the Engine Page, use the DEC Fuel and INC Fuel Softkeys to obtain the desired fuel remaining (Gallons
Remain).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Resetting the fuel totalizer:
On the Engine Page, select the RST Fuel Softkey; this resets displayed fuel remaining (Gallons Remain) to the
maximum fuel capacity for the aircraft and fuel used to zero.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A map feature related to the EIS Fuel Calculations is the Fuel Range Ring, which graphically illustrates the
aircraft’s remaining range based on the endurance, heading, groundspeed, and wind direction and speed.
The solid green circle represents the range until all the remaining fuel is depleted. The dashed green circle
indicates the aircraft range until only reserve fuel remains. Once on reserve fuel, the range is indicated by a
solid amber circle.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Fuel Range Ring shifts position in relation to the aircraft according to wind effects. For example, more
fuel is required for flying into a headwind, and the aircraft’s decreased range in that direction is indicated by
the Fuel Range Ring shifting toward the tail of the Aircraft Symbol.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The amount of reserve fuel (only for purposes of the Fuel Range Ring) is set on the Navigation Map
Page Setup Menu in terms of remaining flight time. When enabled, the Fuel Range Ring appears on the
Navigation Map Page, the Weather Data Link Page, and PFD Inset Map. (Refer to Flight Management for more
information on the Fuel Range Ring).
94
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3.3 REVERSIONARY MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In Reversionary Display mode, the operating display is configured to present PFD symbology with the EIS
Display (Figure 3-4). Refer to the System Overview for information about display Reversionary Mode.
EIS
EIS
Display
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 3-4 Primary Flight Display (Reversionary Mode)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
95
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Blank Page
96
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4.1 OVERVIEW
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panels, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode S transponders. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram description
of the Audio Panels and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• Audio Panel
• Multi Function Display (MFD)
• Mode S Transponder
EIS
• Primary Flight Display (PFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.
The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon
receiver, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of
background noise from the radios.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Mode S transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD). The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The data box displays the active
four-digit code, mode, and reply status.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
97
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY
2
3
4
6
5
7
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
9
10
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11
13
12
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-1 PFD Controls, NAV/COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, and ADF/DME Tuning Window
98
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
5
COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The selected and
decoded COM transceiver frequency is displayed in green.
6
COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to move the frequency selected for tuning (light blue numbers) and the Frequency Transfer
Arrow between COM1 and COM2.
7
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this key
for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
8
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
9
ADF/DME Tuning Window – Displays ADF frequencies, volume setting, and modes, and DME tuning
selection. Display by pressing the optional ADF/DME Softkey.
10
ENT Key – Validates or confirms an ADF frequency or ADF/DME mode and Auto-tune selection..
11
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes, select ADF/DME modes,
and Auto-tune entries when ADF/DME Tuning Window or NRST Window is present. Press the FMS Knob
to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in the window. The small knob
selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
12
Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
for the applicable transponder.
13
ADF/DME Softkey – Displays the optional ADF/DME Tuning Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
AFCS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
Press to move the frequency selected for tuning (light blue numbers) and the Frequency Transfer Arrow
between NAV1 and NAV2.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
99
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
15
16
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
13
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1
18
19
20
21
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
22
23
17
Volume Annunciation
Squelch Annunciation
24
AFCS
Figure 4-2 Audio Panel Controls
1
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
3
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
100
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
PA – Not used in Diamond DA40NG aircraft.
10
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard on the
speaker.
11
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Also, stops play of recorded
COM audio.
12
HI SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity. Press again to return to low sensitivity.
13
DME – Turns optional DME audio on or off.
14
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
15
ADF – Turns optional ADF receiver audio on or off.
16
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
17
AUX – Not used in Diamond DA40NG aircraft.
18
MAN SQ – Enables manual squelch for the intercom. When the intercom is active, press the PILOT Knob
to illuminate SQ. Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs to adjust squelch.
19
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio is played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded block.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play.
20
PILOT – Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation.
21
COPLT – Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation.
22
PILOT Knob – Press to switch between volume and squelch control as indicated by illumination of VOL
or SQ. Turn to adjust intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be selected to allow squelch
adjustment.
23
PASS Knob – Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be
selected to allow squelch adjustment.
24
DISPLAY BACKUP Button – Manually selects Reversionary Mode.
APPENDICES
9
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TEL – When selected, audio from the satellite telephone can be heard.
AFCS
8
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COM 1/2 – Split COM Key. Allows simultaneous transmission on COM1 and COM2 by the pilot and copilot.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM3 – Not used in Diamond DA40NG aircraft.
EIS
6
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM3 MIC – Not used in Diamond DA40NG aircraft.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
101
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.2 COM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM TUNING BOXES
1
2
3
4
5
7
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
6
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8
Figure 4-3 COM Tuning Box Indications
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: When turning on the system for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active
COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
Active Field – The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the
left. An active COM frequency is displayed in green and indicates that the COM transceiver is selected
on the Audio Panel (COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key). Both active COM frequencies appearing in white
indicate that no COM radio is selected for transmitting (PA Key is selected on the Audio Panel).
2
Frequency Transfer Arrow – Moves between the upper and lower radio frequency fields with the Frequency
Tuning Box. Indicates which COM transceiver is selected for frequency transfer between the Standby and
Active fields.
3
Standby Field – The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two standby frequencies are on
the right. Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in
the tuning box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
4
Frequency Tuning Box – Moves between the upper and lower radio frequency fields with the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. Indicates which COM transceiver is to be tuned in the Standby Field.
5
Automatic Squelch Indication – Indicates that Automatic Squelch is disabled. Automatic Squelch quiets
unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good sensitivity to weak COM
signals. When Automatic Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise
is heard over the headsets and speaker, if selected.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
1
102
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Frequency Spacing – The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or
8.33-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When
8.33-kHz channel spacing is selected, all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in
the complete 3040-channel list.
8
COM Volume – COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob.
Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting volume, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication
remains for two seconds after the change.
EIS
7
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Transmit and Receive Indications – During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM
frequency replacing the Frequency Transfer Arrow. During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by
the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency Transfer Arrow.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of the MFD and PFD.
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS, WX)
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page
AFCS
• Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
• WPT – Airport Information Page
• NRST – Nearest Airports Page
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on
the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency
Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
103
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
1) Press the Nearest Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of 25 nearest airport
identifiers and COM frequencies is displayed.
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Frequency Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Press the Nearest Softkey to Open
the Nearest Airports Window
AFCS
Figure 4-4 Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT
page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key.
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
APPENDICES
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or
pressing the appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency.
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
INDEX
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key on either PFD to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Or:
104
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Figure 4-5 Nearest Pages Menus
On the WPT - Airport Information Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing the
FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field with the
ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Airport
Identifier and
Information
AFCS
Runway Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press INFO 1 Softkey
for AIRPORT,
RUNWAYS, and
FREQUENCIES
Windows
APPENDICES
Press ENT Key to load
frequency into PFD1
COM Standby Field.
Cursor then advances
to the next frequency.
Figure 4-6 WPT – Airport Information Page
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
105
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Frequencies,
and NRST – Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU
Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FREQUENCY SPACING
The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing (118.000
to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing is selected,
all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
EIS
COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup 1 Page of the Aux Page Group.
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) Select the Aux – System Setup 1 Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
While the COM Configuration Window is selected, the softkeys are blank.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
INDEX
Figure 4-7 AUX – System Setup 1 Page
106
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.3 NAV OPERATION
NAV TUNING BOXES
3
4
5
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2
1
6
EIS
7
4
NAV Tuning Box – Moves between the upper and lower radio standby frequency fields with the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. Indicates which NAV transceiver is to be tuned in the Standby Field. Moving the Frequency
Tuning Box is accomplished by pressing the NAV knob on the PFD.
5
VOR/LOC Morse Code Audio Indication – When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio,
a white ID replaces the Frequency Transfer Arrow to the left of the active NAV frequency. In order to
listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID
Knob turns on/off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV Tuning Box. To turn on/off both
NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 by pressing the small NAV Knob and
pressing the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
6
Decoded Morse Code Station Identifier – The NAV Frequency Box displays the decoded Morse Code
station identifier that is received from the navigation source. Audio verification of the selected station
identifier is still required, and can be accomplished by selecting the corresponding NAV radio on the audio
panel and pressing the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
7
NAV VOLUME – NAV radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob.
Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting volume, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication
remains for two seconds after the change.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
Active Fields – The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the
right. An active NAV frequency is displayed in green. The active NAV radio is selected by pressing the
CDI softkey on the PFD. Both active NAV frequencies appearing in white indicate that no NAV radio is
selected.
APPENDICES
3
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Frequency Transfer Arrow – Moves between the upper and lower radio frequency fields with the Frequency
Tuning Box. Indicates which NAV transciever is selected for frequency transfer between the Standby and
Active fields.
AFCS
2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Standby Fields – The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two standby frequencies are on
the left. Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in
the tuning box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-8 NAV Tuning Box Indications
107
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Pressing the
CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the selected NAV standby frequency is selected for tuning,
the Frequency Transfer Arrow is placed in the selected NAV Frequency Field, and the active NAV frequency
color changes to green.
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; two standby fields and two active fields. The active
frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white and the previously selected NAV
standby frequency remains selected for tuning.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The NAV Frequency Box displays the decoded Morse Code station identifier that is received from the
navigation source. Audio verification of the selected station identifier is still required, and can be accomplished
by selecting the corresponding NAV radio on the audio panel and pressing the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
AFCS
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
or ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel. Pressing the
NAV1, NAV2, ADF, or DME Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard over
the headset and the speakers (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.
NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the MFD and PFD.
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
APPENDICES
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
INDEX
4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
108
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
• NRST – Nearest Airports
• NRST – Nearest VOR
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies (FSS, WX)
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• WPT – Airport Information
• WPT – VOR Information
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
EIS
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page
group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key.
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) On the Nearest VOR and Nearest Airports pages, press the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor on the NAV
frequency.
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the ENT
Key to load a
highlighted
Frequency into
the NAV Standby
Frequency Box
AFCS
Turn the FMS Knob to
scroll through a list of
Frequencies
Figure 4-9 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key on the MFD control unit to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
109
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest VOR Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
EIS
Figure 4-10 Nearest Pages Menus
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and
loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
Press the ENT Key to
load the Frequency
into the NAV
Standby Field.
Press the VOR Softkey
to place the Cursor
on the VOR Identifier
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the FREQ Softkey to place the Cursor
on the VOR Frequency
Figure 4-11 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – Nearest VOR Page
APPENDICES
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airports,
WPT – Airport Information, WPT – VOR Information, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in
a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
INDEX
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
110
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated in GPS Mode, the system switches to NAV Mode as
the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the Flight Management Section for
details.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency field on approach activation.
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
EIS
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 or NAV2
active frequency fields. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 or NAV2 active frequency fields are
transferred to standby.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
or NAV2 standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned
off.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of an ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD.
AFCS
Figure 4-12 Marker Beacon Keys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Audio Panels provide three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected.
APPENDICES
During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the MKR/MUTE Key mutes the audio but does not affect the
marker annunciations. The marker tone is silenced, then waits for the next marker tone. The MKR/MUTE Key
Annunciator is illuminated, indicating audio muting. The audio returns when the next marker beacon signal
is received. If the MKR/MUTE Key is pressed during signal reception (O, M, I indication) while marker beacon
audio is muted, the audio is deselected and the MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is extinguished.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
Pressing the HI SENS Key switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The HI SENS
function (annunciator illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an
approach. The LO SENS function (annunciator extinguished) results in a narrower marker dwell while over a
station.
111
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADF/DME TUNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME and bearing information windows (ADF) and
using the ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic
and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
NOTE: When another auxiliary window is turned on, the ADF/DME Tuning Window is replaced on the PFD.
The system tunes the ADF receiver (optional) and DME transceiver (optional). The ADF is tuned by entering
the frequency in the ADF standby frequency field of the ADF/DME Tuning Window. (The softkey may be
labeled ADF/DME, ADF, or DME, depending on installed equipment.)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following ADF/DME information is displayed in the ADF/DME Tuning Window:
• Active and standby ADF frequencies
• ADF receiver mode
• ADF receiver volume
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• DME tuning mode (DME transceiver pairing)
When the ADF/DME Tuning Window is displayed, the selection cursor is placed over the standby ADF
frequency field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turning the large FMS Knob moves the selection cursor through the various fields (standby ADF frequency,
ADF receiver mode, ADF radio volume, and DME tuning mode). Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates
the selection cursor in the ADF/DME Tuning Window. The ADF frequency is entered using the FMS Knob and
the ENT Key.
AFCS
Active ADF Frequency
Standby ADF Frequency
ADF Volume
ADF Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
DME Tuning Mode
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-29 ADF/DME Tuning Window
112
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADF TUNING
ADF frequencies in the 190.0-kHz to 1799.5-kHz range are entered in the standby ADF frequency field of
the ADF/DME Tuning Window. The system does not tune the ADF emergency frequency, 2182.0‑kHz.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Tuning an ADF frequency:
1) Press the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to begin data entry and change each digit.
EIS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next digit position.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete data entry for the standby frequency.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the ENT Key
to Complete ADF
Frequency Entry
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Data in
the Standby ADF
Frequency Field
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn the Large FMS
Knob to Move the
Cursor to the Next
Character
Figure 4-30 Entering ADF Standby Frequencies
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the CLR Key before completing frequency entry cancels the frequency change and reverts back to
the previously entered frequency.
Pressing the CLR Key when the cursor is flashing, clears the frequency and replaces the standby field with
0000.0.
AFCS
Transferring the active and standby ADF frequencies:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
2) Press the ENT Key to complete the frequency transfer.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the ENT Key to Transfer
the ADF Frequencies
APPENDICES
Figure 4-31 Transferring ADF Frequencies
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
113
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTING ADF RECEIVER MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
• ANT (Antenna) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees. Best mode for listening to NDB
audio.
The following modes can be selected: (In all modes NDB audio can be heard by selecting the ADF Key on
the Audio Panel.)
• ADF (Automatic Direction Finder) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB station.
EIS
• ADF/BFO (ADF/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB
station and an audible tone confirms signal reception. This mode allows identification of the interrupted
carrier beacon stations used in various parts of the world.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• ANT/BFO (Antenna/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees
while an audible tone is provided when a signal is received. This mode also allows identification of the
interrupted carrier beacon stations and confirms signal reception.
Selecting an ADF receiver mode:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF mode field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired ADF receiver mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn the Small FMS Knob
to Select the Mode
AFCS
Figure 4-32 Selecting ADF Receiver Mode
ADF receiver volume level can be adjusted in the tuning window from 0 to 100%. The default volume level
is set to 50%. The ADF volume level is the same for both Audio Panels.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adjusting ADF receiver volume:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF volume field.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust volume as desired.
INDEX
Turn the Small FMS Knob
to Select the Volume
Figure 4-33 Adjusting ADF Receiver Volume
114
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DME TUNING
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 NXi for use, the system remembers the last frequency used for DME
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
tuning and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
The system tunes the optional DME transceiver. The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF
NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
EIS
The DME Tuning Window is located to the right of the HSI in the lower right corner of the PFD. The DME
transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the DME Tuning Window. Pressing the DME
Softkey switches the DME Tuning Window on and off.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DME
Modes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-13 ADF/DME Tuning Window, DME Modes
The following DME transceiver pairing can be selected:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV frequency.
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
AFCS
1) Press the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the tuning entry and reverts
back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in
the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME information window.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
115
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.4 MODE S TRANSPONDER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Mode S Transponder provides Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities. Selective
addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
EIS
• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
• Extended squitter – The extended squitter is transmitted periodically and contains information such as altitude
(barometric and GPS), GPS position, and aircraft identification. The purpose of extended squitter is to provide
aircraft position and identification to ADS-B Ground-Based Transceivers (GBTs) and other aircraft.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
AFCS
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is pressed, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: Standby,
On, ALT, VFR, Code, Ident, Back.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the Code Softkey is pressed, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, Ident, BKSP, Back. The
digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Pressing the numbered softkeys in sequence enters the transponder
code. If an error is made, pressing the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit.
Pressing the BKSP Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous digit.
Pressing the Back Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Pressing the Back
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
APPENDICES
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on either PFD. Code entry must be completed with either
the softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
Pressing the Ident Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.
INDEX
After 45 seconds of transponder control inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
116
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 4-14 XPDR Softkeys (PFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
Mode selection can be automatic (Altitude Mode) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes). The
Standby, On, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by pressing the XPDR Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting a transponder mode:
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited.
AFCS
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the Standby Softkey. In Standby, the transponder
is powered and new codes can be entered, but no replies or squitters are transmitted.. When Standby is
selected, a white STBY indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data
Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)
Figure 4-15 Standby Mode
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
117
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
MANUAL ON MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the On Softkey. An On indication will appear in the
mode field of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting On mode enables transmission of transponder replies and
squitters, but transmissions will not include altitude information. The On indication and transponder code
in the Transponder Data Box will appear green while airborne and white while on the ground. When the
transponder is operating with an air state of on-ground it will disable replies to Mode A, Mode C, and Mode
S all-call interrogations so the aircraft will not show up on the traffic systems of other aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
On-Ground On Mode
(No Altitude Reporting)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airborne On Mode
(No Altitude Reporting)
Figure 4-16 On Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ALTITUDE MODE
AFCS
ALT Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ALT Softkey. When ALT mode is selected,
an ALT indication will appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting ALT mode enables
transmission of transponder replies and squitters. Transmissions will include pressure altitude information.
The ALT indication and transponder code in the Transponder Data Box will appear green while airborne and
white while on the ground. When the transponder is operating with an air state of on-ground it will disable
replies to Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S all-call interrogations so the aircraft will not show up on the traffic
systems of other aircraft.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
On-Ground ALT Mode
Airborne ALT Mode
INDEX
Figure 4-17 Altitude Mode
118
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
REPLY STATUS
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reply to Interrogation
Figure 4-18 Reply Indication
EIS
VFR CODE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by pressing the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey is pressed, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Pressing the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VFR Code
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-19 VFR Code
IDENT FUNCTION
AFCS
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the Ident Softkey is inoperative.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the Ident Softkey sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The indication
distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s screen. The Ident Softkey
appears on all levels of transponder softkeys. When the Ident Softkey is pressed, a green Ident indication is
displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.
After the Ident Softkey is pressed while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level softkeys.
APPENDICES
Ident Indication
Select the Ident Softkey to
Initiate the ID Function
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
Figure 4-20 Ident Softkey and Indication
119
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT ID REPORTING
NOTE: If the Flight ID is required but the system is not configured for it, contact a Garmin-authorized service
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
center for configuration.
When the Flight ID must be entered before flight operation, the identifier is placed in the Timer/References
Window on the PFD. The Flight ID is not to exceed seven characters. No space is needed when entering Flight
ID. When a Flight ID contains a space, the system automatically removes it upon completion of Flight ID entry.
EIS
Entering a Flight ID:
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey to display the Timer/References Window.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the selection cursor, if not already activated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll down to the Flight ID.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired Flight ID.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete Flight ID entry.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If an error is made during Flight ID entry, pressing the CLR Key returns to the original Flight ID entry. While
entering a Flight ID, turning the FMS Knob counterclockwise moves the cursor back one space for each detent
of rotation. If an incorrect Flight ID is discovered after the unit begins operation, reenter the correct Flight ID
using the same procedure.
120
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS
POWER-UP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panels perform a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to
those in use before the unit was last turned off. The exceptions are the speaker and intercom, which are always
selected during power up.
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
EIS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use in this aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears.
If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset hears
audio in the left ear only.
SPEAKER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker. Pressing the SPKR Key selects and deselects the cabin
speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings (autopilot, traffic,
altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range. Contact a Garmin-authorized service center for
volume adjustment.
INTERCOM
The Audio Panel includes a four-position intercom system (ICS) for the pilot, copilot and up to two passengers.
The intercom provides Pilot and Copilot isolation from the passengers and aircraft radios..
COPLT Key
Annunciator
OFF
OFF
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers, music
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers, music
Selected radios, aural alerts, pilot,
copilot, passengers, music
ON
OFF
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot
Copilot, passengers,
music
Copilot, passengers, music
OFF
ON
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot; passengers
Copilot
Selected radios, aural alerts, pilot,
passengers, music
ON
ON
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot
Passengers, music
Pilot Hears
Copilot Hears
AFCS
PILOT Key
Annunciator
Passenger Hears
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Table 4-1 ICS Isolation Modes
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
121
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Pilot isolation is selected when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated. During Pilot isolation, the pilot can
hear the selected radios and aural alerts and warnings. The copilot and passengers can communicate with each
other. The copilot is isolated from aural alerts and warnings.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Copilot isolation is selected when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated. The copilot is isolated from the
selected radios, aural alerts, and warnings, and everyone else. The pilot and passengers can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other.
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are illuminated, the pilot and copilot can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other. The passengers are isolated from the pilot and copilot
but can communicate with each other.
EIS
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished, everyone hears the selected radios, aural
alerts, and is able to communicate with everyone else.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The PILOT/PASS Knob controls volume or manual squelch adjustment for the pilot and copilot/passenger.
The small knob controls the pilot volume and squelch. The large knob controls the copilot/passenger volume
and squelch. The VOL and SQ annunciations at the bottom of the unit indicate which function the knob is
controlling. Pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob switches between volume and squelch control as indicated by
the VOL or SQ annunciation being illuminated.
The MAN SQ Key allows either automatic or manual control of the squelch setting.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is extinguished (Automatic Squelch is on), the PILOT/PASS Knob
controls only the volume (pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob has no effect on the VOL/SQ selection).
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is illuminated (Manual Squelch), the PILOT/PASS Knob controls
either volume or squelch (selected by pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob and indicated by the VOL or SQ
annunciation).
Manual Squelch Annunciation
AFCS
- Off for Automatic Squelch
- On for Manual Squelch
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Automatic/Manual Squelch
Pilot Volume or Manual Squelch
Copilot/Passenger Volume or Manual Squelch
- Turn to adjust Squelch when SQ Annunciation
is lit
- Turn to adjust Volume when VOL
Annunciation is lit.
APPENDICES
- Press to switch between VOL and SQ.
- Turn to adjust Squelch when SQ
Annunciation is lit
- Turn to adjust Volume when VOL
Annunciation is lit.
Squelch Annunciation
Volume Annunciation
INDEX
Figure 4-21 Volume/Squelch Control
122
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SPLIT COM
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and the separation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM1 and COM2 frequencies are too close together, interference
may be heard during transmission on the other radio.
During Split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios.
The pilot can still monitor NAV1, NAV2, ADF, DME, and MKR Audio as selected, but the copilot is only able
to monitor COM2.
EIS
Pressing the COM 1/2 Key selects Split COM operation. The COM 1/2 Annunciator is illuminated indicating
Split COM operation. COM1 and COM2 frequencies are displayed in green indicating that both transceivers
are active. Split COM operation is cancelled by pressing the COM 1/2 Key again, at which time the annunciator
is extinguished.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When Split COM operation is selected, COM1 is used by the pilot and COM2 is used by the copilot. The
COM1 MIC Annunciator flashes when the pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed. The COM2 MIC Annunciator
flashes when the copilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that continually records up to 2.5 minutes of the
selected COM radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of
recording time have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from
the oldest block.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PLAY Key controls the play function. The PLAY annunciator remains lit to indicate when play is in
progress. The PLAY annunciator turns off after playback is finished.
AFCS
Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory block and then returns to normal operation.
Pressing the PLAY Key again during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
Pressing the PLAY Key twice within one-half second while audio is playing plays the previous block of
recorded audio. Each subsequent two presses of the PLAY Key within one-half second backtracks through the
recorded memory blocks to reach and play any recorded block.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
APPENDICES
XM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
XM Radio audio from the Data Link Receiver may be heard by the pilot and passengers simultaneously
(optional: requires subscription to XM Radio Service). Refer to the Additional Features Section for more
details on the Data Link Receiver.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
123
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.6 AUDIO PANELS PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob,
verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume
setting. On single‑pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the
audio system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ Key is pressed, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot. If
EIS
manual squelch is set to full open (SQ annunciated and the knobs turned counterclockwise) background
noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM transmissions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
After powering up the system, the following steps aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel as well as
prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a pilot
boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.
Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Verify that the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished.
2) Verify manual squelch is set to full open.
3) Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs clockwise two full turns. This sets the intercom level to max volume (least amount
of attenuation).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV) to a suitable level.
5) Adjust the PILOT/PASS Knob volume to the desired intercom level.
6) Reset squelch to automatic, or adjust to the appropriate level manually.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.
124
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Abnormal operation of the system includes equipment failures of the system components and failure of
associated equipment, including switches and external devices.
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds
of continuous operation. An alert appears in the Alerts Window on the PFD to advise the crew of a stuck
microphone.
EIS
The COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains
stuck.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM TUNING FAILURE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a red X may appear on the
frequency display.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver. Audio is not available on the speaker during Fail-safe operation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
REVERSIONARY MODE
The red DISPLAY BACKUP Button selects the Reversionary Mode. See the System Overview Section for
more information on Reversionary Mode.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
125
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Blank Page
126
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5.1 INTRODUCTION
The system is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This section of
the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the system.
EIS
The most prominent part of the system are the two full color displays: one Primary Flight Display (PFD) and
a Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors is
displayed on the PFD and the MFD. See examples in Figure 5-1 thru 5-3.
A brief description of the GPS navigation data on the PFD and MFD follows.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), RNAV Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V,
L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)). L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, and LPV approach service levels are
only available with SBAS.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Inset Map is a small version of the Navigation Map and can be displayed in the lower left corner of the PFD.
When the system is in reversionary mode, the Inset Map is displayed in the lower right corner. The Inset Map is
displayed by pressing the Map/HSI Softkey, pressing the Layout Softkey, then pressing the Inset Map Softkey.
Pressing the Map Off Softkey removes the Inset Map. The HSI Map is also a small version of the Navigation Map
and is displayed in the center of the HSI. Hereafter, references to the “PFD Map” implies either the Inset Map or
the HSI Map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data for the PFD Map can be reduced by pressing the Map/
HSI Softkey on the PFD, then pressing the Detail Softkey. The amount of displayed data for the Navigation Map
can be reduced by pressing the Detail Softkey on the MFD. The Navigation Map can be oriented three different
ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
APPENDICES
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 250 feet to 1000 nm. Range is indicated in the upper left
quadrant of the range ring shown around the aircraft icon. This indicated range is the range from the aircraft
icon to the range ring, and roughly half the range to the top edge of the displayed map. To change the map
range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out (+,
increasing). The Direct To Window, Flight Plan Window, Procedures Window, and Nearest Airports Window can
be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Information about these windows are discussed in detail later
in the section.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
127
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Status Box
Current Track Indicator
Navigation Mode
Inset Map
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
- References Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD (Inset Map)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Mode
Current Track
Indicator
AFCS
HSI Map
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD HSI Map
128
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Navigation Data Bar
Navigation Page Title
Map Orientation
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Map
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
EIS
Flight Plan Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-3 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NAVIGATION STATUS BOX
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-4 PFD Navigation Status Box
AFCS
• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD -> KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn right to
021˚ in 8 seconds’)
• Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD within 1
minute’)
The symbols used in the PFD status bar are:
Description
Symbol
Description
Left Holding Pattern
Direct-to
Vector to Final
Right Procedure Turn
Right DME Arc/Radius to Fix Leg
Left Procedure Turn
Left DME Arc/Radius to Fix Leg
APPENDICES
Active Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Symbol
Right Holding Pattern
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
129
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Navigation Data Bar located at the top of the MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of the
following items:
BRG
DEST
DIS
DTG
Bearing
Destination Airport Identifier
Distance
Distance to Go
FOB
FOD
GS
ISA
Fuel on Board
Fuel over Destination
Ground Speed
Temperature at Standard Pressure
DTK
END
ENR
ESA
ETA
ETE
FLT
Desired Track
Endurance
ETE to Final Destination
Enroute Safe Altitude
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time Enroute
Flight Timer
LDG
MSA
TAS
TKE
TRK
VSR
XTK
ETA at Final Destination
Minimum Safe Altitude
True Airspeed
Track Angle Error
Track
Vertical Speed Required
Cross-Track Error
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-5 MFD Navigation Data Bar
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the MFD Data Bar Fields Box
on the Aux-System Setup 1 Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and ETE.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Data Bar:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the ‘MFD Data Bar Fields’ Box.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list to select the desired data.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key. Pressing the Defaults Softkey returns all fields to the default setting.
130
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS
• Map Pointer information (distance and bearing
to pointer, location of pointer, name, and other
pertinent information)
• Fuel range ring
• Flight plan legs
• User waypoints
• Track vector
• Terrain
• Topography data
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways, land data
(highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.)
with names
• Map range
• Wind direction and speed
• Map orientation
• Icons for enabled map features
• Aircraft icon (representing present position)
• Obstacle data
• Topography scale
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map displays are used extensively in the system to provide situational awareness in flight. Most system maps
can display the following information:
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
MFD Direct To Window
PFD Map
MFD Procedure Loading Pages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All Map Group Pages (Map)
All Waypoint Group Pages (WPT)
Aux - Trip Planning
All Nearest Group Pages (NRST)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MAP ORIENTATION
Maps are shown in one of three different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper left corner of the map.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-6 Map Orientation
• North up (North up) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
INDEX
• Track up (Track up) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
• Heading up (HDG up) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
131
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NOTE: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
show the map orientation or the wind direction and speed.
NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the Navigation Map Page. Any other displays that show
navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
EIS
1) With the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Settings
Selection
Figure 5-7 Navigation Map Page Menu Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘Map Setting’ Window.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob, or press the ENT Key once, to select the ‘Orientation’ Field.
Map Group Selection
AFCS
Orientation Field
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
North Up Above Field
Figure 5-8 Map Settings Menu Window - Map Group
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
INDEX
5) Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
132
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The map can be configured to switch automatically to a north up orientation when the map range reaches a
minimum range.
Enabling/disabling Auto North Up and selecting the minimum switching range:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map Page’ displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Highlight the ‘North Up Above’ Field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ using the small FMS Knob.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the range Field.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select the desired range.
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
MAP RANGE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 250 feet to 1000 nm. Range is indicated in the upper left
quadrant of the range ring shown around the aircraft icon. This indicated range is the range from the aircraft
icon to the range ring, and roughly half the range to the top edge of the displayed map. When the map range
is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the system to accurately represent the map, a magnifying
glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick counter-clockwise
to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range, or clockwise to increase the range.
AFCS
Auto Zoom On
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-9 Map Range
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
133
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUTO ZOOM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Auto zoom allows the system to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on Map Settings Window). Auto zoom is suspended while the map pointer is active.
EIS
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, all navigation maps automatically adjust to the smallest map range
clearly showing the potential impact areas. If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any map page capable of
displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly showing the traffic
advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom range based on the
active waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFD and MFD. Control of the ranges
at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times (set on the
Map Settings Window for the Map Group). These settings determine the minimum and maximum distance
to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the
auto zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/minimum times can be
adjusted.
AFCS
• The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the Map Settings Page for the Map Group) determines how long auto
zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
• When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range available
(1000 nm).
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.
134
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Configuring automatic zoom:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Auto Zoom’ on/off Field, and select ‘Off’ or ‘On’ using the small FMS Knob.
EIS
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘Auto Zoom’ display selection
Field.
7) Select ‘MFD’, ‘PFD’, or ‘All’ using the small FMS Knob.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘Max Look FWD’ Field.
Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
10) Repeat step 9 for ‘Min Look FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘Time Out’ (zero to 99 minutes).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
11) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
135
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP PANNING
Map panning allows the pilot to:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
• Highlight and select locations on the map
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint
• Designate locations for use in flight planning
• View airspace and airway information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
When the panning function is selected by pushing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.
Panning the map:
1) Push the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
3) Push the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
NOTE: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned, and there has
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.
AFCS
Map Pointer Information
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map Pointer
INDEX
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
136
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Information about Point
of Interest
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Pointer on
POI
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Place the Map Pointer on a waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘WPT - [type of waypoint] Information’ Page for the selected waypoint.
3) Press the Go Back Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the ‘WPT - [type of waypoint] Information’ Page
and return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ showing the selected waypoint.
AFCS
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet above Mean Sea Level
(MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Reviewing information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) Place the Map Pointer on the boundary of an airspace.
2) Push the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and center the map on the aircraft.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) Place the Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace.
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
3) ‘Review Airspaces’ should already be highlighted. If not, select it. Press the ENT Key to display the airspace
‘Information’ Window for the selected airspace.
INDEX
4) Press the CLR or ENT Key to exit the airspace ‘Information’ Window.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
137
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be
calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page menu. The bearing
and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying
points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a
window at the top of the navigation map.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed).
EIS
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ Field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) To exit the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ option, push the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the ‘Page
Menu’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Measurement
Information
Pointer Lat/Long
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Measurement Line
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
138
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TOPOGRAPHY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar
to aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures. Topographic data can also be displayed on the selectable VSD Inset at the bottom of the navigation
map (the inset map is not available if TAWS-A is configured).
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
EIS
Navigation Map
Black Background
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TOPO Off
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Topographic Data
on VSD Inset
TOPO On
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
Displaying/removing topographic data on all MFD pages displaying navigation maps:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Topo’ is shown on the softkey to display topographic data.
3) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Off’ is shown on the softkey to remove topographic data from the ‘Map - Navigation
Map’ Page. When topographic data is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black
background.
AFCS
Displaying/removing topographic data on the PFD Map:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the Topo Softkey.
3) Press the Topo Softkey again to remove topographic data from the PFD Map. When topographic data is
removed from the PFD Map, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
APPENDICES
Absolute Terrain On
INDEX
Terrain Off
Figure 5-14 PFD Inset Map - Absolute Terrain Data
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
139
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying/removing topographic data using the Navigation Map Page Menu:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Setting’ Menu is displayed.
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘‘Map Setting’’
option.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Terrain Display’ Field.
EIS
6) Select ‘Topo’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which topographic data is displayed.
NOTE: Since the PFD Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Settings pages (e.g., a setting of 100 nm
removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Map removes the same
item at 50 nm).
Selecting a topographical data range (Terrain Display):
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Setting’ Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Terrain Display’ range Field. Ranges are from 1 nm to 1000 nm.
AFCS
6) To change the Terrain Display range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
140
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the
map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation and minimum/maximum displayed elevations.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Maximum Displayed Elevation
Minimum Displayed Elevation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-15 Navigation Map - TOPO SCALE
Displaying/removing the topographic scale (Topo Scale):
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Setting’ Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group and press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘Topo Scale’ Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
141
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP SYMBOLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of
symbol can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering
of the symbols from the map using the Detail Softkey is also discussed.
LAND SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the land menu:
EIS
Land Symbols
Symbol
User Waypoint
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
25
40
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Highways and Roads
Interstate Highway (Freeway)
50
400
International Highway (Freeway)
50
400
US Highway (National Highway)
15
150
State Highway (Local Highway)
2.5
100
4
25
Railroads (RAILROAD)
7.5
25
Large City (> 200,000)
100
1000
Medium City (> 50,000)
Small City (> 5,000)
50
25
400
100
State/Province
400
1000
River/Lake
75
100
Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON)
1
1000
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Local Road (Local Road)
N/A
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information
142
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AVIATION SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
Symbol
5
7.5
150
N/A
N/A
Intersection (INT)
25
40
Non-directional Beacon (NDB)
25
50
VOR
50
250
N/A
N/A
Visual Reporting Point (VRP)
25
1000
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
250
1000
VNAV Constraints
1000
1000
N/A
N/A
Runway Extension
Missed Approach Preview On/Off (Missed APR)
VOR Compass Rose On/Off
N/A
N/A
(VNAV Constraints) Show All (show all constraints within
flight plan if VNAV Constraints are ‘On’ above)
N/A
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1.5
See Additional Features
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
150
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
25
EIS
Large Airport (Longest Runway ≥ 8100 ft)
Medium Airport (8100 ft > Longest Runway ≥ 5000 ft)
Small Airport (Longest Runway < 5000 ft)
(Medium Airport if it has a tower frequency)
Taxiways (SafeTaxi)
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
100
1000
50
400
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Aviation Symbols
AFCS
Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
143
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AIRSPACE SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the airspace menu:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airspace Symbols
Symbol
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Smart Airspace On/Off
Airspace Altitude Labels (Airspace ALT LBL) On/Off
N/A
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
N/A
N/A
Class B Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling/floor)
N/A
N/A
Class C Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling/floor)
N/A
N/A
Class D Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling)
N/A
N/A
Class B Airspace/TMA (CLASS B/TMA)
50
150
Class C Airspace/TCA (CLASS C/TCA)
50
100
Class D Airspace (CLASS D)
10
100
Alert/Prohibited/Restricted/Warning Areas (RESTRICTED)
50
100
Military Operations Area [MOA(MILITARY)]
50
250
Other/Air Defense Interdiction Zone (OTHER/ADIZ)
50
250
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 5-3 Airspace Symbol Information
144
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYMBOL SETUP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All navigation maps can display land, aviation and airspace symbols. Symbol types (e.g. runway extensions,
railroads) can be removed individually. The range sets the maximum range at which items appear on the
display. For example, enabling “Runway Extension” displays a dashed line on the map extending from each
runway of an airport in the flight plan when the range is set at or below the value of the map settings option.
Setting up the ‘Land’, ‘Aviation’ or ‘Airspace’ group items:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
EIS
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Setting’ Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired option.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired setting (e.g. On/Off or maximum range).
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option and move the cursor to the next item.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Repeat steps 5-7 as necessary.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
MAP DECLUTTER
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the Detail Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.
Decluttering the map:
AFCS
Press the Detail Softkey with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown.
With each softkey selection, another level of map information is removed.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Select ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
3) Press the ENT Key.
Decluttering the PFD Map:
APPENDICES
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Detail Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection, another level of map
information is removed.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
145
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Table 5-4 lists the items that are decluttered at each map detail level. The ‘X’ represents map items
decluttered for each level of detail.
Item
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Data Link Radar Precipitation
Data Link Lightning
Graphical METARs
Airports
Safe Taxi
Runway Labels
TFRs
Restricted
MOA (Military Operating Area)
Intersections
NDBs
VORs
VRPs
User Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude Grid
NAVAIDs (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Intersections (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Class B Airspaces/TMA
Class C Airspaces/TCA
Class D Airspaces
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
Obstacles
Cities
Roads
Railroads
State/Province Boundaries
Detail 3
Detail 2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Detail 1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 5-4 Navigation Map Items Decluttered for each Detail Level
146
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIRWAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in places
other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low Altitude Airways
(Victor Airways or T-Routes) start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up to 18,000 feet mean sea
level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” or a “T” before the airway number.
High Altitude Airways (Jet Routes or Q-Routes) start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL. High Altitude Airways are designated with a “J” or a “Q” before the airway number.
EIS
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs, and Intersections)
are also displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Low Altitude
Airway
(T-Route)
High Altitude
Airway
(Q-Route)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-16 Airways on MFD Navigation Page
APPENDICES
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AWY Softkey
selections or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway range can also
be programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific number.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
147
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the AWY Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed (AWY On).
3) Press the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only (AWY LO).
4) Press the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only (AWY HI).
5) Press the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed (AWY Off).
Or:
EIS
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Setting’ Menu is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Low ALT Airways’ On/Off Field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Off’ or ‘On’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed.
Selecting an airway range (Low ALT Airways or High ALT Airways):
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Setting’ Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘Low ALT Airways’ or ‘High ALT Airways’ range Field.
AFCS
5) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
6) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
The following items are configured on the airways menu:
APPENDICES
Airways Symbols
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
Low Altitude Airways (V Routes and T Routes)
50
100
High Altitude Airways (J Routes and Q Routes)
50
100
INDEX
Table 5-5 Airways Symbol Information
148
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL NAVIGATION MAP ITEMS
Navigation maps can display some additional items. These items (e.g. track vector, wind vector, fuel range
ring, SVT field of view, and selected altitude intercept arc) can be displayed/removed individually.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Setting up additional ‘Map’ group items:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Setting’ Menu is displayed.
EIS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
Or:
If it is a data Field, use the FMS Knob to select the range or time value.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option and move the cursor to the next item.
8) Repeat steps 5-7 as necessary.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
TRACK VECTOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track
vector is a solid cyan line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is
selectable (30 sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track
vector. The track vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings. It is always
a straight line for the 2 min, 5 min, 10 min and 20 min settings.
AFCS
Track Vector
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-17 Navigation Map -Track Vector
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
149
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
WIND VECTOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector
information is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind
speeds greater than or equal to 1 kt.
Wind Direction
Wind Speed
EIS
Figure 5-18 Navigation Map - Wind Vector
NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the Waypoint
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Information pages.
FUEL RANGE RING
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green circle
indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range. If only
reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid amber circle.
Total Endurance Range
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Time to Reserve Fuel
Range to Reserve Fuel
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring
150
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FIELD OF VIEW (SVT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) lateral field of view. The
field of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This
is only available if SVT is installed on the aircraft.
EIS
Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map - Field of View
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the selected
altitude. The location will be shown as a cyan arc when the aircraft is actually climbing or descending.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Selected
Altitude
Intercept Arc
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
151
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
IFR/VFR CHARTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can display GPS navigation information on a VFR chart, a low altitude IFR chart, or a high altitude
IFR chart. The information overlaid on the IFR/VFR Charts is selected and setup on the Navigation Map, but
the IFR/VFR charts will not display some of the selected items. Only the following items will be overlaid on
the chart:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• Map Pointer (distance and bearing to pointer, location of pointer, name, and other pertinent information)
• Map Range (17 range choices from 1 nm to 150 nm)
• Map Orientation (always North Up for IFR/VFR Charts)
• Aircraft Icon (representing present position)
• Wind Direction and Speed
• Icons for enabled map features (Traffic only)
• Flight Plan Legs
• Track Vector
• Runway Extension
• Missed Approach Preview
• Intersections (only as part of active flight plan)
• Visual Reporting Points
• VNAV Constraints
• Selected Altitude Intercept Arc
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map panning on the IFR/VFR Charts works the same as on the Navigation Map. Map range selected on either
the Navigation Map or the IFR/VFR Charts applies to both. However, if the range selected on the Navigation
Map it is not a valid chart range, the chart is shown with a range of 7.5 nm.
AFCS
When different VFR charts exist for the same area the chart type will automatically display according to the
range chosen. For example, in an area where both a Sectional and a Terminal Area Chart (TAC) are available,
a range of 10 nm or more will show the Sectional chart. Once the range is decreased below 10 nm, the system
will automatically change the displayed chart from the Sectional to the TAC.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Due to the potential error involved with the electronic depiction of maps, charts will display a ‘gray circle of
uncertainty’ centered upon the aircraft icon. The aircraft’s actual position can be anywhere within the range of
the gray circle. The range of the circle will change based on the chart displayed and current zoom range.
152
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Navigation Data Bar
Navigation Page Title
Map Orientation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
VFR Chart
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
EIS
Gray Circle of
Uncertainty
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-22 GPS Navigation Information on the VFR Chart
Modifying the chart settings:
1) Press the MENU Key with the IFR Low / IFR High Chart displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Settings’ option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Color Scheme’ setting.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Day’, ‘Auto’, or ‘Night’. The IFR/VFR Chart display changes to reflect the
setting.
4) If ‘Auto’ was selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the backlight threshold field (sets value for automatic
day/night switching).
AFCS
Selecting the chart to display:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the Map - IFR/VFR Charts Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the VFR softkey, IFR Low softkey, or IFR High softkey to display the desired chart.
Or:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the Map - IFR/VFR Charts Page. Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Display VFR’ field, the ‘Display IFR Low’ field, or the ‘Display IFR High’ field.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key. The selected chart is displayed.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
153
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Navigation Data Bar
Navigation Page Title
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map Orientation
IFR Low Altitude
Chart
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
EIS
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Gray Circle of
Uncertainty
Figure 5-23 GPS Navigation Information on the IFR Low Altitude Chart
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Data Bar
Navigation Page Title
Map Orientation
AFCS
IFR High Altitude
Chart
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Gray Circle of
Uncertainty
INDEX
Figure 5-24 GPS Navigation Information on the IFR High Altitude Chart
154
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Modifying the chart settings:
1) Press the MENU Key with the IFR Low / IFR High Chart displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Color Scheme’ setting.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Day’, ‘Auto’, or ‘Night’. The IFR/VFR Chart display changes to reflect the
setting.
4) If ‘Auto’ was selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the backlight threshold field (sets value for automatic
day/night switching).
Selecting the chart to display:
EIS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the Map - IFR/VFR Charts Page.
2) Press the VFR softkey, IFR Low softkey, or IFR High softkey to display the desired chart.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the Map - IFR/VFR Charts Page. Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Display VFR’ field, the ‘Display IFR Low’ field, or the ‘Display IFR High’ field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key. The selected chart is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
155
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.3 WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the Nearest Airports Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS section for details on autotuning.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering
the city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the system. As a
waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, the Spell’N’Find feature scrolls through the database,
displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to navigation
leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on any of the waypoint pages.
Identifier Entry Field
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
City Entry Field
Facility
Entry Field
VNV Constraints
- Waypoint Identifier
- Type (symbol)
- Facility Name
- City
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
Entered Waypoint on
Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint
AFCS
Waypoint Location &
Course
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-25 Waypoint Information Window
156
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a Duplicate
Waypoints Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Identifier with
Duplicates
EIS
Duplicate
Waypoints
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Duplicate Message
Figure 5-26 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier
AIRPORTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: ‘North Up’ orientation on the Airport Information Page cannot be changed; the pilot needs to be
aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the Airport Information Page
Map.
AFCS
The Airport Information Page is the first page in WPT group and allows the pilot to view airport information,
load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review instrument procedures that may be
involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on loading frequencies
(auto-tuning). After engine startup, the Airport Information Page defaults to the airport where the aircraft is
located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport. On a flight plan with multiple
airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the Airport Information
Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘Airport’, ‘Runways’, and ‘Frequencies’. For airports
with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. This information is viewed on the Airport
Information Page by pressing the Info Softkey until 1 is displayed.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
157
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airport Information
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
- Lat/Long/Elev
- Fuel Available
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport
Runway Information
- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available
EIS
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
- Availability
- Additional Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airport/Runway
Diagram
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-27 Airport Information Page
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
• Usage type: Public, Military, Private, or Heliport
• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled lighting)
• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
Airport Information
Airport Directory
Information
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
INDEX
Figure 5-28 Airport Directory Page Example
158
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The airport directory information is viewed on the Airport Directory Page by pressing the Info Softkey until
2 is displayed. The following are types of airport directory information shown (if available) on the Airport
Directory Page:
• Instrument
Approaches:
Published Approach, Freq.
• NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier,
Frequency, Radial, Distance
• Noise:
Noise Abatement
Procedures
• Charts: Low Altitude Chart
Number
• Services Available: Category,
Specific Service
• Notes: Airport Notes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Pilot Controlled Lighting:
High/Med/Low Clicks/Second
• FBO:
Type, Frequencies,
Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit
Cards, Phone/Fax Numbers
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Transportation:
Ground
Transportation Type Available
• Approach: Approach Facility
Name, Frequency, Frequency
Parameter
• Runway: Headings, Length,
Width, Obstructions, Surface
• Obstructions: General Airport
Obstructions
• Special
Operations
at
Airport
EIS
• Hours: Facility Hours, Light
Hours, Tower Hours, Beacon
Hours
• Location: Sectional, Magnetic
Variation
• Frequencies: Type/Frequency
• Traffic Pattern Altitudes
(TPA): Aircraft Class/Altitude
• Weather:
Service Type,
Frequency, Phone Number
• Flight Service Station (FSS):
FSS Name, Phone Numbers
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Airport:
Identifier, Site
Number, Name, City, State
• Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page, press the FMS Knob.
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
AFCS
Selecting a runway:
1) With the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Runways’ Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
159
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Viewing a destination airport:
From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination Airport’. The
Destination Airport is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Airport Frequencies Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Communication Frequencies
Approach * Control
Pre-Taxi
Arrival *
CTA *
Radar
ASOS
Departure * Ramp
ATIS
Gate
Terminal *
AWOS
Ground
TMA *
Center
Helicopter
Tower
Class B *
Multicom
TRSA *
Class C *
Other
Unicom
Clearance
Navigation Frequencies
ILS
LOC
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
* May include Additional Information
Table 5-6 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the Airport Information Page. See the
Procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be selected for display
(see the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather).
The system provides a Nearest Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate landing is required). The Nearest Airports Window displays a list of
up to 25 of the nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there are more than three, they
are displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available, “None Within 200nm” is displayed.
AFCS
Bearing/Distance to Airport
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airport Identifier/
Type
Approach Available
Length of Longest
Runway
COM Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
APPENDICES
Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)
INDEX
Nearest Softkey
Figure 5-29 Nearest Airports Window on PFD
160
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the ENT Key while the Nearest Airports Window is shown displays the PFD Airport Information
Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing the ENT Key again returns to the Nearest Airports Window with
the cursor on the next airport in the list. Continued presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information
pages for all airports in the Nearest Airports list.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport Information
- ID/Type/City
- Facility
EIS
Airport Information
- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region
Airport Information
- Lat/Long
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-30 Airport Information Window on PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
1) Press the Nearest Softkey to display the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window.
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the ‘Airport Information’
Window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) To return to the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on ‘BACK’) or press the CLR
Key. The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key
moves through the airport list, alternating between the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window and the ‘Airport Information’
Window.
4) Press the CLR Key or the Nearest Softkey to close the PFD ‘Nearest Airports’ Window.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Nearest Airports Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential use in
the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and
surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled ‘Nearest Airports’,
‘Information’, ‘Runways’, ‘Frequencies’, and ‘Approaches’.
APPENDICES
The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the navigation map
from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one runway, up to three frequencies,
and up to four approaches are visible at one time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled.
If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed. The currently selected
airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
161
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airports
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance
Nearest Airport
Airport Information
- Facility/City/Elevation
Runway Information
EIS
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Airport
Approaches Available
Window Selection
Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-31 Nearest Airport Page
LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the NRST page group.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’ Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may
already be selected). If there are no Nearest Airports available, ‘None Within 200nm’ is displayed.
3) Press the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Nearest Airports’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports list
is highlighted.
AFCS
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport.)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
162
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’ Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight
‘Select Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Runways’ Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.
EIS
The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 3000 feet (or meters) for runway length
and “Hard Only” for runway surface type.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting nearest airport surface and minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Runway Surface’ Field in the ‘Nearest Airport’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (Any, Hard Only, Hard/Soft, Water).
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the ‘Minimum Length’ Field in the ‘Nearest Airport’ Box.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
163
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
INTERSECTIONS
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
used to define the intersection.
EIS
The Intersection Information Page is used to view information about intersections. In addition to displaying
a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area, the Intersection Information Page displays
intersection information in three boxes labeled ‘Intersection’, ‘Information’, and ‘Nearest VOR’.
Intersection Identifier
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection
Intersection Info
- Region
- Lat/Long
Nearest VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Intersection
Figure 5-32 Intersection Information Page
AFCS
Selecting an intersection:
1) With the ‘WPT - Intersection Information’ Page displayed, enter an identifier in the ‘Intersection’ Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest Intersections’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest INT’ Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
164
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest Intersections Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight path. In addition
to displaying a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest intersections in
three boxes labeled ‘Nearest INT’, ‘Information’, and ‘Reference VOR’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow. Up to 12 intersections are visible at a time. If there
are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no items for display, text indicating that fact
is displayed.
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
EIS
Intersection Information
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Intersection
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
intersection from
aircraft position
Nearest
Intersection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Intersection Lat/Long
Reference VOR Info
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- VOR Frequency
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
Figure 5-33 Nearest Intersections Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
165
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NDBS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NDB Information Page is used to view information about NDBs. In addition to displaying a map of the
currently selected NDB and surrounding area, the page displays NDB information in four boxes labeled ‘NDB’,
‘Information’, ‘Frequency’, and ‘Nearest Airport’.
NDB Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
EIS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
NDB Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Type
- Region
- Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
Selected NDB
Nearest Airport Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-34 NDB Information Page
NOTE: Compass locator (LOM, LMM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon installed in
conjunction with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is at the Outer Marker;
when LMM is used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
AFCS
Selecting an NDB:
1) With the ‘WPT - NDB Information’ Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the NDB, or the city in which
it’s located in the ‘NDB’ Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest NDB’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest NDB’ Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
166
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find an NDB close to the flight path. In addition to displaying
a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs in three boxes labeled
‘Nearest NDB’, ‘Information’, and ‘Frequency’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A white arrow before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB. Up to 12 NDBs are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. The list only includes waypoints that are within
200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed. If there are
no nearest NDBs in the list, the information and frequency fields are dashed.
EIS
NDB Identifier/Symbol
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
- Bearing/Distance to
NDB from aircraft
position
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NDB Information
- Facility Name/City
- Type
- Lat/Long
Nearest NDB
NDB Frequency
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-35 Nearest NDB Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
167
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VORS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VOR Information Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS navigation signals, or to
quickly auto-tune a VOR or ILS frequency. Localizer information cannot be viewed on the VOR Information
Page. If a VOR station is combined with a TACAN station it is listed as a VORTAC on the VOR Information Page
and if it includes only DME, it is displayed as VOR-DME.
EIS
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, the VOR Information
Page displays VOR information in four boxes labeled ‘VOR’, ‘Information’, ‘Frequency’, and ‘Nearest Airport’.
VOR Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing
Selected VOR
VOR Information
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Region
- Lat/Long
VOR Frequency
Selected VOR
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airport Info
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
Figure 5-36 VOR Information Page
AFCS
The VOR classes used in the VOR information box are: Low Altitude, High Altitude, and Terminal.
Selecting a VOR:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the ‘WPT - VOR Information’ Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the VOR, or the city in which
it’s located in the ‘VOR’ Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Or:
168
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest VOR’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob or press the VOR Softkey.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest VOR’ Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest VOR’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Select VOR Window’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest VOR’ Box.
EIS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft. Also, a NAV frequency
from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the Nearest VOR Page. In addition to displaying a map of the
surrounding area, the Nearest VOR Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VOR stations in three boxes
labeled ‘Nearest VOR’, ‘Information’, and ‘Frequency’. The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
VOR
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A white arrow before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR. Up to 12 VORs are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. If there are no VORs in the list, text indicating
that there are no nearest VORs is displayed. If there are no nearest VORs in the list, the information is dashed.
VOR Identifier/Symbol
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
AFCS
VOR Information
Nearest VOR
- Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Lat/Long
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VOR Frequency
Figure 5-37 Nearest VOR Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
169
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VRPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VRP Information Page is used to view information about visual reporting points (VRPs). In addition to
displaying a map of the currently selected VRP and surrounding area, the VRP Information Page displays VRP
information in two boxes labeled ‘VRP’ and ‘Information’.
VRP Identifier/Symbol
Navigation Map
Showing Selected VRP
- VRP Name
EIS
VRP Information
- Country
- Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
- Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected VRP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-38 VRP Information Page
Selecting a VRP:
1) With the ‘WPT - VRP Information’ Page displayed, enter the identifier or the name of the VRP in the ‘VRP’ Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest VRP’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest VRP’ Box.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
170
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest VRP Page can be used to quickly find a VRP close to the aircraft. In addition to displaying a map
of the surrounding area, the Nearest VRP Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VRPs in two boxes
labeled ‘Nearest VRP’ and ‘Information’. The list only includes VRPs that are within 200 nm.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A white arrow before the VRP identifier indicates the selected VRP. Up to 12 VRPs are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no VRPs in the list, text indicating that
there are no nearest VRPs is displayed. If there are no nearest VRPs in the list, the information is dashed.
VRP Identifier/Symbol
EIS
- Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest VRP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nearest VRP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VRP Information
- VRP Name
- Country
- Lat/Long
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-39 Nearest VRP Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
171
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
USER WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from
any map page (except PFD Map, Aux-Trip Planning Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a position on the
map using the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Page by referencing a bearing/distance from
an existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or a latitude and longitude. Once a waypoint has
been created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user waypoints are erased upon system power
down.
User Waypoint Info
EIS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
- Identifier
- Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
User Wpt Comment
Reference Wpt/Info
- Identifier/Rad/Dist or
- Identifiers/Radials or
- Region/Lat/Long
Selected User
Waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
User Waypoint List
- Identifier
- Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
# User Wpts Used
Figure 5-40 User Waypoint Information Page
Selecting a User Waypoint:
AFCS
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, enter the name of the User Waypoint, or scroll to the
desired waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box using the large FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest User WPTS’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest User’ Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
172
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Nearest User Wpt List
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Identifier
- Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
EIS
User Waypoint Info
Selected User
Waypoint
- Comment
- Lat/Long
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reference Wpt Info
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
Figure 5-41 Nearest User Waypoint Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
User waypoints can be created from the User Waypoint Information Page in the following ways:
Creating user waypoints from the User Waypoint Information Page:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the New Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
AFCS
Select ‘RAD/RAD’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Select ‘RAD/DIS’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
APPENDICES
Select ‘LAT/LON’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the ‘Information’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to ‘Temporary’ by moving the cursor to ‘Temporary’ and
selecting the ENT Key to check the box.
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
173
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new User Waypoint AAAAAA?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select ‘RAD/RAD’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
EIS
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Select ‘RAD/DIS’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
Select ‘LAT/LON’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the ‘Information’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to ‘Temporary’ by moving the cursor to ‘Temporary’ and
pressing the ENT Key to check the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Creating user waypoints from map pages:
1) Push the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page is displayed with the captured position.
AFCS
NOTE: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens upon pressing
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint,
2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new
waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item.
3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The ‘Waypoint Type’ Field is highlighted.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
APPENDICES
Select ‘RAD/RAD’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
INDEX
Select ‘RAD/DIS’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
Select ‘LAT/LON’ using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the ‘Information’ Box using the FMS Knob.
174
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to temporary or normal by moving the cursor to
‘Temporary’ and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
9) Press the Go Back Softkey to return to the Map Page.
EDITING USER WAYPOINTS
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
EIS
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select a user waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box, if required, and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Move the cursor to the desired field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Renaming user waypoints:
1) Highlight a user waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box. Press the Rename Softkey, or press the MENU Key
and select ‘Rename User Waypoint’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Enter a new name.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA to BBBBBB?’ is displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
Changing the location of an existing waypoint to the aircraft present position:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice. The new waypoint’s location is saved.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
A system generated comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing,
and distance. If a system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box, then press the ENT Key.
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Auto Comment’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The generated comment is based on the reference point used to define the waypoint.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
175
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the user waypoint
information page menu. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power cycle.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select ‘Normal’ or ‘Temporary’ as desired, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page.
EIS
DELETING USER WAYPOINTS
Deleting a single user waypoint:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box, or enter a waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint’ Box.
2) Press the Delete Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘YES’ is highlighted in the confirmation Window.
3) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box, or enter a waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint’ Box.
2) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
NOTE: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all user waypoints:
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
INDEX
APPENDICES
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
176
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.4 AIRSPACES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D, Restricted,
MOA (Military Operating Area), Other Airspace, Air Defense Identification Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary Flight
Restriction (TFR).
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Class B Airspace
Restricted Area
Airspace Altitude Label
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Class D Airspace
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Military Operating
Area (MOA)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Class C Airspace
Warning Area
TFR
APPENDICES
Alert Area
ADIZ
INDEX
Figure 5-42 Airspaces
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
177
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The Nearest Airspaces Page, Airspace Alerts Window, and Airspace Alerts on the PFD provide additional
information about airspaces and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off.
This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the
Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an
airspace.
EIS
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example,
if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message is
not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot
is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Altitude Buffer’ Field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert On or counterclockwise to turn the alert Off.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected from the Airspace Group in the Map Settings Menu. See
Table 5-2 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace
area.
178
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest Airspaces Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In addition, a selected
frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the Nearest Airspaces Page. In addition to displaying
a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the Nearest Airspaces Page displays airspace information in
four boxes labeled ‘Airspace Alerts’, ‘Airspace Agency’, ‘Vertical Limits’, and ‘Frequencies’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airspace Alerts Info
Airspace 1
Airspace 2
Airspace 3
EIS
- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
Airspace/Agency Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency
Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Associated Frequencies
- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency
Figure 5-43 Nearest Airspaces Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the Nearest Airspaces Page. The
Alerts and FREQ Softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled only if one or
more frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
AFCS
1) Select the ‘NRST - Nearest Airspaces’ Page.
2) Press the Alerts Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’, and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the desired airspace.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Pressing the PFD Alerts Softkey displays the Alerts window on the PFD. The following airspace alerts are
displayed in the Alerts window:
APPENDICES
Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace
within 10 minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
INDEX
Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead – less than
10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less than 2 nm.
Table 5-7 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
179
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Smart Airspace function de-emphasizes airspaces above or below the current aircraft altitude. The function
does not require the aircraft present position or flight path to enter the lateral boundaries of the airspace. If the
current aircraft altitude is within 1,100 feet of the vertical boundaries of the airspace, the airspace boundary is
shown normally. If the current aircraft altitude is not within 1,100 feet of the vertical boundaries of the airspace,
the airspace boundary is shown subdued.
Smart Airspace Off
Smart Airspace On
Figure 5-44 Smart Airspace
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turning smart airspace on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Group’ Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Airspace’ in the ‘Group’ Box and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Smart Airspace’ Field in the ‘Map Settings’ Window.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn smart airspace ‘On’ or counterclockwise to turn smart airspace ‘Off’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
180
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.5 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on either the MFD Controller or the
PFD, is quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the system establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.
EIS
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
The Direct To Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The Direct To Window displays
selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Direct-to Point Info
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
- City
Map of Selected Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Desired Course
Location of Destination
- Bearing/Distance
AFCS
Figure 5-45 Direct To Window - MFD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
181
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Direct-to Point Info
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
Direct-to Point Info
- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course
EIS
Activation Command
Figure 5-46 Direct To Window - PFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the Direct To Window.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed (with the active flight plan waypoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the
facility name, or city Field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS
Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ Field is highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
AFCS
Any waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the Direct To
Window, the Active Flight Plan Page, or the Active Flight Plan Window.
Waypoint Submenu
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Airports
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
INDEX
Figure 5-47 Waypoint Submenu
182
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed with the
active flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
EIS
Or:
1) Select the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD, or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window on the PFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Select the desired waypoint.
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Any Nearest, Recent or User waypoint can be selected as a direct-to destination in the Direct To Window.
Selecting a Nearest, Recent or User waypoint as a direct-to destination:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the
default selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Nearest, Recent or User waypoints.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
AFCS
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Direct To Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation.
If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is the active flight plan
waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on any WPT page defaults to the
displayed waypoint.
APPENDICES
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
2) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to destination.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.
183
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
1) Press the Nearest Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’ Page and
press the FMS Knob.
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
EIS
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages. If no airport,
NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is automatically
created at the location of the map arrow.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
1) From a ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page, push the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
4) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to
destination.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Cancelling a Direct-to:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the system resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When navigating a direct-to, the system sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected using the ‘Course’ Field on the Direct To Window.
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed with the destination Field highlighted.
APPENDICES
2) Highlight the ‘Course’ Field.
3) Enter the desired course.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
INDEX
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
184
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed with the destination Field highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
EIS
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from the
aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint, or at the
specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNV altitudes prior to the directto destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of a direct-to destination that is
part of the active flight plan. All VNV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on
Vertical Navigation for more information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the ‘VNV’ altitude Field.
3) Enter the desired altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now flashing in the VNV offset distance Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.
8) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ Field is highlighted.
9) Press the ENT Key to activate.
Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
AFCS
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
185
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight planning on the system consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding
waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. The system allows
flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using
different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being
flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Flight Plan Leg Type
Symbol
EIS
Active Course Leg*
Active Heading Leg*
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active Roll Steering Path*†
Course Leg in the current flight segment
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Course Leg not in the current flight segment
Heading Leg
Roll Steering Path †
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Future Roll Steering Path ‡
Turn Anticipation Arc
AFCS
* The active leg or path is the one currently being flown, and is shown in magenta.
† A roll steering path is a computed transition between two disconnected legs.
‡ A roll steering path in the flight plan that is beyond the next leg appears as a future roll steering path. When a future roll
steering path becomes the next leg in the flight plan, it appears as a roll steering path.
Table 5-8 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 100 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. Upon power up,
the previously active flight plan is retained and automatically repopulated if the aircraft position is at the origin
airport and the aircraft is on the ground. If, however, the aircraft is not at the origin, on the ground, or if more
than 12 hours have passed since the last active flight plan modification, the previously active flight plan is not
retained. One flight plan can be activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan is
erased when the system is turned off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight
plans with an approach, departure, or arrival, the system uses the waypoint information from the current database
to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the system automatically updates the information
if the procedure has not been modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the
procedure is deleted from the effected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages
in Appendix A) advising that one or more stored flight plans need to be edited.
186
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This reloads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
EIS
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
FLIGHT PLAN CREATION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
• Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
Active FPL Waypoint List
AFCS
- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Vertical Navigation Profile
Turn Anticipation
Arc
Non-Active,
Flight Plan Leg
APPENDICES
- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Time to Top of Descent
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Vertical Deviation
Figure 5-48 Active Flight Plan Page
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
187
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active Flight Plan Comment
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Waypoint List
EIS
- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-49 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD
Catalog Contents
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- # Used
- # Empty
Flight Plan List
- Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Flight Plan
Map
Selected FPL Info
AFCS
- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Figure 5-50 Flight Plan Catalog Page
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The active flight plan is listed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, and in the Active Flight Plan
Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which the system is currently providing guidance, and is shown
on the navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page, and are available for
activation (becomes the active flight plan).
NOTE: The system supports AFCS lateral guidance for all leg types (using NAV or FMS APR mode). The
system does not support course deviation for any heading leg types (VA, VD, VI, VM, or VR).
NOTE: The origin and destination header fields are not selectable. Instead, select the field below the header
INDEX
and turn the small FMS knob to enter the airport identifier via Waypoint Information Window and then, if
desired, input the runway information via the Set Runway Window.
188
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating an active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key. Press the small FMS Knob to activate the cursor (only on MFD).
2) Select the origin airport and runway.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Highlight the origin airport identifier using the FMS Knob.
b) Use the FMS Knob or the Waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the origin
waypoint.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Set Runway’ Window is displayed with the ‘Runway’ Field highlighted.
EIS
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the runway, and press the ENT Key.
e) Press the ENT Key again to add the origin airport/runway to the flight plan.
3) Repeat step number 2 for the destination airport and runway.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select the enroute waypoints.
a) Highlight the location to insert the waypoint using the FMS Knob (If the enroute header is selected, the
new waypoint is placed following the header. If an enroute waypoint or the dashes are selected, the new
waypoint will be placed ahead of the selected item).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Use the FMS Knob or the Waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint.
The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
5) Repeat step number 4 to enter each additional enroute waypoint.
6) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor (if required).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Creating a stored flight plan:
1) From the MFD, press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
AFCS
3) Press the New Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to
display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
4) Select the origin airport and runway.
a) Highlight the origin airport identifier using the FMS Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) Use the FMS Knob or the Waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the origin
waypoint.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Set Runway’ Window is displayed with the ‘Runway’ Field highlighted.
APPENDICES
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the runway, and press the ENT Key.
e) Press the ENT Key again to add the origin airport/runway to the flight plan.
5) Repeat step number 4 for the destination airport and runway.
6) Select the enroute waypoints.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
a) Highlight the location to insert the waypoint using the FMS Knob (If the enroute header is selected, the
new waypoint is placed following the header. If an enroute waypoint or the dashes are selected, the new
waypoint will be placed ahead of the selected item.)
189
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
b) Use the FMS Knob or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint.
c) Press the ENT Key. The stored flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) Repeat step number 6 to enter each additional enroute waypoint.
8) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
FLIGHT PLAN IMPORT/EXPORT
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the Stored Flight Plan Page.
EIS
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card:
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
6) Press the Import Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Import Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If an existing flight plan is selected, an ‘Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL’ prompt is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the
SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select ‘CANCEL’ using the FMS Knob, press the
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the Import Softkey again.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
AFCS
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
APPENDICES
Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card:
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
INDEX
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
190
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6) Press the Export Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Export Flight Plan’.
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.
EIS
FLIGHT PLAN IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
Under certain conditions, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
‘Too many points. Flight plan truncated.’
‘Flight plan successfully exported.’
‘Flight plan export failed.’
APPENDICES
‘One or more user waypoints renamed.’
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
‘User waypoint database full. Not all
loaded.’
AFCS
‘Some waypoints not loaded. Waypoints
locked.’
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
‘File contained user waypoints only.’
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
‘File contained user waypoints only. User
waypoints imported successfully. No
stored flight plan data was modified.’
‘No flight plan files found to import.’
‘Flight plan import failed.’
‘Flight plan partially imported.’
Description
A flight plan file stored on the SD card was successfully imported as a stored flight
plan.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints.
These waypoints have been saved to the system user waypoints. No flight plans
stored in the system have been modified.
The SD card contains no flight plan data.
Flight plan data was not successfully imported from the SD card.
Some flight plan waypoints were successfully imported from the SD card, however
others had errors and were not imported. A partial stored flight plan now exists in
the system.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints.
One or more of these waypoints did not import successfully.
The flight plan on the SD card contains more waypoints than the system can
support. The flight plan was imported with as many waypoints as possible.
The flight plan on the SD card contains one or more waypoints that the system
cannot find in the navigation database. The flight plan has been imported, but
must be edited within the system before it can be activated for use.
The flight plan file on the SD card contains user waypoints. The quantity of stored
user waypoints has exceeded system capacity, therefore not all the user waypoints
on the SD card have been imported. Any flight plan user waypoints that were not
imported are locked in the flight plan. The flight plan must be edited within the
system before it can be activated for use.
One or more imported user waypoints were renamed when imported due to
naming conflicts with waypoints already existing in the system.
The stored flight plan was successfully exported to the SD card.
The stored flight plan was not successfully exported to the SD card. The SD card
may not have sufficient available memory or the card may have been removed
prematurely.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Plan Import/Export Results
‘Flight plan successfully imported.’
INDEX
Table 5-9 Flight Plan Import/Export Messages
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
191
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select the
desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. Flight plans are
limited to 100 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of waypoints in
the flight plan exceeds 100, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the
new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight plan.
NOTE: Manually adding waypoints to a flight plan after a MANSEQ leg creates a lateral gap in the flight
EIS
plan. Time, fuel, and distance values for legs beyond the gap do not include the distance across the gap.
Stored Flight Plan Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
AFCS
Figure 5-51 Stored Flight Plan Page
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select ‘EDIT’ and press the
ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the
highlighted waypoint.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
‘Waypoint Information’ Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window with
a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
INDEX
6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
192
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a Duplicate Waypoint
Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the flight plan is successfully edited in the Flight Plan Window from PFD while the MFD Active
Flight Plan Page is in the process of being edited, the ‘Flight Plan Modified By Other User’ Window will
appear on the MFD. Press the ENT key to return to the Active Flight Plan Page with the accepted changes.
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
EIS
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed prior to the highlighted
waypoint.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
‘Waypoint Information’ Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window with
a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Push the Joystick to activate the panning function on the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page and pan to the map
location of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user
waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the active
flight plan.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
193
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ADDING AIRWAYS TO A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose a flight plan (add the desired
airway entry point if not already in the flight plan), select the waypoint after the desired airway entry point,
select the airway, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. An airway can only be loaded if there is a
waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach procedure.
The system also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on loaded flight plan waypoints.
EIS
Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airways Available at TOP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of
Selected Airway
Figure 5-52 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway
Adding an airway to a flight plan:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and press the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select ‘Load Airway’. The ‘FPL - Select Airway’ Page is displayed. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the ‘Load Airway’
menu item is available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has been chosen (the waypoint ahead of the
cursor position).
APPENDICES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this waypoint is not
a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways are
shown first in the list, followed by ‘all’ altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is
highlighted.
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
194
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airway Entry Waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Airway
Selected Exit Point
Preview of
Selected Airway
Selected Airway Exit
Point
EIS
Airway Exit Points
Available
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-53 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
RESTRICTIONS ON ADDING AIRWAYS
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a directional
restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only one direction.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
For example, airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the
list of airway waypoints. That is, each waypoint may have its own conditional route in relation to another
waypoint.
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the system database.
AFCS
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the flight
plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
195
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ADDING PROCEDURES TO A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation database into a
flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport (departure), arriving at
an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures section for more details.
EIS
Flight Plan Name
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Plan Waypoint
List
Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Load Departure Load Arrival Load Approach Activate Flight Plan -
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-54 Stored Flight Plan Page
DEPARTURE
AFCS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Departure Airport
APPENDICES
Selected
Departure
Departures Available at
KMKC
Preview of
Selected
Departure
INDEX
Departure Waypoint
Sequence
Figure 5-55 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Departure
196
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Departure’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC
- Departure Loading’ Page is displayed.
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
EIS
6) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Departure Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Departure
Selected Runway
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Selected
Departure End
Point
Selected Transition
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Departure Transition
Points Available
AFCS
Figure 5-56 Departure Loading Page - Selecting Transition
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
197
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVAL
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition
waypoints, and a runway.
Destination Airport
EIS
Selected Arrival
Arrivals Available at KCOS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Runway
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of
Selected Arrival
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-57 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Arrival
Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
AFCS
2) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Arrival’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC Arrival Loading’ Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.
198
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Arrival
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
DBRY3
Preview of
Selected Arrival
EIS
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-58 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
APPROACH
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
An Approach Procedure (APR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by designating
transition waypoints.
Destination Airport
AFCS
Selected
Approach
Preview of
Selected
Approach
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Approaches Available at
KCOS
APPENDICES
Figure 5-59 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Approach
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
199
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC
- Approach Loading’ Page is displayed.
4) Select the airport and approach:
EIS
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor
to the Approach ‘Channel’ Field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approach procedure.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Destination Airport
Selected
Approach
AFCS
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
Selected Approach
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Preview of
Selected
Approach
APPENDICES
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
Figure 5-60 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
FLIGHT PLAN STORAGE
INDEX
The system can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. The active flight plan is erased when
the system is powered off or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be
viewed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and on the Stored Flight Plan Page.
200
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) The Flight Plan Information is displayed showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude
information for the selected Flight Plan.
5) Press the Edit Softkey to open the ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.
EIS
6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Plan Name
(Comment)
Selected Flight Plan
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Stored Flight Plan Info
- Departure Airport
- Destination Airport
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Stored FPL Editing
Softkeys
Figure 5-61 Stored Flight Plan Information
AFCS
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page or the Active Flight Plan Window:
1) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
APPENDICES
ACTIVATE A FLIGHT PLAN
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and replaces it with the
flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
201
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the Activate Softkey; or press the ENT Key twice; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’,
and press the ENT Key. The ‘activate stored flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
EIS
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the Invert Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
COPY A FLIGHT PLAN
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without
affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating
a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
AFCS
3) Press the Copy Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Copy
to flight plan XX?’ Window is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
DELETE A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
Individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the system memory.
APPENDICES
Deleting a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the Delete Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete flight plan XX?’ Window is displayed.
INDEX
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
202
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all stored flight plans:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation Window is displayed.
EIS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT PLAN EDITING
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The active flight plan or any stored flight plan can be edited. The edits made to the active flight plan affect
navigation as soon as they are entered.
DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system allows deleting an active flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by the
system.
Deleting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ Window is displayed.
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
DELETING FLIGHT PLAN ITEMS
AFCS
Individual waypoints, entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some
waypoints in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be deleted individually. Attempting
to delete a waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: If removal of a flight plan item (waypoint, procedure, etc.) results in deletion of the end waypoint of
the active leg, an off-route direct-to to the deleted waypoint is created and activated.
Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ Window is displayed.
INDEX
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
203
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Deleting an entire airway from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the header of the airway to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name> from flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the header of the procedure to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
AFCS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Deleting an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
APPENDICES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ Window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
204
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Deleting an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the header of the airway to be deleted.
EIS
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name> from flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the header of the procedure to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
APPENDICES
5) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
205
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
CHANGING FLIGHT PLAN COMMENTS (NAMES)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification
and sorting.
Changing the active flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Comment’ Field.
3) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
EIS
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Comment’ Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
206
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALONG TRACK OFFSETS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight plan.
Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the system
reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances can be
entered from 1 to 999 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track
offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an
along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
EIS
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an along
track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at or after
the final approach fix of an approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be
changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with the new offset
distance.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and Distance
from Flight Plan Waypoint
Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-62 Along Track Offset
Entering an along track offset distance:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the along track offset.
3) Press the ATK OFS Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
INDEX
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 999 nm (limited by leg distances).
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
207
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
PARALLEL TRACK
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Parallel Track (PTK) feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the
current flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel
course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier.
While flying a parallel track:
• Initiating a direct-to will cancel the parallel track and fly direct-to the selected waypoint.
• Initiating a hold at the present position will cancel the parallel track and fly the holding pattern.
EIS
• Initiating a hold at a waypoint will result in the aircraft flying the parallel track until a turn is required to fly
to the hold waypoint. If the hold is removed prior to reaching the hold waypoint, the parallel track will be
resumed. Once the holding pattern is active, the parallel track will not be resumed upon exiting the hold.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel tracks overlap as a
result of the course change.
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Activating parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Parallel Track’ Window is displayed
with the ‘Direction’ Field highlighted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘LEFT’ or ‘RIGHT’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘Distance’ Field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ‘Activate Parallel Track’ is
highlighted.
AFCS
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track
activation.
Offset Direction
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Offset Distance
INDEX
APPENDICES
Activation Prompt
Figure 5-63 Parallel Track Window
208
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Parallel Track
Waypoints
- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- ...
- LAA-p
Original Track
EIS
Parallel Track
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-64 Parallel Track Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation prompt
is displayed, but disabled. If an approach leg is active, the status indicates that the system is unable to activate the
parallel track with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Approach Leg Active’. If the offset direction and distance
results in an unreasonable route geometry (e.g., there is a sharp turn of more than 120 degrees), the status indicates
that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry (‘Parallel Track Unavailable
Invalid Route Geometry’). If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type (‘Parallel Track Unavailable Not Allowed for Active Leg’). Parallel track is also unavailable for a
leg if there are no legs remaining in the flight plan after the given leg, or OBS mode is active
AFCS
Parallel track will be cancelled if the active leg changes to a leg where one of the preceding is true.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Activation of parallel track will apply from the current position along the flight plan until a leg that does not
meet the criteria for parallel track. Guidance will be computed to return to the original track at the beginning
of that leg.
Cancelling parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Parallel Track’ Window is displayed
with ‘Cancel Parallel Track?’ highlighted.
3) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
209
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Activating a flight plan leg:
The system allows selection of a highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently used
for navigation guidance).
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the destination waypoint for the desired leg.
EIS
3) Press the ACT Leg Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation Window is displayed with ‘Activate’ highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘Cancel’ and press
the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INVERTING A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point.
Inverting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert active flight plan?’
confirmation Window is displayed.
3) Select ‘OK’.
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the Invert Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS
INDEX
Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way. The active flight plan can be configured
to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan;
and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view, additional information is
displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and
Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
210
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing the flight plan view:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the FPL - Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the View Softkey to display the Wide, Narrow, Leg-Leg, and CUM Softkeys.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or press the Leg-Leg Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
4) Press the Wide Softkey to display the wide view, or select the Narrow Softkey to display the narrow view.
5) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
EIS
COLLAPSING AIRWAYS
The system allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Stored or Active
Flight Plan Page/Window. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value is
inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed
airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is automatically
expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
All Airways
Collapsed View
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
V4.SLN Airway
Expanded View
Figure 5-65 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
APPENDICES
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
211
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference
waypoint, and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference
waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
EIS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point Of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with a
highlighted field within the ‘From’ Box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint. The system displays the bearing (BRG) and distance (DIS) to
the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user waypoint at this
location. Press the ENT Key. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference
waypoint.
USER-DEFINED HOLDING PATTERNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A holding pattern can be defined at any active flight plan waypoint, at the aircraft present position, or at a
direct-to waypoint.
Creating a user-defined hold at an active flight plan waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the hold.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Hold at’ Window appears with
the ‘Course’ Field highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘Load?’ is highlighted to insert the hold into the flight plan.
212
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating a user-defined hold at the aircraft present position:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Present Position’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Hold at’ Window appears
with the ‘Course’ Field highlighted.
3) If desired, use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) Press the ENT Key while ‘Activate?’ is highlighted to create an Offroute Direct-to hold waypoint at the aircraft
present position and activate the hold.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
213
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hold At
Waypoint
Menu
Selection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Waypoint
Selected
Hold Entry Course
Location of Hold
Course Direction
Inbound or Outbound
Leg Length Mode Button
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(Time or Distance)
Leg Length
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
AFCS
(Right or Left)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map of Hold Location
Expect Further Clearance Time
INDEX
Load Hold in Active Flight Plan
Figure 5-66 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at an Active Flight Plan Waypoint
214
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoint
Selected
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Hold Entry Course
Location of Hold
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Course Direction
(Inbound or Outbound)
Leg Length
(Time in nm or
Distance in minutes)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn Direction
(Right or Left)
Leg Length Mode
Button
(Time or Distance)
AFCS
Map of Hold Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Expect Further
Clearance Time
Load Hold and
Activate Direct To
INDEX
Hold At Direct To Waypoint Selection
Figure 5-67 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at a Direct To Waypoint
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
215
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating a user-defined hold at a direct-to waypoint:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
1) Press a Direct-to Key and set up the direct-to waypoint as desired, but select ‘Hold?’ instead of ‘Activate?’
when finished (MFD or PFD).
3) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the ENT Key while ‘Activate?’ is highlighted to activate the direct-to with the user-defined hold defined
at the direct-to waypoint. (If the direct-to waypoint is part of the active flight plan, the HOLD is inserted into
the active flight plan. If the direct-to waypoint is not part of the active flight plan, an off-route direct-to hold is
created.)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Exiting a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
Press the SUSP Softkey. The system will provide guidance to follow the holding pattern to the inbound course
and resume automatic waypoint sequencing.
Removing a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD), and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the HOLD waypoint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove Holding Pattern?’ confirmation Window is displayed.
AFCS
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed from the active flight plan. Select ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT Key to cancel the removal of the holding pattern.
Removing a user-defined hold at an off-route direct-to:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press a Direct To Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window (PFD or MFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ with the cursor on the ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ selection.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed.
216
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The system supports vertical path guidance and altitude constraints for the following leg types: AF,
CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FC, FD, PI, RF, and TF. Altitude constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
Active Vertical Navigation Profile
Active Vertical Navigation Profile
Enabled (valid data)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Disabled (fields dashed)
EIS
The system Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute and terminal
phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a direct-to
waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a linear
deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan. Both manual and autopilot-coupled guidance are supported.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Cncl VNV Softkey
ENBL VNV Softkey
Figure 5-68 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling and Disabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the FPL- Active Flight Plan Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the Active VNV Profile box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., FALUR)).
3) To Disable VNV guidance, press the Cncl VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and
press the ENT Key. Vertical navigation is disabled.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
217
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and
time to top of descent/bottom of descent (TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and
Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TOD items
displayed in the Active VNV Profile box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually enabled. Vertical
guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The system allows a vertical navigation direct-to for any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Pressing the VNV Direct-to Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct-to Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass
flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent
(TOD) point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
NOTE: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (cyan number) to be used. If not,
the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the VNV Direct-To Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’, and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Activate vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation Window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) in the Active VNV Profile Box.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the VNV Prof Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the ENT
Key. The cursor is now located in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
218
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
Altitude Constraint
Examples
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database.
Displayed Text
Examples
White Text
EIS
Cross AT or ABOVE
5,000 ft
Cyan Text with Pencil Icon
Cyan Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Cross AT 2,300 ft
Temperature
Compensated
White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Cross AT or BELOW
3,000 ft
Figure 5-69 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
5OOOFT
Altitude calculated by the system estimating the altitude of the aircraft
as it passes over the navigation point. No white line above or below to
indicate a potential constraint.
5OOOFT
Altitude is designated for use in determining
vertical guidance. A pencil icon indicates manual
designation or manual data entry.
5OOOFT
Altitude retrieved from the navigation database. White line above or
below indicates the type of constraint, as shown in the preceding figure.
These altitudes are provided as a reference, and are not designated to be
used in determining vertical guidance.
The system cannot use this altitude in
determining vertical guidance because of an
invalid constraint condition.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5OOOFT
AFCS
Cyan Text
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
White Text
Table 5-10 Altitude Constraint Color Coding
APPENDICES
Altitudes associated with arrival and approach procedures are “auto-designated”. This means the system
automatically provides descending vertical speed and deviation guidance to an altitude(s) chosen by the system
for any waypoint prior to the FAF. Auto-designated altitudes are displayed as cyan text. Additionally, altitudes
can be manually designated prior to the FAF. The FAF can be manually designated if the selected approach
provides no vertical guidance (i.e. glidepath). Manually designated altitudes are displayed as cyan text and
pencil icon. For all designated altitudes, the system will automatically calculate altitude constraints prior to the
designated altitude, which are displayed as white text.
INDEX
NOTE: All designated altitudes will be displayed without restriction bars regardless of what is shown on the
published arrival or approach.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
219
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Manually designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode.
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
Manually designating a procedure waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and highlight the desired waypoint altitude. Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing
mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An
altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. When a database altitude
restriction is displayed, the system allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively
overriding the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude restriction of type “AT or
ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical
profile.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated” using the CLR Key.
The altitude is now displayed only as a reference. It is not used to give vertical guidance. Other displayed
altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude
to a non-designated altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be exceeded
AFCS
• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS or GPS
SBAS approach)
• The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF
Entering/modifying an altitude constraint:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
INDEX
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small
FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter
the three digit Flight Level.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
220
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event an
altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral waypoint,
the system displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude can be provided.
The system also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been edited.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Deleting an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude?’ confirmation Window is displayed.
EIS
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation Window is
displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Select ‘REMOVE’ and press the ENT Key. The manually entered altitude is deleted (it is replaced by a system
calculated altitude, if available).
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation Window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Modifying a system calculated altitude constraint:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. An ‘Edit or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation Window is displayed.
4) Select ‘EDIT’ and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
5) Edit the value using the FMS Knobs, and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
A Vertical Situation Display (VSD) can be shown on the bottom of the Navigation Map Page. The terrain,
obstacles, vertical track vector, selected altitude, and active flight plan information (active flight plan information
consists of waypoints, associated altitude constraints, current VNAV profile, BOC/TOC, TOD/BOD, and
destination runway) can be displayed on the VSD, depending on the selected mode. See the Hazard Avoidance
section for information about winds aloft, obstacles, and relative terrain on the VSD.
221
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Certain leg types (e.g. holds, heading legs) do not support VNAV PATH descents because the lateral
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
distance of those legs is unknown. The VSD will not show a VNAV profile for any legs that have no vertical
path guidance.
EIS
The VSD horizontal range is equal to the navigation map indicated range when the VSD is in Track mode.
When the VSD is in Flight Plan mode, the horizontal range is the lower of twice the navigation map indicated
range or the lowest range the displays all of the remaining active flight plan. The VSD altitude range automatically
changes when the navigation map range is changed to keep a constant ratio of altitude range to horizontal
range, until both minimum and maximum display limits have been met. At ranges above the maximum, the
altitude range remains constant at the maximum.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The aircraft symbol is displayed on the left side of the VSD. The position of the aircraft symbol on the vertical
scale is close to the top for a descent phase, at the bottom for on-ground or a climb phase, and in the middle
for a cruise phase or if the phase is unknown.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If two waypoints are close together, and their labels or constraint values overlap enough to obscure any text,
one waypoint label/constraint value is removed and the vertical dashed line for that waypoint is displayed as
darker gray. The priority for which waypoint remains displayed is: (1) the current TO waypoint, (2) waypoint
with an altitude constraint, and (3) waypoint closer to the aircraft.
Enabling the Vertical Situation Display
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
4) Press the VSD Softkey to enable the Vertical Situation Display.
5) Press the VSD Mode Softkey to choose between Auto, FPL, or TRK.
Or:
AFCS
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the VSD Mode Softkey to choose between Auto, FPL, or TRK.
Disabling the Vertical Situation Display
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Off Softkey.
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Hide VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
222
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
VSD Mode (AUTO FPL)
Destination Runway
Vertical Situation
Display (VSD)
VSD Mode Buttons
Obstacle
Figure 5-70 Vertical Situation Display (VSD)
Items available on VSD
Available active FPL & aircraft
within FPL swath
(1) Active FPL available &
aircraft not within FPL swath,
or (2) Active FPL not available
Terrain/obstacles along the active flight plan route, vertical track
vector, selected altitude, and active flight plan information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AUTO TRK
FPL Criteria
- FPL
- TRK
- Auto
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VSD Mode Displayed
Button
Mode
Auto
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Absolute Terrain
Current VNAV Profile
AUTO FPL
EIS
Active FPL Waypoints
Altitude Constraints
Selected Alt. (9000ft)
Terrain/obstacles along the current track, vertical track vector, and
selected altitude
Terrain/obstacles along the active flight plan route, vertical track
vector, selected altitude, and active flight plan information
Flight Plan
FPL
Active FPL not available
Only shows message 'Flight Plan Not Available'
Terrain/obstacles along the current track, vertical track vector, and
Track
TRK
NA
selected altitude
Active flight plan information consists of waypoints, associated altitude constraints, current VNAV profile, BOC/TOC, TOD/BOD,
and destination runway
Active FPL available
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 5-11 VSD Modes
APPENDICES
Terrain/obstacles are available on the VSD, and will be shown if the aircraft altitude is low enough for the
terrain/obstacles to be in view (terrain will be shown in gray if the terrain is selected Off on the navigation map).
The depicted terrain profile represents an approximate forward-looking contour of the terrain based upon the
highest reported terrain elevations, measured at intervals defined by the terrain database resolution, within a
predefined width along the active flight plan between the aircraft present position and the end of the map range
or active flight plan. The predefined width is determined by the flight phase.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
223
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Phase
Approach, Departure
Terminal
En Route, Oceanic
Width of Swath
0.6 nm
2.0 nm
4.0 nm
Table 5-12 VSD Swath Width by Flight Phase
VSD MESSAGES
Under certain conditions, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
EIS
Message
‘Loading...’
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
‘Flight Plan Not Available’
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
‘Flight Plan mode unavailable because aircraft off
course and active leg over 200 NM’
‘Aircraft Beyond Active Leg’
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
‘Active Leg Begins Beyond Aircraft Position’
AFCS
‘VSD Not Available’
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
‘VSD Data Old. Deselect and Reselect VSD’
Description
VSD is loading data due to a range change, full/half switch, or first being
selected for display.
Flight Plan mode is selected and there is not a flight plan loaded with at
least one leg.
All of the following are true:
- Flight Plan mode is selected
- The active leg is greater than 200 nm
- The aircraft is outside the swath
Flight Plan mode is selected and the aircraft’s position, as projected on
the flight plan, is past the end of the active leg.
Flight Plan mode is selected and the aircraft’s position, as projected on
the flight plan, is prior to the beginning of the active leg.
At least one of the following is true:
- Valid terrain database not available
- GPS MSL altitude not available
- Current barometric altitude not available
- Neither current track nor current heading available
- GPS position not available
- Map range setting is less than 1 nm
VSD data has failed to update for 2 seconds or more.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 5-13 VSD System Messages
224
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.8 PROCEDURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using any
Procedures (PROC) Key.
EIS
The selected procedure for the origin or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the origin and destination airport are already
loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport on the Procedure Loading Page. Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate”
is given. “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation
guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps
the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds
the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system adds terminal procedures to the flight plan based on leg types coded within that procedure in the
navigation database. If the terminal procedure in the flight plan contains an identifier like ‘6368ft’, that indicates
a leg that terminates when the specified altitude (6368 feet) has been exceeded. A heading leg in the flight plan
displays ‘hdg’ preceding the DTK (e.g. ‘hdg 008°’). A flight plan leg requiring the pilot to manually initiate
sequencing to the next leg displays ‘MANSEQ’ as the identifier.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Heading Leg Terminating at the
Specified Altitude
Manually Sequenced Heading Leg
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-71 Procedure Leg Identifiers
APPENDICES
Viewing available procedures at an airport:
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (first page in the WPT group):
Press the DP Softkey. The ‘WPT - Departure Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed
on the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page.
Or.
INDEX
Press the STAR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Arrival Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on
the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page.
Or.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
225
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Press the APR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Approach Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed
on the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the procedure. The procedure is previewed on the map.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available procedures. Press the ENT Key to select the procedure. The
cursor moves to the next box (runway or transition). The procedure is previewed on the map.
EIS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runway or transition. Press the ENT Key to select the runway or
transition. The cursor moves to the next box (if available). The procedure is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runway or transition. Press the ENT Key to select the runway or
transition. The cursor moves to the ‘Sequence’ Box or the ‘Minimums’ Box. The procedure is previewed on the
map.
7) Press the Info 1 Softkey or the Info 2 Softkey to return to the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page.
Loading a procedure into the active flight plan from the <Procedure> Information Page:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (first page in the WPT group):
Press the DP Softkey. The ‘WPT - Departure Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed
on the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page.
Or.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the STAR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Arrival Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on
the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page.
Or.
Press the APR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Approach Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed
on the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page.
AFCS
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Select a different procedure, if desired.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the procedure. The procedure is previewed on the map.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available procedures. Press the ENT Key to select the procedure. The
cursor moves to the next box (runway or transition). The procedure is previewed on the map.
APPENDICES
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runway or transition. Press the ENT Key to select the
runway or transition. The cursor moves to the next box (if available). The procedure is previewed on the
map.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The
cursor moves to the ‘Sequence’ Box or the ‘Minimums’ Box. The procedure is previewed on the map.
INDEX
4) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘WPT - <Procedure> Information’ ‘Page Menu’.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load <procedure>’.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the procedure into the active flight plan.
226
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DEPARTURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the origin airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING A DEPARTURE INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
EIS
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC - Departure Loading’ Page is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
5) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
Available Procedure Actions
Departure Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Departure Choices
APPENDICES
Departure Preview
Loaded Procedures
Figure 5-72 Departure Selection
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
227
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loaded Departure
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Departure
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-73 Departure Loading
REMOVING A DEPARTURE FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
AFCS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
228
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ARRIVALS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active flight
plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition
waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING AN ARRIVAL INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
EIS
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC - Arrival Loading’ Page is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
5) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
Destination Airport
Available Procedure Actions
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Arrival Preview
APPENDICES
Loaded Procedures
Arrival Choices
Figure 5-74 Arrival Selection
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
229
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loaded Arrival
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Arrival
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-75 Arrival Loading
REMOVING AN ARRIVAL FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, arrivals can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
AFCS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
230
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPROACHES
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (SBAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures
for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An Approach Procedure (APR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance for
non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach is already in
the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by selection of an
approach and the transition waypoints.
EIS
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “Load” or “Load and Activate” is given (“Load and
Activate” is only available for the active flight plan). “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan
without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate
waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure available for quick activation when needed.
“Activating” also adds the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance
to the first waypoint in the approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS receiver
can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for primary guidance,
the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or ILS). The final course
segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to the proper frequency and
selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
AFCS
Example on HSI
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Approach Service Level
- LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV
INDEX
HSI Annunciation
Description
LNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV minima
LNAV+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV minima. Advisory
vertical guidance is provided.
L/VNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV/VNAV minima
(available only if (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
LP
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima (downgrades to
(available only if LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
LP+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima
(available only if Advisory vertical guidance is provided (downgrades to LNAV if
SBAS available) SBAS unavailable)
LPV
RNAV GPS approach using published LPV minima (downgrades
(available only if to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The SBAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LP+V, and LPV approach service levels
according to the published chart. LNAV+V is an LNAV with advisory vertical guidance provided for assistance
in maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance is displayed
on the system PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. In all cases where
LNAV+V is indicated by the system during an approach, LNAV minima are used. The active approach service
level is annunciated on the HSI as shown in the following table:
Table 5-13 Approach Service Levels
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
231
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
LOADING AN APPROACH INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC - Approach Loading’ Page is displayed.
3) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
EIS
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor
to the ‘Approach Channel’ Field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Minimums
a) To set ‘Minimums’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key.
Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the ‘TEMP At XXXX’ Field. Turn the small FMS Knob to
select the temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
6) Press the ENT Key with ‘Load?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘Activate’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
232
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Available Procedure Actions
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Approach Preview
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Loaded Procedures
Approach Choices
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-76 Approach Selection
NOTE: If there is no arrival procedure in the active flight plan, loading an approach after a destination
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
airport has already been entered will result in a duplicate destination airport waypoint being added to the
end of the enroute segment.
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED
FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
AFCS
Selected Approach
Loaded Approach
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys LOAD or ACTIVATE? Annunciation
Figure 5-77 Approach Loading
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
233
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Page:
1) Select the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is
previewed on the map.
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
EIS
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘PROC - Approach Loading’ Page is displayed with the transition highlighted.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.
7) Minimums
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) To set ‘Minimums’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key.
Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the ‘TEMP At XXXX’ Field. Turn the small FMS Knob to
select the temperature, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ Field is highlighted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure. The system continues
navigating the current flight plan until the approach is activated. When GPS is not approved for the selected
final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the
approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
ACTIVATING AN APPROACH
AFCS
A previously loaded approach can be activated from the Procedures Window.
Activating a previously loaded approach:
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
In many cases, it may be easiest to “load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps below to select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’ — which
makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
APPENDICES
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
1) Press the PROC Key to display the ‘Procedures’ Window.
INDEX
2) Highlight ‘Activate Vector-to-Final’ and press the ENT Key.
234
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
1) From the ‘PROC - Approach Loading’ Page, press the MENU Key. The ‘Page Menu’ is displayed with ‘Load &
Activate Approach’ highlighted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT
APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to
a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
REMOVING AN APPROACH FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, approaches can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
EIS
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
MISSED APPROACH
AFCS
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
1) Press the PROC Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Missed Approach’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
Or:
Fly past the MAP, and press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD.
APPENDICES
Or:
Press the Go-Around Button.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
235
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6600ft’) is
not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by the navigation database, and may be below, equal to, or above the published
minimums for this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,600 feet)
after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of
6,600 feet is reached. After reaching 6,600 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case
ADANE). If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established
to the published fix (ADANE) to begin the missed approach procedure.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Course to Altitude Leg
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-78 Course to Altitude
236
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If desired, the system can compensate the loaded approach altitudes based on a pilot-supplied temperature
at the destination. For example, if the pilot enters a destination temperature of -40º C, the system increases
the approach altitudes accordingly. A temperature compensated altitude is displayed in slanted text.
Activating temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page, press the MENU Key. The ‘Page Menu’ is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Temperature Compensation’ Window is displayed.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select the temperature at the <airport>. The compensated altitude is computed as
the temperature is selected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: The temperature at the destination can be entered in the Temperature Compensation Window on the
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MFD, or in the References Window on the PFD. There is only one compensation temperature for the system,
therefore, changing the temperature will affect both the loaded approach altitudes and the minimums.
Refer to the Flight Instruments section for information about applying temperature compensation to the
MDA/DH.
5) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate Compensation?’ is highlighted.
6) Press the ENT Key. The compensated altitudes for the approach are shown in the flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Temperature
AFCS
FAF Altitude
Compensated
Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Temperature
Compensation
Selected
APPENDICES
Figure 5-79 Temperature Compensation
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
237
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
EIS
Compensated
Altitudes
Uncompensated
Altitudes
Figure 5-80 Temperature Compensation in the Active Flight Plan
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Cancelling temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page, press the MENU Key. The ‘Page Menu’ is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Temperature Compensation’ Window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘Cancel Compensation?’ is highlighted.
5) Press the ENT Key. The temperature compensated altitude at the FAF is cancelled.
NOTE: Activating/cancelling temperature compensation for the loaded approach altitudes does not select/
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
deselect temperature compensated minimums (MDA/DH), nor does selecting/deselecting temperature
compensated minimums activate/cancel temperature compensated approach altitudes.
238
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.9 TRIP PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for
a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
planning is also available, based on manually entered fuel data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining
fuel).
TRIP PLANNING
EIS
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Page
located in the Aux Page Group.
Selected Flight Plan Segment
- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Trip Planning Page Mode
- Automatic/Manual
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg
Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
Trip Statistics
Desired Track Distance Est. Time Enroute Est. Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local) -
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature
Other Statistics
- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)
AFCS
Fuel Statistics
Softkeys
- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Total Range -
Figure 5-81 Trip Planning Page
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
APPENDICES
• Departure Time - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations are from the
aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
• Calibrated Airspeed - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary source of information
is GPS ground speed.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
• Indicated Altitude - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source of information
is GPS altitude.
239
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and the entire flight plan (CUM) selected,
the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
EIS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and the remaining flight plan (REM)
selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
‘from’ waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint (WPTs) mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these
default to the endpoints of the active leg).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
• Desired Track - Desired Track is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints.
It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
• Distance - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown
as minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the destination.
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
AFCS
- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected, it shows the ETA by adding to the departure
time all of the ETEs of the legs up to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected,
then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current
leg being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to
and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the
last leg of the flight plan was selected.
• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
INDEX
APPENDICES
• Destination sunrise and sunset times (SUNRISE, SUNSET) - These times are shown as hours:minutes of
the time at the destination.
240
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FUEL STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
• Fuel efficiency (Efficiency) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the current
fuel flow.
• Time of fuel endurance (Total Endurance) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained by
dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
EIS
• Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (Remaining Fuel) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required to reach the end of the selected leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (Remaining Endurance) - This value is calculated by taking
the time of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the selected leg.
• Fuel required for trip (Fuel Required) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel
flow.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Total range at entered fuel flow (Total Range) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.
OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Density Altitude
• True Airspeed
The pilot may select Automatic or Manual page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint (WPTs) mode. In
automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTs selection).
Selected Leg(s)
00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Starting and Ending Waypoint of
Selected Flight Plan Segment
Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
AFCS
Selected Flight Plan NN -
Figure 5-82 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
Selected Flight Plan
Selected Leg(s)
Not Available
APPENDICES
Not Available
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
Figure 5-83 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
241
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
Press the Auto Softkey or the Manual Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Press the FPL Softkey or the WPTs Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
EIS
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the ‘FPL’ (flight plan number) Field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The PFD Map also displays the selected data.
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the WPTs Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The
cursor is positioned in the waypoint Field directly below the ‘FPL’ Field.
2) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the ‘Page Menu’ ‘Set WPT to Present Position’
if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.
In manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot, in addition to flight
plan and leg selection.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
AFCS
1) Press the Manual Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the ‘Page Menu’, and press the ENT Key. The cursor may
now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the ‘Departure Time’ Field and enter the desired value. Press the
ENT Key. The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat
until all desired values have been entered.
242
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.10 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The PFD Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,
or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other
EIS
phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and the system
stops using GPS.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the system detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the
system uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when
available) to calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the system in DR Mode may become increasingly
unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode, airspeed and/or heading data
is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated position, and,
consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the aircraft. Estimated
position information displayed by the system through DR while there is no heading and/or airspeed data available
should not be used for navigation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/SBAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compound the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
AFCS
DR Mode is indicated on the system by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in amber over the ‘own
aircraft’ symbol as shown in Figure 5-84. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in amber on the HSI slightly
below and to the left of the aircraft symbol on the CDI as shown in Figure 5-84. The CDI deviation bar remains,
but is removed from the display after 20 minutes in DR Mode. The autopilot will remain coupled in DR mode
as long as the deviation info is available (20 min.) Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’ alert message
appears on the PFD. Normal navigation using GPS/SBAS source data resumes automatically once a valid GPS
solution is restored.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as amber text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information as shown in Figure
5-84. If the VSD Inset is selected on the MFD, ‘VSD Not Available’ will be displayed.
NOTE: GPS derived information will remain displayed in magenta (not amber) on the Flight Plan Progress
inset when operating in Dead Reckoning mode. However, this information shall still be considered as
degraded navigation source information.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
243
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Also, while the system is in DR Mode, some terrain functions are not available. Additionally, the accuracy of
all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to
function, but with degraded accuracy.
Distance &
Bearing
EIS
Current
Track
Indicator
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Course Deviation
Indicator
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Bearing
Pointer/
Distance
Nav Data Bar
AFCS
All data except
Active Leg, TAS,
and DTK are in
amber
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
INDEX
Figure 5-84 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Amber
244
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard avoidance features available for the system are designed to aid situational awareness and provide advisory
information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air traffic.
Weather
• GDL 69/69A SXM SiriusXM Weather (Subscription Optional)
• GSR 56 Garmin Connext Weather (Optional)
EIS
• Flight Information Services-Broadcast (Optional)
• L-3 Stormscope® WX-500 Lightning Detection System (Optional)
Terrain Avoidance
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Terrain Proximity
• Terrain-SVT (included with Garmin SVT option)
Traffic
• Traffic Information Service (TIS)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
®
• Avidyne TAS600 Series Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
• Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) Traffic (Optional)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
245
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 DATA LINK WEATHER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
EIS
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be older than the indicated weather product age.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Data Link Weather feature enables the system to receive weather information from a variety of weather
sources, depending on the equipment installed in the aircraft. These sources may include SiriusXM Weather,
Garmin Connext Weather, and Flight Information Services-Broadcast (FIS-B). For each source, a ground-based
system processes the weather information collected from a network of sensors and weather data providers.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The SiriusXM Weather service, available with the Garmin 69A SXM data link receiver and an active service
subscription, updates its weather data periodically and automatically, and transmits this information to the
aircraft’s receiver via satellite on the S-Band frequency. This service provides continuous reception capabilities at
any altitude throughout North America.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The FIS-B Weather service, available when equipped with a capable transponder or data link receiver which
can receive 978 MHz Universal Access Transceiver (UAT) data, delivers subscription-free weather information
periodically and automatically to the aircraft. FIS-B uses a network of FAA-operated Ground-Based Transceivers
(GBTs) to transmit the information to the aircraft’s receiver. Reception is limited to line-of-sight, and is available
below 24,000 feet MSL in the United States. FIS-B broadcasts provide weather data in a repeating cycle which
may take approximately ten minutes to transmit all available weather data. Therefore, not all weather data may
be present immediately upon initial FIS-B signal acquisition. FIS-B is a component of the Automatic Dependent
Surveillance (ADS-B) system, which offers both weather and traffic data; refer to the ADS-B Traffic discussion later
in this section for a more detailed discussion of the ADS-B system and its capabilities.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Garmin Connext Weather service, available when equipped with the Garmin GSR 56 Iridium Satellite
Transceiver and an active service subscription, provides data link weather information to the aircraft after the pilot
defines a geographic area and subsequently selects a manual or automatically recurring Connext Data Request.
The transceiver then contacts the Garmin Connext Weather service using the Iridium Satellite telephone system
and retrieves the weather data for the specified area. The Garmin Connext Weather service offers worldwide
weather coverage, but the availability of individual weather products, such as radar precipitation, varies by region.
NOTE: To check the availability of Garmin Connext weather products offered in a particular region, visit
INDEX
http://sites.garmin.com/connext.
246
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVATING DATA LINK WEATHER SERVICES
NOTE: Service activation is not applicable to the FIS-B Weather service.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ACTIVATING THE SIRIUSXM WEATHER SERVICE
Before SiriusXM Weather can be used, the service must be enabled by providing SiriusXM’s customer
service the coded ID(s) unique to the installed data link receiver. The Data Radio ID must be provided to
activate the weather service. A separate Audio Radio ID, if present, enables the receiver to provide SiriusXM
Radio entertainment. To view this information, refer to the following locations:
EIS
• The Aux - XM Information Page on the MFD
• The SiriusXM Activation Instructions included with the Data Link Receiver
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• The label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
SiriusXM uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the system to display weather data and/
or provide audio entertainment programming through the data link receiver.
Establishing an account for SiriusXM services:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the XM Radio Page in the Aux Page Group.
2) If necessary, press the Info Softkey to display the ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
3) Note the Data Radio ID (for SiriusXM Weather data) and/or the Audio Radio ID (for SiriusXM Satellite Radio).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Contact SiriusXM customer service through the phone number listed on its website, www.siriusxm.com.
5) Provide SiriusXM customer service the Data Radio ID and/or Audio Radio ID, in addition to payment information,
and the desired weather product subscription package.
After SiriusXM has been contacted, it may take approximately 15 minutes until the activation occurs.
AFCS
Verifying the SiriusXM Weather service activation:
1) Once a SiriusXM Weather account has been established, select the XM Radio Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) If necessary, press the Info Softkey to display the ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) View the list of supported Weather Products. An empty box appears next to an unavailable weather product; a
green filled box appears next to an available weather product. During activation, it may take several minutes
for weather products in the selected subscription package to become available.
APPENDICES
NOTE: Not all weather products offered by SiriusXM are supported for display on this system. This pilot’s
guide only discusses supported weather products.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
247
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Data Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Weather
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Audio Radio ID
(for SiriusXM Satellite
Radio)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Weather Products
(Available Products for
Service Class Indicated
in Green)
Select to Display XM
Information page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-1 XM Information Page
ACTIVATING GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Garmin Connext weather requires an active Iridium satellite network account and an active subscription to
the Garmin Connext Weather service.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
A subscriber account must be established for the Iridium transceiver prior to using the Iridium Satellite
System for telephone services. Before setting up an Iridium account, obtain the serial number of the Iridium
Transceiver (GSR1) and the System ID by selecting the Aux - System Status Page. Then Contact Garmin at
1-866-739-5687 in the United States or 913-397-8200, wait for the operation, and request extension 1135.
248
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System ID Number
EIS
Iridium Transceiver
Serial Number
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-2 Identification Needed for Iridium Registration
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When an account is established, Garmin provides an Access Code which must be entered on the system in
order to complete the registration process.
Registering the system to receive Garmin Connext Weather:
1) With the aircraft outside and having a clear view of the sky, turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the
Map page group.
AFCS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page. If another data link weather
source such as ‘XM’ or ‘FIS-B’ is displayed in the page title, it will be necessary to change the data link weather
source to CNXT before continuing. Refer to ‘Viewing the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page’ procedure to change
the data link source to prior to registration.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) If the system displays the Connext Registration Window, proceed to step 6. Otherwise, press the MENU Key.
The page menu window is now displayed.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Register With Connext’ in the menu list.
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key. The Connext Registration Window appears as shown in Figure 6-3.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
249
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-3 Enter Access Code
6) Enter the access code provided by Garmin in the ‘Access Code’ field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘Register’ is highlighted as in Figure 6-3.
8) Press the ENT Key. The system contacts Garmin through the Iridium network. System registration is complete
when the Current Registration Window displays the correct information for the Airframe, Tail Number, Airframe
Serial Number, and Iridium Serial Number.
9) When finished, push the FMS Knob to remove the Connext Registration Window.
AFCS
WEATHER PRODUCT AGE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Unlike real-time weather information collected directly from weather sensors on-board an aircraft, such as an
airborne weather radar or a lightning detection system, data link weather in contrast relies on external service
providers to collect, process, and transmit weather information to the aircraft. This information can come from
a variety of sources such as government agencies. Due to the time it takes to collect, process, and distribute
data link weather information, it is imperative for pilots to understand that data link weather information is not
real-time information and may not accurately depict the current conditions.
INDEX
APPENDICES
For each data link weather product which can be displayed as a map overlay, such as radar precipitation,
the system can also show a weather product age. This age represents the elapsed time, in minutes, since the
weather service provider compiled the weather product and the current time. It does not represent the age of the
information contained within the weather product itself. For example, a single mosaic of radar precipitation is
comprised data from multiple radar sites providing data at differing scan rates or intervals. The weather service
provider periodically compiles this data to create a single composite image, and assigns one time to this image
which becomes the basis of the product age. The service provider then makes this weather product available for
data link transmission at the next scheduled update time. The actual age of the weather data contained within
the mosaic is therefore older than its weather product age and should never be considered current.
250
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SiriusXM and FIS-B weather products are broadcast automatically on a repeating cycle without pilot
intervention. For the Garmin Connext service, the pilot schedules a one-time or repeating data request at
regular intervals.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Each data link weather product age has an expiration time. The weather product age is shown in white if it
is less than half of this expiration time, otherwise it is shown in amber until reaching its expiration time. After
a weather product has expired, the system removes the expired weather product from the displays, and shows
white dashes instead of the age. If the data link receiver has not yet received a weather product ‘N/A’ appears
instead of the age to show the product is currently not available for display. This may occur, for example, after
powering on the system but before the data link receiver has received a complete weather data transmission. It
could also indicate a possible outage of a weather product.
EIS
The weather product age is shown automatically for weather products displayed on MFD maps. For PFD
maps, the pilot can manually enable/disable the age information.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Enabling/disabling the weather product age for PFD Maps:
1) With the PFD Inset Map or HSI Map displayed, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the WX LGND to show/remove the weather product age information for PFD maps.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Tables 6-1 and 6-2 show the weather product symbols, the expiration times and the broadcast rates for
SiriusXM Weather and FIS-B Weather, respectively. The broadcast rate represents the interval at which the
service provider transmits new signals that may or may not contain updated weather product information. It
does not represent the rate at which the weather information is updated or when the Data Link Receiver receives
new data. The service provider and its weather data suppliers define and control the data update intervals,
which are subject to change.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
251
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
30
Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
60
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
30
15 (69/69A)
30 (69/69A SXM)
7.5
SiriusXM Lightning (LTNG)
30
5
Cell Movement
30
1.25
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
60
12
METARs
90
12
City Forecast
90
12
Surface Analysis
60
12
Freezing Levels
120
12
Winds Aloft
90
12
County Warnings
60
5
Cyclone Warnings
60
12
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)
90
22
Pilot Weather Report (PIREP)
90
12
Air Report(AIREP)
90
12
Turbulence
180
12
30
60
60
5
12
12
SiriusXM Weather Product
Symbol
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD
INDEX
Radar Coverage Not Available
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast (TAF)
No product image
No product image
No product image
5 (U.S.)
10 (Canada)
Table 6-1 SiriusXM Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
252
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD Composite (US)
30
15
NEXRAD Composite (Regional)
30
2.5
METARs
90
5
Pilot Weather Report (PIREP)
90
10
Winds Aloft
90
10
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
60
5
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
Symbol
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
FIS-B Weather Product
EIS
30
2.5
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
(TAF)
no product image
60
10
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
no product image
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
no product image
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No Radar Coverage
10
Table 6-2 FIS-B Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The following table shows the Garmin Connext Weather product symbols, the expiration times and the
refresh rates. The refresh rate represents the interval at which Garmin Connext weather service makes available
the most current known weather data. It does not necessarily represent the rate at which the service receives
new data from various weather sources. The pilot chooses how often to contact the Garmin Connext weather
service in order to retrieve weather data through the Connext Data Request.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
253
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
Refresh Rate
(Minutes)
U.S.: 3*
Canada: 3*†
Europe: 15
Australia: 15ˆ
30
Infrared Satellite
60
30
Datalink Lightning
30
Continuous
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
60
Continuous
METARs
90
Continuous
Winds Aloft
90
Continuous
Pilot Weather Report (PIREPs)
90
Continuous
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Radar Precipitation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Garmin Connext Weather Product
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs)
no product image
60
Continuous
Terminal Aerodrome Reports TAFs)
no product image
60
Continuous
AFCS
* The composite precipitation image is updated every 3 minutes, but individual radar sites may take between 3 and
10 minutes to provide new data.
†
Canadian radar precipitation data provided by Environment Canada.
ˆ Australian radar precipitation data provided by the Australian Bureau of Meteorology.
Table 6-3 Garmin Connext Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
DISPLAYING DATA LINK WEATHER PRODUCTS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WEATHER DATA LINK PAGE
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Map - Weather Data Link (XM/FIS-B/CNXT) Page is the principal map page for viewing data link weather
information. This page provides the capability for displaying the most data link weather products of any map
on the system. The Weather Data Link Page also provides system-wide controls for selecting the data link
weather source, if more than one source has been installed. The page title indicates the selected data link
weather source (e.g., “XM”, “FIS-B” or “CNXT”).
254
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD Weather
Product Display
Enabled Icon
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD Weather
Product Age (US)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Selected for
Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-4 Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Viewing the Weather Data Link Page and changing the data link weather source, if applicable:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM or CNXT or FIS-B) Page. The currently selected
data link weather source appears in the page title.
3) If the page title does not contain the desired weather source, press the MENU Key.
AFCS
a) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Display XM Weather’, ‘Display Connext Weather’ or ‘Display FIS-B Weather’
(choices may vary depending on the installed equipment).
b) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-5 Changing the Data Link Weather Source
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
255
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The system presents the softkeys for the selected source on the Weather Data Link Page, and for map overlays
used throughout the system. The following figures show the softkeys for the Weather Data Link Page based on
the selected source.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) PAGE SOFTKEYS
NOTE: Only softkeys pertaining to data link weather features are shown in the following tables.
EIS
Level 1
NEXRAD
Level 2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Echo Top
CLD Top
XM LTNG
Cell MOV
SIG/AIR
METAR
Legend
More WX
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Cyclone
SFC
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FRZ LVL
Wind
256
Level 3
Description
Enables/disables the NEXRAD weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Echo Tops weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Cloud Tops weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Lightning weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Cell Movement weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the SIGMET/AIRMET weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the graphical METAR weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Displays second-level SiriusXM Weather product softkeys.
Enables/disables the Cyclone weather product overlay.
Displays third level softkey for enabling/disabling the Surface Analysis and
City Forecast weather product and selecting a forecast period.
Disables the Surface Analysis and City Forecast weather product overlay.
Displays the Surface Analysis for the current time period overlay.
Off
Current
12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, These softkeys display a Surface Analysis and City Forecast overlay for the
selected future time period.
48 HR
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
Legend
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Back
Enables/disables the Freezing Level weather product overlay.
Displays third level softkeys for enabling/disabling the Winds Aloft weather
product and selecting a winds aloft altitude.
Shows the previous level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
PREV
Disables the Winds Aloft weather product overlay.
Off
Softkeys available for Enables/disables the Winds Aloft weather product for the surface (SFC)
selecting winds from through 15,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of
the Surface to 42,0000 altitude.
feet
Shows the next level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
Next
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
Legend
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Back
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level 2
Level 3
ICNG
AFCS
AIREPS
PIREPS
County
Back
Shows the next level of Icing weather product softkeys.
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Enables/disables the AIREPs weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the PIREPs weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the County Warnings weather product overlay.
Returns to the first level softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Back
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PREV
Off
Softkeys available for
selecting Turbulence
altitude from 21,000
feet to 45,000 feet
Next
Legend
Shows the next level of Icing weather product softkeys.
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Displays softkeys for enabling/disabling the Turbulence weather product
overlay.
Shows the previous level of Turbulence altitude softkeys.
Disables the Turbulence weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Icing weather product overlay from 21,000 feet to
45,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of altitude.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TURB
Enables/disables the Icing weather product overlay from 1,000 feet to
30,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of altitude.
EIS
Softkeys available for
selecting winds from
the Icing altitude from
to 1,000 to 30,000 feet
Next
Legend
Description
Displays altitude softkeys for the Icing weather product overlay.
Shows the previous level of Icing altitude softkeys.
Disables the Icing weather product.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PREV
Off
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
257
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WEATHER DATA LINK (CNXT) PAGE SOFTKEYS
Level 1
PRECIP
Level 2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
IR SAT
SIG/AIR
METAR
Legend
EIS
More WX
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Wind
PIREPs
Back
Level 3
Description
Enables/disables the Precipitation weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Infrared Satellite weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the SIGMET/AIRMET weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the METAR weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Connext Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one Connext Weather product is enabled.
Displays second-level Connext Weather product softkeys.
Displays third level softkeys for enabling/disabling the Winds Aloft weather
product and selecting a winds aloft altitude.
Shows the previous level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
PREV
Disables the Winds Aloft weather product overlay.
Off
Softkeys available for Enables/disables the Winds Aloft weather product for the surface (SFC)
selecting winds from through 15,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of
the Surface to 42,0000 altitude.
feet
Shows the next level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
Next
Enables/disables the Connext Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
Legend
for selection when at least one Connext Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Back
Enables/disables the PIREPs weather product overlay.
Returns to the first level softkeys.
WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) PAGE SOFTKEYS)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Level 1
NEXRAD
or
US
or
RGNL
or
US/RGNL
IR SAT
SIG/AIR
METAR
Legend
Level 2
INDEX
Description
Cycles through NEXRAD display modes with each press:
NEXRAD (with annunciator disabled): No NEXRAD is shown.
US: Displays NEXRAD data for the Continental US (CONUS).
RGNL: Displays regional NEXRAD data.
US/RGNL: Displays regional NEXRAD data where available, and CONUS
NEXRAD data in other coverage areas.
More WX
Wind
258
Level 3
Enables/disables the Infrared Satellite weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the SIGMET/AIRMET weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the METAR weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Connext Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one Connext Weather product is enabled.
Displays second-level Connext Weather product softkeys.
Displays third level softkeys for enabling/disabling the Winds Aloft weather
product and selecting a winds aloft altitude.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level 2
Level 3
Description
Shows the previous level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
PREV
Disables the Winds Aloft weather product overlay.
Off
Softkeys available for Enables/disables the Winds Aloft weather product for the surface (SFC)
selecting winds from through 15,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of
the Surface to 42,0000 altitude.
feet
Shows the next level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
Next
Enables/disables the Connext Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
Legend
for selection when at least one Connext Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Back
Enables/disables the PIREPs weather product overlay.
Returns to the first level softkeys.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PIREPs
Back
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
The Weather Data Link Page can display a legend for each enabled weather product.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products on the Weather Data Link Page:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the Legend Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
4) To remove the Weather Legends Window, press the Legend Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS
Knob.
• Cloud Tops
• County Warnings
• Cell Movement
• TFRs
• SIGMETs
• AIREPs
• AIRMETs
• PIREPs
APPENDICES
• METARs
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Echo Tops
AFCS
Additional information about the following weather products can be displayed by panning the Map Pointer
over the following products on the Weather Data Link Page:
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the
Joystick. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
259
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Storm Cell
Selected with Map
Pointer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Additional
Information
on Weather
Feature
Selected with
Map Pointer
Figure 6-6 Panning on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Certain weather products, such as METARs or TFRs have associated full text. When a weather product is
selected with the Map Pointer, press the ENT Key. The system displays the full text for the selected weather
product in a window. To remove the window, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
The Weather Data Link Page also has a page menu that can be accessed by pressing the MENU Key. It has
controls for enabling/disabling the weather products as an alternative to using the softkeys.
AFCS
Customizing the Weather Data Link Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Weather Data Link Page includes controls for selecting the maximum map range to display each
weather product on the page. If the pilot increases the map range beyond this selected maximum range,
the system removes the weather product from the map. If more than one data link weather source has been
installed, the system uses the same maximum map range for the comparable weather product of another
source.
260
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’, then press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Product Group 1’ or ‘Product Group 2’, and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the changed settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: ‘Product Group 2’ is only applicable to SiriusXM and Garmin Connext Weather.
Restoring default Weather Data Link Page settings:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’, then press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) When finished, press the FMS Knob or press the CLR Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
261
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WEATHER PRODUCT MAP OVERLAYS
+
Echo Top
+
Data Link Lightning
+
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
METARs
+
+
+
Surface Analysis & City Forecast
+
Freezing Levels
+
Winds Aloft
AFCS
+
+
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flight Plan Pages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Cell Movement
Cloud Top
Nearest Page Group
+
Aux - Video Page
+
Aux - Trip Planning Page
Weather Data Link Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NEXRAD
Weather Information Page
Navigation Map Page
+
EIS
Data Link Weather Product
PFD Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Other PFD and MFD maps and pages can display a smaller set of data link weather products. The following
table shows which data link weather products can be displayed on specific maps, indicated with a ‘+’ symbol.
+*
+
+
County Warnings
+
Cyclone Warnings
+
Icing Potential
+
PIREPs
+
+
AIREPs
+
+
Turbulence (TURB)
+
No Radar Coverage
+
+
+
TFRs
+
+
+
TAFs
+
+
APPENDICES
* Winds Aloft data is available inside the VSD when VSD is enabled on the Navigation Map Page.
Table 6-4 Weather Product Display Maps
Displaying Data Link Weather Products on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the softkey to enable/disable the desired weather product.
The Navigation Map Page also can display legends for weather products enabled on this map with the
Legend Softkey. This softkey is subdued if no weather products are enabled.
262
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Showing/removing the weather legend on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Legend Softkey to show the weather legends window.
4) When finished, press the Legend Softkey again, or press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the window.
EIS
The Navigation Map Page also allows the pilot to select the maximum map range to display weather
products. If the pilot increases the map range beyond this selected maximum range, the system removes
the weather product from the map. The system uses this setting for all navigation maps, including those
displayed on the PFD.
Setting up and customizing weather data for the navigation maps:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
The system can also display data link weather information on the PFD navigation maps.
Displaying Data Link Weather products on the PFD:
AFCS
NOTE: Data link lightning is not applicable to the FIS-B Weather service.
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the desired weather product softkey(s) to enable/disable the display of data link products on the PFD map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) To enable/disable a data link lightning weather product on a PFD, press the Lightning Softkey.
a) Press the Datalink Softkey to enable data link lightning or press the LTNG Off Softkey.
b) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level PFD Softkeys.
APPENDICES
On the MFD maps, the weather product icon and age appear automatically when a weather is enabled and
the range is within the maximum display limits. On PFD maps, this information is available using the PFD
softkeys.
Enabling/disabling the weather product icon and age display (PFD maps):
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
INDEX
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
3) Press the WX LGND Softkey to enable/disable the weather product age, source, and icon box display on PFD
Maps.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
263
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link Page control the map range settings
above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the weather
product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The page menus
also provide an alternative to using the softkeys to enable/disable data link weather product overlays on maps.
CONNEXT DATA REQUESTS
NOTE: Data requests are not applicable to the SiriusXM Weather or FIS-B Weather services.
EIS
The Connext Data Request Menu provides the pilot with the options to define the requested weather coverage
area(s), choose automatic weather update intervals (if desired), and the ability to send or cancel weather data
requests. A Request Status Window inside the menu shows the status of the Connext Data Request.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Before a Connext Data Request can occur, a valid request coverage area must be defined from which all
currently available Garmin Connext Weather products will be retrieved. At a minimum, either the aircraft’s
present position or a waypoint (as part of a flight plan or entered directly in the ‘WAYPOINT’ coverage field)
must be part of the request coverage area, otherwise the request status window indicates ‘INVALID COVERAGE
AREA’ and the system will not allow a request to occur.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
It is not necessary for a destination (based on an active flight plan), a flight plan, or waypoint to be specified
prior to enabling these coverage areas; however no weather data will be retrieved for these option(s) until a
flight plan or waypoint is provided, respectively.
Manually Requesting Garmin Connext Weather information:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the ‘Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired coverage option(s) and press the ENT Key to show or hide a
green check mark to select one of more of the following coverage selections (Figures 6-8, 6-9):
• Present Position – Requests data based on current location.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Destination – Requests data based on the active flight plan destination (Direct-To destinations excluded).
See the Flight Management section for more information about entering and activating flight plans.
• FPL – Requests data along an active flight plan, if one currently exists. Turn the small FMS Knob to select
the desired flight plan look-ahead distance option (or choose ‘Remaining FPL’ to request weather data for the
remainder of the flight plan), then press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
• Waypoint – Requests data based on a waypoint (which may be off-route). Turn the large and small FMS
Knobs to enter a waypoint, then press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob highlight to the ‘Diameter / Route Width’ distance field and turn the small FMS Knob
to select the desired diameter and route width of the request, then press the ENT Key.
INDEX
6) Turn the large FMS Knob until the ‘Send Request’ field is highlighted. Press the ENT Key to initiate the request
immediately or press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page without requesting
weather data.
264
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-7 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-8 Connext Data Request Window
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
265
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Destination Selected,
200 nm Diameter
Requested
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Present Position Selected,
200 nm Diameter
Requested
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Next 80 nm of Flight Plan
Selected, 200 nm Route
Width Requested
Off-Route Waypoint
Selected, 200 nm Diameter
Requested
AFCS
Figure 6-9 Garmin Connext Weather Data Request Results with Precipitation Data Displayed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
During a Connext Data Request, the Request Status Window initially displays “Contacting Connext...”. Once
a connection is established, the Request Status Window displays “Receiving Wx Data... Time Remaining:” with
an estimated data transfer time (either minutes or seconds). If desired, the Connext Data Request Menu may
be removed while the data request is processing by pressing the FMS Knob; the data request will continue
to process in the background. Connext Data Requests typically take between 1 to 4 minutes to complete
depending on the size of the selected weather coverage area, the amounts of weather activity present, and the
Iridium signal strength.
APPENDICES
The system retrieves all available Garmin Connext Weather products within the selected coverage area during
an initial Connext Data Request, regardless of which products (if any) are currently enabled for display. On
subsequent requests, the system retains previously retrieved textual data (such as METARs and TAFS) if it has
not expired, while new textual weather data matching the current coverage area and all graphical weather data
is transferred to the aircraft during every data request.
INDEX
At the completion of a successful weather data request, the Request Status Window indicates ‘OK’ if the
Connext Data Request menu is still within view.
266
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Cancelling a Connext Data Request in Progress:
1) Select the ‘Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Cancel Request’ field and press the ENT Key. The request status box
indicates ‘Request Cancelled’.
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
EIS
The flight crew can schedule Connext Data Requests to recur automatically. Automatic requests remain
enabled until the flight crew them, or the system power is removed. The Request Status Window indicates the
number of minutes or seconds until the next automatic data request occurs.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: If automatic Connext Data Requests were enabled prior to the system entering Reversionary Mode,
the automatic weather data requests will continue in Reversionary Mode, however the Connext Data
Request Window and its associated options will not be available in Reversionary Mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Enabling/disabling automatic Connext Data Requests:
1) Select the ‘Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Choose the desired weather coverage options.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Update Rate’ field. Then turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the
desired automatic update frequency (Off, 5 Min, 10 Min, 15 Min, 20 Min, 30 Min, 45 Min, or 60 Min), then press
the ENT Key.
AFCS
6) The ‘Send Request’ field is highlighted and a countdown timer is displayed in the ‘Request Status’ Window
based on the currently selected update rate. Press the ENT Key to immediately send an immediate Connext
Data Request.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
267
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WEATHER PRODUCT OVERVIEW
The following is an overview of data link weather products the system can display.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD (SIRIUSXM)
NOTE: Datalink weather radar information cannot be displayed at the same time as relative terrain, echo
tops, icing, or turbulence data.
EIS
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider compiles the available
individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time to indicate when
it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual images--gathered from
each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The
data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the SiriusXM Weather service, whose satellites transmit this
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. The NEXRAD weather product should never be used as a
basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
Figure 6-10 NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
268
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For radar sites in the United States, the NEXRAD weather product shows a composite reflectivity image.
This shows the highest radar energy received from multiple antenna tilt angles at various altitudes. For radar
sites based in Canada, the NEXRAD weather product shows radar returns from the lowest antenna tilt angle,
known as base reflectivity. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the intensity of the echoes
and the type of precipitation, if known.
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
EIS
A mosaic of data from all the available NEXRAD radar sites is shown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-11 NEXRAD Weather Product Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
AFCS
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on PFD maps
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey to enable/disable the display of NEXRAD information.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in gray shade of purple.
APPENDICES
The pilot can select either the United States or Canada region for the desired NEXRAD coverage area on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page. NEXRAD information is shown for the selected region, while a gray shade of
purple is shown for the region which is not selected.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
269
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Selecting the NEXRAD Coverage Region on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Weather Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
3) With Product Group 1 selected, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Region field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘US’ or ‘CNDA’, then press the ENT Key.
5) To remove the menu, push the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
The NEXRAD weather product age display indicates either ‘US’ or ‘CN’ for the selected coverage region.
EIS
Reflectivity
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
• Undetermined precipitation types may be displayed as mixed.
AFCS
• An individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information
about storms directly over the site.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Precipitation may be occurring below the lowest antenna tilt angle (0.5º), and therefore the radar beam
overshoots the precipitation. For example, at a distance of 124 miles from the radar site, the radar beam
is approximately 18,000 feet above the radar site. The radar cannot detect any precipitation occurring
below the beam at this distance and altitude.
• At smaller map ranges, the smallest square block on the display represents an area of approximately
four square kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of radar
reflectivity sampled within the area.
INDEX
APPENDICES
• Unknown precipitation below 52ºN is displayed as rain regardless of actual precipitation type.
270
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Block represents
approximately 4 km2
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-12 NEXRAD Weather Product with 30 NM Map Range
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
AFCS
NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed precipitation regardless of
actual precipitation type.
• If the precipitation type is unknown, the system displays the precipitation as rain, regardless of actual
precipitation type.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
271
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
No Coverage
Above 55°N
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Precipitation
Above 52°N
Always Displays
as Mixed
Figure 6-13 NEXRAD Weather Product - Canada
NEXRAD (FIS-B)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The NEXRAD weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain.
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider to FIS-B compiles
the available individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time
to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual
images--gathered from each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD
weather product age. The data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the FIS-B GBTs, which transmit this
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be older than the current radar synopsis and may not
depict the current weather conditions. NEXRAD information should never be used as a basis for maneuvering
in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
272
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Icon and Age
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Boundary
of Regional
NEXRAD Data
EIS
No radar coverage
within coverage
boundary
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
enabled
Figure 6-14 Regional NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The FIS-B NEXRAD weather product may be displayed for a region around the GBT (higher resolution,
updated more frequently) or for across the continental United States (lower resolution, updated less
frequently). A combined version of both weather products is also available for display on the same map.
When the combined NEXRAD is selected, regional NEXRAD takes display precedence where data is available,
and continental US NEXRAD is displayed outside of the regional NEXRAD coverage area.
Displaying the FIS-B NEXRAD weather product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ Page
AFCS
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ Page.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey. Each press cycles though a coverage option as the softkey name changes (US,
RGNL, or US/RGNL).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
3) To enable/disable the display of NEXRAD information for the continental United States, turn the small FMS
Knob to highlight the NEXRAD On/Off field.
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘On’ to enable the display of NEXRAD for the continental United
States or ‘Off’ to disable.
b) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
273
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
4) To enable/disable the display of Regional NEXRAD information, turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the
Regional On/Off field.
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘On’ to enable the display of Regional NEXRAD or ‘Off’ to disable.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Press the ENT Key.
5) When finished, push the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Continental
USA NEXRAD
Weather Product
Icon and Age
No radar coverage
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
enabled
Figure 6-15 Continental US (CONUS) NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
AFCS
NOTE: When both NEXRAD options are enabled on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page, a combined version
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
is displayed.
274
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enables/disables
regional NEXRAD
data display
Enables/disables
NEXRAD data display for
the continental United
States
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-16 Weather Data Link
(FIS-B) Page Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-17 Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page Setup Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying the FIS-B NEXRAD weather product on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
3) To change the type of NEXRAD displayed, press the MENU Key.
AFCS
4) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group, then press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Data Region field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘CONUS’ (continental United States), ‘RGNL’ (regional), or ‘Combined’,
then press the ENT Key. This selection also affects display of NEXRAD on the PFD Maps.
8) When finished, press the FMS Knob or press the CLR Key.
APPENDICES
Displaying the FIS-B NEXRAD weather product on PFD maps:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey to enable/disable the display of NEXRAD information.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
The regional NEXRAD weather product coverage area varies, as it is determined by the data received from
ground-based sources. When the regional NEXRAD weather product is enabled, a white spiked boundary
encloses this area to indicate the geographic limits of the regional NEXRAD coverage being displayed. The
system shows composite radar data from all available NEXRAD sites inside of this boundary area.
275
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
If the continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product is shown (US Softkey enabled),
the coverage boundary is not shown on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the
information is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed
on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page. For the NEXRAD legend, select the Legend Softkey when the
NEXRAD weather product is enabled.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No radar coverage
Boundary of radar
coverage area
Figure 6-18 NEXRAD Weather Product Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The display of no radar coverage is enabled when NEXRAD is selected for display. Areas where radar data
is not currently available, has not yet been received, or is not being collected are indicated in gray shade of
purple.
NOTE: If the system has not received all available NEXRAD weather data (such as during initial FIS-B signal
AFCS
acquisition or in areas of marginal or poor signal reception), the system may display areas of no radar
coverage which are subsequently removed as radar data is received. It may take up to approximately ten
minutes to receive all FIS-B data, when adequate reception is available.
Reflectivity
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
APPENDICES
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
INDEX
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
276
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• At smaller map ranges, individual blocks of NEXRAD weather data are viewable. For the regional version
of the NEXRAD weather product, the smallest block represents 1.5 nm wide by 1 nm tall. For the
continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product, each block is 7.5 nm wide by 5 nm
wide. The color of each block represents the highest radar reflectivity detected within that area.
• The continental US version of the NEXRAD weather product is not available above 60º of latitude.
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
EIS
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
PRECIPITATION (GARMIN CONNEXT)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Precipitation data cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Precipitation weather product provides radar precipitation information in selected radar coverage areas.
This information comes from individual weather radar sites and weather data sources such as government
agencies. Each radar site or source may provide weather data at differing rates and times. Periodically, the
Garmin Connext Weather service compiles the available information to form a composite image, and assigns
a single time to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the Precipitation weather product.
Individual images--gathered from each radar site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed
Precipitation weather product age.
AFCS
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the Precipitation weather product, the
displayed weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current
radar synopsis and may not depict the current weather conditions. The Precipitation weather product should
never be used as a basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the
information it contains.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
277
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Precipitation
Weather Product
Icon and Age
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Boundary of
weather data
request
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Precipitation
Weather Product
enabled
Figure 6-19 Precipitation Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
Displaying Precipitation weather information:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey (for PFD maps, press the Map/HSI or Map Opt Softkey). This step is not necessary
on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the PRECIP Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The system displays either base or composite radar imagery, depending on the region.
Region
Radar Reflectivity Type
United States
Composite Reflectivity
Canada, Europe, Australia
Base Reflectivity
APPENDICES
The base reflectivity precipitation weather product shows the radar returns from the perspective of a single
antenna tilt angle. The composite reflectivity precipitation weather product shows the highest radar energy
received from multiple antenna tilt angles. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the
intensity of the echoes and the type of precipitation.
INDEX
All weather product legends can be viewed on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page. For the Precipitation
legend, select the Legend Softkey when Precipitation is selected for display.
278
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
No radar coverage
Boundary of
weather data
request
Figure 6-20 Precipitation Weather Product Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The display of radar coverage is enabled active when Precipitation is selected for display. Areas where
precipitation radar coverage is not currently available or is not being collected are indicated in gray shade of
purple. A white boundary line depicting the selected coverage area of the Connext Data Request encloses the
precipitation data when this weather product is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Reflectivity
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the Precipitation
display directly correlate to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous weather
can be very complex.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
AFCS
The different radar echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). Weather
radars measure the reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Precipitation Limitations
Radar images may have certain limitations:
APPENDICES
• Radar composite reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain.
• An individual radar site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about
storms directly over the site.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
• At smaller map ranges, individual blocks of radar data are viewable. Each block of radar information
represents approximately four square kilometers and depicts the highest level of reflectivity detected
within that area.
279
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Block represents
approximately 4 km2
Figure 6-21 Precipitation Weather Product at 10 NM Map Range
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed radar images:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
280
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ECHO TOPS (SIRISUXM)
NOTE: Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time as Cloud Tops or NEXRAD data is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Echo Tops weather product shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest radar echo. The
highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the highest altitude at
which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude for
selected Echo Top
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-22 Echo Tops Weather Product
AFCS
Displaying Echo Tops information:
1) Select the ‘Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the Echo Top Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these weather
products is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data are removed.
APPENDICES
No Radar Coverage
INDEX
Figure 6-23 Echo Tops Legend
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
281
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CLOUD TOPS (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.
NOTE: If a GDL 69/69A SXM receiver is installed, the broadcast rate for Cloud Tops is 30 minutes. As with
all SiriusXM Weather products, the product age becomes amber when it reaches half of the expiration time,
which is 60 minutes for Cloud Tops. Therefore, this weather product age may be amber during routine
operation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Cloud Tops weather product depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite imagery.
AFCS
Figure 6-24 Cloud Tops Weather Product
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the ‘Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page with the FMS Knob.
2) Press the CLD Top Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these weather
products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops data is removed.
Figure 6-25 Cloud Tops Legend
282
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DATA LINK LIGHTNING (SIRIUSXM, GARMIN CONNEXT)
NOTE: Lightning from a data link source cannot be displayed simultaneously on the same map as information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
from an optional on-board lightning detection system.
The Data Link Light weather product shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes.
A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact location of the
lightning strike is not displayed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Lightning
Strikes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-26 Data Link Weather Product
AFCS
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on Weather Data Link Page:
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the XM LTNG or DL LTNG Softkey (softkey name depends on the selected weather source).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link Page, select the Legend Softkey when Data Link
Lightning is selected for display.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-27 Data Link Lightning Legend
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the XM LTNG or DL LTNG Softkey.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
283
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling Data Link Lightning information on PFD maps:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Lightning Softkey.
3) Press the Datalink Softkey to enable data link lightning from the selected data link weather source, or press
the LTNG Off Softkey to disable data link lightning.
4) When finished, press the Back Softkey.
CELL MOVEMENT (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Cell Movement weather product shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified by the
ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement indicated with
short, orange arrows.
Storm Cells
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Additional
information for
selected Storm Cell
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-28 Cell Movement Weather Product
On the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, the Cell Movement weather product has a dedicated CEL MOV
softkey for enabling/disabling this weather product on this page.
APPENDICES
NOTE: The Storm Cell base height is not available if a GDL 69 SXM or 69A SXM data link receiver is installed.
INDEX
In this case, the Storm Cell base height is displayed as 0 feet when the map pointer selects a storm cell.
284
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying Cell Movement information on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the ‘Map -Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page using the FMS Knob.
2) Press the Cell MOV Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-29 Cell Movement Legend
EIS
For navigation maps, the pilot can enable/disable the Cell Movement weather product using the NEXRAD
Softkey. For this to occur, the pilot must first enable the ‘Cell Movement’ option in the Map Settings menu
of the Navigation Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting up the system to display Cell Movement with NEXRAD on navigation maps:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for the Cell Movement menu option. When set to ‘On’, Cell Movement
is enabled/disabled with the NEXRAD weather product on navigation maps. When set to ‘Off’, Cell Movement
is not displayed on navigation maps.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) When finished, push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to remove the menu.
After the ‘Cell Movement’ option is set to ‘On’, refer to the previous procedures for enabling/disabling the
NEXRAD weather product to control both products simultaneously on navigation maps using the NEXRAD
Softkey.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
285
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
INFRARED SATELLITE (GARMIN CONNEXT)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Infrared Satellite (IR SAT) weather product depicts cloud top temperatures from satellite imagery.
Brighter cloud top colors indicate cooler temperatures occurring at higher altitudes.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-30 Infrared Satellite Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
Displaying Intrared Satellite information:
1) Select the ‘Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) Select the IR SAT Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-31 Infrared Satellite Legend
286
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SIGMET (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMET (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition
occurring at a localized geographical position.
NOTE: If SiriusXM Weather is the active data link weather source and a GDL 69/69A SXM receiver installed,
the SIGMET and AIRMET weather products are not available unless at least one SIGMET or AIRMET has
been received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’ when no SIGMET or AIRMET is available.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIRMET for
Turbulence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIRMET for IFR
conditions
AIRMET for
Icing conditions
SIGMET
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-32 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
4) Press the ENT key. The following figure shows sample SIGMET text.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
287
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
Sample SIGMET Text
SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Figure 6-33 SIGMET/AIRMET Text and Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the report.
METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
Additional Information on Weather
Feature Selected
with Map Pointer
INDEX
APPENDICES
METAR flag
selected with Map
Pointer
Figure 6-34 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link Page
288
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports within a 24- hour period,
and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs typically include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena, and sky
conditions using METAR codes.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information not
found in the decoded version. TAF information is displayed only in its original form when TAFs are available.
Displaying METAR and TAF text on the MFD:
1) On the Weather Data Link Page, press the METAR Softkey.
EIS
2) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link Page.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
APPENDICES
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
INDEX
Figure 6-35 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
289
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, select the Legend Softkey when
METARs are enabled for display.
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. The system displays a gray
METAR flag when the system cannot determine the METAR category based on the information available.
EIS
Figure 6-36 METAR Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system also shows METAR flags and their associated text on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MF.D.
The system shows a METAR flag next to waypoints in the flight plan with an available METAR.
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight a waypoint with an available METAR (indicated with a METAR flag next
to it). The METAR text will appear in the ‘Selected Waypoint Weather’ Window below.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
Original METAR text is also accessible on navigation maps displaying METAR flags. When the map pointer
is panned over a METAR flag, the METAR text is shown in a box near the flag.
Displaying original METAR text information on the PFD Inset Map:
AFCS
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the METAR Softkey.
3) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired METAR flag. Original METAR text appears on the map.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) When finished, press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer.
290
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST (SIRIUSXM)
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather conditions.
Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-37 Current Surface Analysis Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
AFCS
3) Press the SFC Softkey.
4) Press the softkey for the desired forecast time: Current, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The SFC Softkey
label changes to show the forecast time selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
Press the Off Softkey to disable the display of the weather product.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
291
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-38 Surface Analysis Legend
FREEZING LEVEL (SIRIUSXM)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Freezing Level weather product shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at
which the first isotherm is found. When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that altitude
has not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New data appears when it
becomes available.
Figure 6-39 Freezing Level Data
Displaying Freezing Level information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
INDEX
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
3) Press the FRZ LVL Softkey.
292
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-40 Freezing Levels Legend
EIS
WINDS ALOFT
The Winds Aloft weather product shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected
altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3000-foot increments beginning at the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the FIS-B option is installed and FIS-B is the active data link weather source, the Winds Aloft weather
product also displays temperatures aloft next to the winds aloft arrows on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
Displaying the Winds Aloft weather product:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page with the FMS Knob.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
3) Press the Wind Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Select the Next or Prev Softkey
to cycle through the altitude softkeys. The Wind Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
Figure 6-41 Winds Aloft Data at 12,000 Feet
293
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-42 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Vertical Situation Display (VSD) on the
Navigation Map Page. The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not
to aircraft speed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Track Mode
Boundary of VSD
Winds Aloft Data Age
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
AFCS
Altitude Scale
Figure 6-43 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Data on Profile View
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in Table 6-4.
Headwind Symbol
Tailwind Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
5 knots
10 knots
INDEX
50 knots
Table 6-5 VSD Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
294
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Enabling/disabling the Vertical Situation Display (containing winds aloft data):
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
4) Press the VSD Softkey to enable/disable the Vertical Situation Display.
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
EIS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show VSD’ or ‘Hide VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Winds Aloft data inside the VSD is enabled by default when the VSD is displayed on the Navigation Map
Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display for the VSD:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Winds on/off field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page with the changed settings.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
295
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
COUNTY WARNINGS (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The County warning weather product provides specific public awareness and protection weather warnings
from the National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on tornadoes, severe thunderstorms,
and flood conditions.
EIS
Flood
Warnings
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Thunderstorm
Warning
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Additional
Information
on Flood
Warning
Selected
with Map
Pointer
Figure 6-44 County Flood Warning
AFCS
Displaying County Warning information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page with the FMS Knob.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the County Softkey.
INDEX
Figure 6-45 County Warnings Legend
296
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CYCLONE (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cyclone weather product shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes), tropical storms,
and their projected tracks. The system displays the projected track information in the form of
DD/HH:MM.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Cyclone
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-46 Cyclone Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page with the FMS Knob.
AFCS
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
3) Press the Cyclone Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-47 Cyclone Legend
APPENDICES
NOTE: The Cyclone weather product is not available unless at least one cyclone or tropical storm has been
received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’ when no cyclone or tropical storm has been received.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
297
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ICING (CIP & SLD) (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Current Icing Product (CIP) weather product shows a graphical view of the current icing environment.
Icing severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft
type). The CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current conditions at the time of the
analysis.
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
EIS
Displaying Icing data:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
3) Press the ICNG Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Press the Next or PREV Softkey to
cycle through the altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label changes to indicate the altitude selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Light Icing Potential
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-48 Icing Data at 18,000 Feet
Figure 6-49 Icing Potential Legend
298
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TURBULENCE (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Turbulence weather product identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude air mass
associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between 21,000
and 45,000 feet. Turbulence information is intended to supplement AIRMETs, SIGMETs, and PIREPs.
Displaying Turbulence data:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
3) Press the TURB Softkey.
EIS
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the Next or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes to indicate the altitude selection.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-50 Turbulence Weather Product at 21,000 Feet
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-51 Turbulence Legend
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
299
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PIREPS AND AIREPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) are in-flight weather observations collected from pilots. When significant
weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs.
A PIREP may contain adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear,
and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
NOTE: AIREPs are only available with the SiriusXM Weather service.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Another type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). Commercial airlines typically generate AIREPs.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIREP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Urgent PIREP
PIREP selected with
Map Pointer
AFCS
Figure 6-52 PIREPs and AIREPS on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the PIREPS or AIREPS Softkey. (Note the AIREPS Softkey is only available with the SiriusXM Weather
service.)
APPENDICES
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather report
when it is selected.
5) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text. The data is first displayed
in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information
not present in the decoded version.
INDEX
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
300
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Decoded PIREP Text
EIS
Original PIREP
Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-53 PIREP Text on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
AFCS
Figure 6-54 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
301
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TFRS
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
NOTE: Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) data from Garmin Connext is only available in the United States (not
including any U.S. territories.) Refer to http://sites.garmin.com/connext for product coverage information.
EIS
In the United States, the FAA issues Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) to designate areas where flight is
restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including national security, law enforcement,
natural disasters, and large sporting events. TFRs may be issued at any time, and TFR data displayed on the
system is only intended to supplement official TFR information obtained from Flight Service Stations (FSS),
and air traffic control.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The age of TFR data is not shown; however, if TFR data is not available or has expired, the system displays
‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left corner of maps on which TFRs can be displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Information for
selected TFR
Figure 6-55 TFR Data on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
APPENDICES
Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page or the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Joystick and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system displays TFR summary
information above the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
INDEX
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
TFR Information window.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the TFR Information window.
302
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-56 Full Text for Selected TFR
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data is
decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the
TFR product data is removed from the map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be displayed:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aviation’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product range setting.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (Off, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
303
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FIS-B WEATHER STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Additional information about the status of FIS-B weather products is available on the Aux - ADS-B Status
Page.
Viewing FIS-B status:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page.
EIS
On the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) page, the pilot can enable/disable the FIS-B weather feature, which includes
all FIS-B weather products and related softkeys on various maps.
Enabling/disabling the FIS-B weather feature:
1) Select the ‘Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Enable FIS-B Weather’ or ‘Disable FIS-B Weather’, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-57 Viewing FIS-B Weather Status on the ADS-B Status Page
304
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ABNORMAL OPERATIONS FOR GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER
If the system cannot complete a Connext Data Request, one or more messages will appear in the Request
Status Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Description
The system has disabled automatic weather data requests due to excessive errors. Automatic
weather data requests have stopped. Send a manual weather data request to resume automatic
updates.
The system will attempt another automatic weather data request after an error occurred during the
previous request. Timer counts down until the next automatic request occurs.
A general error has occurred. If the error persists, the system should be serviced.
A communications error has occurred with the GIA. The system should be serviced.
A general error has occurred. If the error persists, the system should be serviced.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Weather Request
Status Message
Auto requests inhibited
Send manual request to
reset.
Auto update retry: ##
Seconds
Connext Comm Error [1]
Connext Comm Error [2]
Connext Comm Error [3]
Connext Comm Error [4] This occurs if multiple automatic weather data requests have recently failed, or the GIA is off-line.
Connext Login Invalid
There is a problem with the Garmin Connext registration. Contact Garmin at 1-866-739-5687
in the United States or 913-397-8200, wait for the operator, and request Extension 1135 for
assistance.
The Garmin Connext Weather data server is temporarily out of service, but is expected to return to
service in less than 30 minutes.
The Garmin Connext Weather data server will be out of service for at least 30 minutes.
Connext Server Temp
Inop
Connext Server Inop
No Connext
Subscription
INDEX
Request Canceled
Request Failed - Try
Again
APPENDICES
Reduce Request Area
The weather data request coverage area does not contain at least one of the following: a
waypoint, a flight plan, or a flight plan destination. Verify at least one of the coverage options is
enabled (checked) and contains required criteria, then re-send the data request.
The system is not be currently subscribed to Garmin Connext services or the access code is incorrect.
Verify the access code. Contact Garmin at 1-866-739-5687 in the United States or 913-397-8200,
wait for the operator, and request Extension 1135 for assistance.
The size of the received weather data has exceeded system memory limits. Reduce the size of the
coverage area and issue another Connext Data Request to ensure all available weather data has
been received.
The user has cancelled a Connext Data Request.
The weather data request timed-out. Re-send data request.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Invalid Coverage Area
AFCS
A communications error has occurred. It this error persists, the system should be serviced.
A weather data transfer has timed out. Check Iridium signal strength and re-send the data request.
A server error has occurred or invalid data received.
An error occurred while reading or writing data. If the error persists, the system should be serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Connext Comm Error [6]
Connext Comm Error [7]
Connext Comm Error [8]
Connext Comm Error [9]
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Connext Comm Error [5] This can occur if the Iridium or Garmin Connext services are not accessible. Check Iridium signal
strength. If this error persists, the system should be serviced.
Table 6-6 Abnormal Garmin Connext Data Request Status Messages
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
305
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
When the system is operating in Reversionary Mode, only those weather products which can be displayed
on the PFD maps will be available for display (see Table 6-4 for a list of weather products and their associated
map availability).
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If manual Connext Data Requests were enabled prior to entering Reversionary Mode, no new weather data
will be retrieved while operating in Reversionary Mode. If automatic Connext Data Requests were enabled
prior to Reversionary Mode operation, the system will continue the automatic data requests in Reversionary
Mode (provided automatic requests have not been inhibited due to a system error).
306
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.2 STORMSCOPE LIGHTNING DETECTION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely on information from the lightning detection system display as the sole basis for
hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate
or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
NOTE: Stormscope lightning information cannot be displayed simultaneously on the same map as lightning
EIS
information from data link lightning sources.
Lightning Age
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system can display L-3 WX-500 Stormscope lightning detection system information on the Stormscope
Page, and as an overlay on navigation maps. The system uses the symbols shown in the following table to depict
lightning strikes and cells based on the age of the information.
Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Strike is less than 6 seconds old
Strike is between 6 and 60 seconds old
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Strike is between 1 and 2 minutes old
Strike is between 2 and 3 minutes old
Table 6-7 Lightning Age and Symbols
AFCS
USING THE STORMSCOPE PAGE
On the Stormscope Page, lightning information can be displayed at the ranges of 25 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm,
and 200 nm.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Page.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the Joystick clockwise to increase the map range or counter-clockwise to decrease the map range.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
307
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Stormscope Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Lightning Strike
Rate Per Minute
Figure 6-58 Stormscope Page with Cell Mode Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode:
1) Select the ‘Map - Stormscope’ Page.
2) Press the Mode Softkey. The Cell and Strike softkeys are displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the Cell Softkey to display ‘CELL’ data or select the Strike Softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box in the upper right corner of the Stormscope Page.
4) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top level softkeys for the Stormscope Page.
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map - Stormscope’ Page.
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Stormscope Page Menu. Either ‘Cell Mode’ or ‘Strike Mode’ is highlighted
in cyan to indicate the mode to be selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the ENT Key to select the highlighted mode and remove the menu. To remove the menu without changing
modes, press the MENU Key or the CLR Key, or push the FMS Knob.
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn . This
is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose of the aircraft.
Clearing Stormscope lightning on any map clears this information from all displays on the system.
APPENDICES
Manually clearing Stormscope cell or strike information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Stormscope’ Page.
2) Press the Clear Softkey.
Or:
INDEX
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Lightning Data’, then press the ENT Key.
Or:
308
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Stormscope® Lightning’, then press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying Stormscope information on MFD navigation maps:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the STRMSCP Softkey.
Displaying Stormscope information on PFD maps:
EIS
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Lightning Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the STRMSCP Softkey.
SETTING UP STORMSCOPE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Setting up Stormscope options on the Navigation Map:
1) On the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Settings’ selected, press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Weather’,
and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections.
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
6) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
The following options are available:
• Stormscope On/Off field – Enables/disables the display of Stormscope lightning symbols.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Stormscope maximum display range – Selects the maximum map range to display Stormscope symbols.
Stormscope data is removed when a map range greater than the STRMSCP SMBL value is selected.
• Stormscope Mode – Selects the Cell or Strike mode of lightning activity. Cell mode identifies clusters or
cells of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
APPENDICES
CELL AND STRIKE MODE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
On the Navigation Map, cell mode identifies cells of lightning activity. Stormscope identifies clusters of
electrical activity that indicate cells. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
Selecting the ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode on the Navigation Map:
INDEX
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Settings’ selected, press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ group and press the ENT Key.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
309
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Mode field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6) Press the FMS knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
EIS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to change between ‘Cell’ and ‘Strike’ options. When the desired item is selected, press
the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Stormscope Mode
Lightning Strike
Rate Per Minute
Stormscope Navigation Map
Overlay Enabled Icon
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-59 Navigation Map Page with Stormscope Lightning Data
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn. This
is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose of the aircraft.
Manually clearing Stormscope data on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Stormscope® Lightning’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting a Stormscope range on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the select the ‘Weather’ group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Stormscope maximum map display range distance.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope maximum map display range distance.
6) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
To change the display range on the Navigation Map Page, turn the Joystick clockwise to increase the map
range or counter-clockwise to decrease the map range.
310
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.3 TERRAIN DISPLAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use terrain avoidance displays as the sole source of information for maintaining separation
from terrain and obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data from third party sources and cannot
independently verify the accuracy of the information.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
area.
EIS
NOTE: Terrain and obstacle alerting is not available north of 89º North latitude and south of 89º South
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
latitude. This is due to limitations present within the Terrain database and the system’s ability to process
the data representing the affected areas.
NOTE: Terrain and obstacle alerting requires the Terrain-SVT option included with Garmin SVT. No terrain or
obstacle alerting occurs for the Terrain Proximity feature.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The terrain system increases situational awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT) and
obstacles.
One of the following terrain systems is installed on this aircraft:
• Terrain Proximity
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Terrain-SVT (included with the Garmin SVT option) is not installed; refer to the Flight Instruments section for
more information about Garmin SVT.)
AFCS
The installed terrain system provides color indications on map displays when terrain or obstacles are within a
certain altitude threshold from the aircraft. Terrain-SVT furthermore provides advisory visual annunciations and
voice alerts to indicate the presence of threatening terrain or obstacles relevant to the projected flight path. This
alerting capability is not present in the Terrain Proximity feature. The terrain system requires the following for
proper operation:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Valid terrain and obstacle databases
APPENDICES
The terrain system uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. Terrain information
is based on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may
be shown if available in the database. Garmin verifies the data to confirm accuracy of the content. However, the
displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data may still contain inaccuracies.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
The terrain system uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and
altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above
geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea level (MSL) calculated geometrically. The system
uses GSL altitude to determine alerts for the Terrain-SVT system. GSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite
geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude
sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL
altitude source. Therefore, GSL altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate
terrain and obstacle alerts.
311
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The terrain and obstacle databases used by the terrain system are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position
and GSL altitude, terrain system displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the
position and altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, for the Terrain-SVT, the system uses the GPS position and GSL
altitude to calculate and “predict” the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In
this manner, the Terrain-SVT can provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.
EIS
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions
seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read
from the altimeter) to differ from the GSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s GSL altitude differing
from the baro-corrected altitude.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
RELATIVE TERRAIN SYMBOLOGY
The terrain system uses colors and symbols to represent terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than 200
feet above ground level, AGL) present in the databases relative to aircraft altitude. The system dynamically
adjusts these colors as the aircraft altitude changes, and after takeoff and landing.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
While the aircraft is on the ground, the system displays relative terrain 400 feet or more above the aircraft
altitude using red, and terrain at less than 400 feet above aircraft altitude using black, as shown on the OnGround Legend. When the aircraft is in the air, the system displays relative terrain information using red,
yellow, green, and black, as shown on the In-Air Legend. As the aircraft transitions from on-ground to in-air, or
from in-air to on-ground, the display of relative terrain momentarily fades into the corresponding colors. For
Terrain-SVT system, if an alert occurs, the relative terrain colors transition to the In-Air Legend if in the OnGround Legend was shown in order to provide the flight crew with the most information possible.
On-Ground Legend
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
In-Air Legend
APPENDICES
Figure 6-60 Relative Terrain Legend
INDEX
The following figure shows the relative terrain coloring for the Terrain Proximity system.
312
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Terrain above or within 100 feet
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow
Terrain is between 100 feet and
1000 feet below aircraft altitude
Lighted Obstacle
2000 ft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
100 ft Threshold
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and
2000 feet below aircraft altitude
EIS
Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet
below aircraft altitude
Figure 6-61 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following figure shows relative terrain coloring for the Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B systems.
Projected Flight Path
Red
Terrain above or within 100 feet
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow
Terrain is between 100 feet and
1000 feet below aircraft altitude
Lighted Obstacle
2000 ft
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
100 ft Threshold
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and
2000 feet below aircraft altitude
Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet
below aircraft altitude
AFCS
Figure 6-62 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for the Terrain-SVT System
The following tables show the relative obstacle coloring used by the terrain systems.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft
altitude
APPENDICES
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
INDEX
Table 6-8 Relative Obstacle Symbols and Colors
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
313
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Unlighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
Lighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
Wind Turbine Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft
altitude
EIS
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
Table 6-9 Wind Turbine Obstacles and Colors
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Terrain-SVT system shows potential impacts areas for terrain and obstacles using yellow and red as
shown in the following table.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Potential Impact
Area Examples
Alert Type
Example Annunciation
Warning
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
or
Caution
or
AFCS
Table 6-10 Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B Potential Impact Area with Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Map - Terrain Proximity or Terrain-SVT Page is the principal map page for viewing terrain information.
Terrain and obstacle information can be displayed on the following maps and pages:
• PFD Maps
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Page
• Terrain Proximity/Terrain-SVT Page
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (MFD maps other than the terrain page):
APPENDICES
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the Map/HSI Softkey).
2) Press the TER Softkey to cycle through a terrain option with each press. The selected mode is displayed in cyan:
Off, Topo, REL. Press the TER Softkey as needed until ‘REL’ is displayed on the softkey.
Displaying relative terrain information on PFD Inset Map or HSI Map
INDEX
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Rel Ter Softkey.
314
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When relative terrain is selected on maps other than the terrain page, an icon to indicate the feature is enabled
for display and a legend for the relative terrain colors are shown.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map.
Terrain information can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles recognized
by Terrain Proximity as yellow or red are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within
the setting limit.
EIS
Maps besides the Terrain Proximity Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the
Navigation Map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
)
Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Terrain Display – Turns the display of relative (‘REL’) terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which
terrain is shown
• Obstacle Data – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are
shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
AFCS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Additional information about obstacles can be displayed by panning over the display on the map. The map
panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the Joystick. If the
map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
315
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red Lighted
Obstacles
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Lighted Obstacle
Selected with Map
Pointer
EIS
Additional
Information on
Obstacle Selected
with Map Pointer
Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Display
Enabled Icon
Red Terrain Area
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-63 Terrain Information on the Navigation Map Page
TERRAIN PAGE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The ‘Map - Terrain Proximity’, or ‘Map - Terrain-SVT’ Page is specialized to show terrain, and obstacle in
relation to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. This page is the principal page for
viewing terrain information. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be enabled for reference.
For Terrain-SVT system only, this page also shows potential impact areas. If an obstacle and the projected
flight path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically adjusts to a map range if necessary to emphasize
the display of the potential impact area.
AFCS
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading, in which case the
orientation is track up. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map
range rings (or arcs).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying the terrain page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Terrain Proximity Page/Terrain-SVT’ Page.
APPENDICES
Showing/hiding aviation information on the terrain page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
316
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
Map Orientation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
EIS
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Lighted Obstacles
(Between 100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft Altitude)
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-64 Terrain Proximity Page
TERRAIN-SVT ALERTING DISPLAYS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within Terrain-SVT software algorithms.
Terrain alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert is
issued, visual annunciations are displayed and voice alerts are simultaneously issued.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The terrain alert annunciation appears
to the left of the Selected Altitude box on the PFD, and bottom left on the MFD on the Terrain-SVT Page. If the
terrain page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
AFCS
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the Terrain-SVT Page)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
317
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Pop-up
Alert
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-65 Terrain-SVT Alert Annunciations
AFCS
Potential Impact
Area
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-66 Navigation Map Page
(After Terrain-SVT Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
318
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following table lists the possible Terrain-SVT alerts.
MFD
Pop-Up Alert (except
Terrain-SVT Page)
Voice Alert
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
EIS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
* Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-11 Terrain-SVT Alerts Summary
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of Terrain-SVT compares the projected flight path as
derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and obstacle databases. The system
issues FLTA alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or obstacles.
AFCS
The projected flight path is a calculated area ahead of, to the sides, and below the aircraft. The size of the
projected flight path varies based on factors including ground speed (the path ahead is larger when the ground
speed is higher), whether the aircraft is level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to the nearest runway
along the current track. As the aircraft approaches the runway, the projected flight path becomes narrower until
the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually inhibits them.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There are two types of FLTA alerts, Reduced Required Terrain/Obstacle Clearance (RTC or ROC respectively)
and Imminent Terrain/Obstacle Impact (ITI or IOI respectively).
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
319
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level (FT)
Descending (FT)
800
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Required
Clearance
(FT)
Required Terrain
Clearance (FT)
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
5
10
15
20
Distance From Runway (NM)
25
30
Figure 6-67 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system automatically disables FLTA alerts when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination
runway elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
When Terrain-SVT FLTA alerts are manually inhibited, the annunciation is shown on the PFD and in the MFD
for maps displaying relative terrain
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain-SVT System
Figure 6-68 FLTA Alerting is Inhibited when Annunciation is displayed
AFCS
SYSTEM STATUS
TERRAIN-SVT
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
During power-up, Terrain-SVT conducts a self-test of its visual annunciations and voice alerts. An voice alert
is issued at test completion.
Terrain-SVT continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the system issues the voice alert “Terrain System
Failure” along with the ‘TER FAIL’ alert annunciation.
INDEX
Terrain-SVT requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should
the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TER N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the Terrain-SVT Page. The voice alert “Terrain
System Not Available” is generated. When sufficient GPS signal is returns and the aircraft is within the
database coverage area, the voice alert “Terrain System Available” is generated.
320
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Test in Progress
None
Terrain Alerting Inhibited
No GPS position
None
None
“Terrain System Test OK”
None
None
NO GPS POSITION
“Terrain System Not Available”*
None
“Terrain System Not Available”*
TERRAIN FAIL
“Terrain System Failure”
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
EIS
None
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or Out of database coverage area
Terrain System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, and
Terrain-SVT operating with PFD
Terrain or Obstacle databases
Voice Alert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System Test Pass
Terrain-SVT Page Center
Banner Annunciation
TERRAIN TEST
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD/MFD† Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
† Annunciation is shown on Terrain-SVT Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “Terrain System Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered.
Table 6-12 Terrain-SVT System Status Annunciations
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
321
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.4 TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of a TIS-capable terminal radar
EIS
site. Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS), Traffic
Alert and Collision Avoidance Systems (TCAS) and TIS. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are
shown without altitude separation data or climb descent indication.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Mode S TIS is disabled if another traffic system such as TAS or Automatic Dependent Surveillance-
Broadcast (ADS-B) is installed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TIS uses
the Mode S transponder for the traffic data link. TIS receives traffic information from ground stations, and is
updated every five seconds. The system displays up to eight traffic symbols within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3000
feet below to 3500 feet above the requesting aircraft. The system displays TIS traffic with the symbology shown
in the following table.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TIS Symbol
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
Traffic Advisory (TA)
AFCS
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-13 TIS Traffic Symbols
Traffic Advisories (TA) alert the crew to intruding aircraft. When traffic meets the advisory criteria for the TA,
a solid amber circle symbol appears. A TA which is detected but is outside the range of the map on which traffic
is displayed are indicated with a message in the lower left corner of the map.
APPENDICES
TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic is moving, to the nearest 45°. Traffic
information for which TIS is unable to determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page or in a banner at the lower left corner of maps other than the Traffic Map Page on which traffic
can be displayed.
INDEX
The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder aircraft is displayed above/below the
traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the altitude separation
appears above the traffic symbol; if below, the altitude separation appears below. Altitude trend is displayed as
an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction) to the right of the target symbol. Traffic
symbols for aircraft without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or climb/descent
information.
322
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
• PFD Maps
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information
can also be displayed on the following other maps for additional reference on the MFD when the traffic TIS is
operating:
EIS
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Terrain-SVT option is installed and enabled.
See the Additional Features Section for details.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Enabling/disabling traffic overlays (MFD navigation maps):
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the Traffic Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the navigation map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When traffic is selected on maps other than the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, an icon is shown to indicate the
feature is enabled for display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Advisory,
500’ Below,
Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic, Not
Reporting
Altitude
AFCS
TA Off Scale
Banner
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic System
Status Banner
Annunciations
Figure 6-69 TIS Traffic on Navigation Map Page
APPENDICES
The ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/
disabling display of traffic. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which traffic data
(symbols and labels) are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is
selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use settings based on those
selected for the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
323
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling traffic information on the PFD Inset Map or HSI Map:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Traffic Softkey to enable/disable the display traffic information on the Inset Map or HSI Map.
Customizing traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Traffic’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Traffic – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Traffic Mode – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA Only - Displays Traffic Alerts only
• Traffic Symbols – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• Traffic Labels – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown (with the option to turn off)
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
AFCS
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page is specialized to show surrounding TIS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s
current position and altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aircraft orientation on this map is always
heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from 2 to 12 nm, as
indicated by the map range rings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page. When the aircraft is
on the ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby
to Operating Mode and the system begins to display traffic information. Refer to the System Status discussion
for more information.
APPENDICES
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
3) Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode:
INDEX
a) Press the TIS OPER Softkey to begin displaying traffic.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ (shown if TIS is in Standby Mode) and press the ENT Key.
324
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Traffic Mode Annunciation
“Non-Bearing” Traffic
(System Unable to
Determine Bearing)
Distance is 4.0 nm,
1100’ Above,
Descending
Range
Marking
Rings
EIS
Traffic Advisory, 500’
Below, Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic, 1200’
Above,
Descending
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
“TIS Not Available”
Voice Alert Status
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Off-Scale Traffic
Advisory
400’ Below, Level
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Select
to Mute
“TIS Not
Available”
Voice Alert
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciations
Figure 6-70 Traffic Map Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TIS ALERTS
When the number of TAs on the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page increases from one scan to the next, the following
occur:
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
AFCS
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ Annunciation appears to the right of the airspeed tape, flashes for five seconds, and remains
displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
• The PFD Inset Map or HSI Map is automatically displayed with traffic.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft, the “Traffic” voice alert is generated only
when the number of TAs increases. For example, when the first TA is displayed, a voice and visual annunciation
are generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display, no additional voice alerts are generated. If a second
TA appears on the display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases, another
voice alert is generated.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
325
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-71 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
A “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert is generated when the TIS service becomes unavailable or is out of
range. TIS may be unavailable in the radar coverage area due to the following:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIS-capable Mode S radar site.
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and out of range of an adjacent site.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the coverage extends from about 3000
feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all
directions.
• Traffic does not have an operating transponder.
AFCS
The “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert can be manually muted to reduce nuisance alerting. TNA muting
status is shown in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Muting the “TIS Not Available” voice alert:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the TNA Mute Softkey. The status is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
b) Select ‘‘’Not Available” Mute On’ (shown if TNA muting is currently off) and press the ENT Key.
326
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby
Mode (on the ground) or Operating Mode (in the air). If TIS fails the power up test, an annunciation is shown
in the center of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
FAILED
EIS
Traffic Map Page Center
Description
Banner Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the transponder*
Data is being received from the transponder, but
DATA FAILED
a failure is detected in the data stream*
The transponder has failed*
TIS is unavailable or out of range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
UNAVAILABLE
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
Table 6-14 TIS Failure Annunciations
Traffic Map Center
Traffic Overlay Status
Banner Annunciation Icon (Navigation Maps)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Map Mode
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. If traffic is selected for display on another map while Standby
Mode is selected, the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out (also the case whenever TIS has failed). Once
the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic information is displayed. The mode can be
changed manually using softkeys or the page menu.
Description
TRFC FAIL
OPERATING
None
OPERATING
UNAVAILABLE
STANDBY
STANDBY
TIS is in Standby Mode.
UNIT FAILED
TRFC FAIL
The transponder has failed*
APPENDICES
NO DATA
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TRFC FAIL
AFCS
Data is being received from the transponder,
but a failure is detected in the data stream*
Data is not being received from the
transponder*
TIS is operating and is receiving traffic data
from a data link.
TIS is operating, but the traffic service is
currently unavailable or is out of reception
range.
DATA FAILED
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
Table 6-15 TIS Modes and Status Annunciations
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
327
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Switching between TIS modes:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Standby or Operate Softkey to switch between modes. The mode is displayed in the upper right
corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ or ‘Standby Mode’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
EIS
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed, as shown in the following table.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TA OFF SCALE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TA X.X ± XX ↕
AGE MM:SS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRFC COAST
TRFC RMVD
AFCS
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
TRFC UNAVAIL
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending)
Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds
If after another 6 seconds data is not received, traffic is removed from the display
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age increases
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last message)
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this message is displayed
Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60 seconds since last message)
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is not displayed
Traffic data has failed
Traffic has not been detected
The traffic service is unavailable or out of range
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 6-16 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations
328
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.5 AVIDYNE TAS600 TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the display.
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of traffic system limitations. Traffic systems require transponders of other
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
aircraft to respond to system interrogations. If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due
to phenomena such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may be displayed
intermittently, or not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude
separation data or climb descent indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Mode-S TIS is disabled when another traffic system is installed.
NOTE: Refer to the Avidyne TAS600 Series Pilot’s Guide for a detailed discussion of the Avidyne TAS600
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
System.
The optional Avidyne TAS600 is a Traffic Advisory System (TAS). It enhances flight crew situational awareness
by displaying traffic information for transponder-equipped aircraft. The system also provides visual annunciations
and voice alerts to help the pilot visually acquire traffic.
No TAS surveillance is provided for aircraft without operating transponders.
AFCS
TAS THEORY OF OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the traffic system is in Operating Mode, the system directly interrogates the transponders of other
aircraft in the vicinity. The traffic system uses this information to derive the distance, relative bearing, and if
reported, the altitude and vertical trend for each aircraft within its surveillance range. The traffic system then
calculates a closure rate to each intruder based on the projected Closest Point of Approach (CPA). If the closure
rate meets the threat criteria for a Traffic Advisory (TA), the traffic system provides visual annunciations and
voice alerts.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
329
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAS SYMBOLOGY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a Avidyne TAS600 is installed with a Garmin GTX 335 or GTX 345 transponder, the system uses the
following symbols to represent traffic.
TAS Symbol
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
EIS
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Traffic Advisory (TA)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-17 TAS Symbol Description
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Symbol
Description
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range with directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range without directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper
bearing.
AFCS
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
Other Non-Threat traffic with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
APPENDICES
Other Non-Threat traffic without directional information.
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own
aircraft is on the ground.
INDEX
Non-aircraft ground traffic with ADS-B directional information. Pointed end indicates direction of travel. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic without ADS-B directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface
(SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Table 6-25 ADS-B Traffic Symbology with GTX 345 R
330
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as a solid amber circle or circle enclosing an arrow, alerts the crew to a
potentially hazardous intruding aircraft, if the closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria.
A TA that is beyond the selected display range (off scale) is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the
screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Proximity Advisory (PA), displayed as a solid white diamond or arrow, indicates the intruding aircraft is
within ±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range, but is still not considered a TA threat.
Other, non-threat traffic, shown as an open white diamond or arrow, is displayed for traffic beyond six
nautical miles that is neither a TA or PA.
EIS
Relative altitude, when available, is displayed above or below the corresponding intruder symbol in
hundreds of feet. When this altitude is above own aircraft, it is preceded by a ‘+’ symbol; a minus sign ‘-’
indicates traffic is below own aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system displays the altitude vertical trend as an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in
either direction) to the right of the intruder symbol.
Relative Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vertical trend arrow
Figure 6-72 Intruder Altitude and Vertical Trend Arrow
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAS ALERTS
NOTE: If an optional Avidyne TAS600 is installed, refer to the Pilot’s Guide from the manufacturer for
information about voice alerts for that traffic system.
AFCS
When the Avidyne TAS600 detects a new TA, the following occur:
Relative Altitude
Approximate Distance (nm)
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
APPENDICES
Bearing
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The system issues a single “Traffic!” voice alert, followed by additional voice information about the bearing,
relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA. For example, the
announcement “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own aircraft,
above own altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
Table 6-18 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
INDEX
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashes for five seconds, and
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
• A PFD map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
331
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, a yellow text banner will be displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA symbol. The text will indicate
“TA” followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if known.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer present.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Appears
when TA is
Detected
Figure 6-73 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM TEST
NOTE: If an optional Avidyne TAS600 is installed, refer to the applicable Pilot’s Guide from the manufacturer
for information about applicable voice alerts for the system test.
AFCS
The traffic system provides a system test mode to verify the TAS is operating normally. The test takes about
ten seconds to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic symbols appears on the ‘Map
- Traffic Map’ Page. When the system test is complete, the traffic system enters Standby Mode.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Testing the traffic system:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
3) Turn the Joystick to set the range to 2/6 nm to allow for full test pattern to be displayed during test.
APPENDICES
4) Press the Standby or TAS STBY Softkey.
5) Press the Test Softkey.
Or:
1) With the Traffic system in Standby mode, press the MENU Key.
INDEX
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Test Mode’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
332
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAS Test Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-74 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
OPERATION
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Refer to the Avidyne TAS600 Series Pilot’s Guide for a detailed discussion of the Avidyne TAS600
system operation.
When the avionics system initially receives power on the ground, the traffic system is in Standby Mode. The
system must be in Operating Mode for traffic to be displayed and for TAs to be issued.
AFCS
Changing traffic system modes on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the Operate or TAS OPER Softkey to begin displaying traffic. ‘OPERATING’ is displayed in the Traffic
mode field.
4) Press the Standby or TAS STBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. ‘STANDBY’ is displayed in
the Traffic mode field.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) With the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2)
Turn the small FMS knob to highlight the desired mode.
3) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
333
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position
and altitude, without basemap clutter. It is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Aircraft
orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. The pilot can adjust the map range with
the Joystick. A range indication appears on each range ring.
The system annunciates the traffic mode and altitude display mode in the upper right corner of the ‘Map Traffic Map’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
TAS Operating Mode
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Other Non-Threat
Traffic, 1000 above,
climbing
Traffic Advisory,
200’ above,
climbing
No-bearing
Traffic Advisory,
4.0 nm away,
1100’ above,
descending
Traffic Display
Range Rings
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Proximity
Advisory, 1200’
feet below,
descending
Figure 6-75 Traffic Map Page
AFCS
Altitude Display Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic is
displayed. If traffic meets the criteria for a TA, it is also displayed even if it is outside of the selected volume
of airspace.
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, press the ALT Mode Softkey.
APPENDICES
2) Select one of the following Softkeys:
• Above: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 9900 feet above the aircraft to 2700
feet below the aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
• Normal: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to
2700 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
INDEX
• Below: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9900
feet below the aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
•
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
3) To return to the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, select the Back Softkey.
334
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following (see softkey description in the previous step 2):
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
•
Above
•
Normal
•
Below
•
Unrestricted
EIS
3) Select the ENT Softkey.
Traffic Map Page Display Range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The display range on the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable
with the Joystick, and rings on the map denote the ranges.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the Joystick.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) The following range options are available:
750 ft and 1500 ft (with optional ADS-B)
•
1500 ft and 0.5 nm (with optional ADS-B)
•
0.5 nm and 1 nm (with optional ADS-B)
•
1 nm and 2 nm (with optional ADS-B)
•
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
•
24 and 40 nm
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
•
AFCS
750 ft (with optional ADS-B)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
•
ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
APPENDICES
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information
can also be displayed on the following other maps for additional reference on the MFD when the traffic unit
is operating:
• Trip Planning Page
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
335
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling traffic information (MFD maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Traffic Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
When traffic is selected on maps other than the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, the system shows a traffic status
icon to indicate traffic is enabled for display as well as the altitude display mode (Above, Below, Normal,
Unres).
Proximity
Advisory
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Advisory
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic
Advisory OffScale Banner
Annunciation
Traffic overlay
enabled icon and
Altitude Display
Mode
Figure 6-76 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
AFCS
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections.
APPENDICES
• Traffic – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
INDEX
• Traffic Mode – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays only Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
- TA Only - Displays Traffic Advisories only
• Traffic Symbols – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• Traffic Labels – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels (relative altitude, vertical trend) are
shown with the option to turn off
336
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
EIS
A traffic-only inset map is available on the PFD by pressing the TFC Map Softkey. A traffic map appears on
the PFD. This map resembles the Traffic Map Page, and presents a heading up format. Traffic information
can also be overlaid on PFD navigation maps.
Enabling/disabling traffic overlay on PFD navigation maps:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) With the Inset Map or HSI Map displayed, press the Map/HSI Softkey on the PFD.
2) Press the Traffic Softkey to enable/disable the display traffic information.
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Mode
TEST
(‘TEST MODE’ shown in center of page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic System Test
Initiated
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
OPERATING
Operating
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
Standby
AFCS
Traffic System Failed*
FAIL
* See Table 6-23 for additional failure annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-19 Traffic Modes
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the ‘Map Traffic Map’ Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Traffic Map Page Center
Description
Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
DATA FAILED
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
FAILED
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
Table 6-20 TAS Failure Annunciations
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
337
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TA OFF SCALE
EIS
TA X.X ± XX ↕
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending).
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-21 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
338
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.7 ADS-B TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the display.
ADS-B SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) is a core technology in the FAA NextGen air traffic
control system. It offers improved surveillance services, both air-to-air and air-to-ground, especially in areas
where radar coverage is ineffective due to terrain, or where it is impractical or cost prohibitive. ADS-B is
comprised of three segments for the purposes of providing traffic information: ADS-B (Broadcast), ADS-R
(Rebroadcast), and Traffic Information Service-Broadcast (TIS-B).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ADS-B includes the automatic broadcast of position reports by aircraft, surface vehicles, and transmitters on
fixed objects. These broadcasts contain information such as GPS position, identity (Flight ID, Call Sign, Tail
Number, ICAO registration number, etc.), ground track, ground speed, pressure altitude, and emergency status.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1090 ES
UAT
RADAR
Composite
GPS
1090 ES
AFCS
18,000 FT
10,000 FT
RADAR
ATC
UAT
UAT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Mode A/C
UAT
1090 ES
ADS-B Ground Station (ADS-R,
TIS-B, FIS-B)
APPENDICES
Figure 6-77 ADS-B System
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
For the purpose of distinguishing between levels of ADS-B service, there are three classifications of aircraft or
system capability: ADS-B In, ADS-B Out, and ADS-B participating. ADS-B In refers to the capability to receive
ADS-B information. ADS-B Out refers to the capability to transmit ADS-B information. ADS-B participating
refers to the capability to both send and receive ADS-B information. Aircraft lacking either ADS-In, ADS-B Out,
or both ADS-B capabilities may also be referred to as ADS-B nonparticipating aircraft.
339
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ADS-B system operates on two frequencies: 1090 MHz and 978 MHz. Both frequencies provide the same
traffic information. An aircraft may be ADS-B In, Out, or participating on one or both frequencies, depending
on the installed equipment. The 1090 MHz frequency portion of ADS-B is known as 1090 Extended Squitter
(1090 ES). The 978 MHz portion of ADS-B is known as Universal Access Transceiver (UAT).
The optional Garmin GTX 345R transponder provides ADS-B Out functions using the 1090 ES data link. It
also performs ADS-B In functions using the UAT data link. This includes the reception of Flight Information
Services-Broadcast (FIS-B) data link weather service, provided when the aircraft is receiving data from a
participating ground station; refer to the Data Link Weather section for more information about FIS-B Weather.
EIS
AUTOMATIC DEPENDENT SURVEILLANCE-REBROADCAST (ADS-R)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Because it is not required that ADS-B In capable aircraft be able to receive ADS-B data on both the 1090
MHz and 978 MHz data links, a method exists to get data from one data link to the other. ADS-R is the
rebroadcast of ADS-B data by FAA ground stations, which provide this service by taking traffic data from one
link and rebroadcasting it on the other. For example, if two aircraft are in the service volume for a ground
station, and one is transmitting on 1090 MHz and the other is transmitting on 978 MHz, the ground station
retransmits the data from each aircraft on the other link to ensure the two aircraft can “see” each other as
traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If another aircraft can only receive 978 MHz UAT information, it cannot directly ‘see’ another aircraft
sending only 1090 ES information aircraft unless an ADS-R ground station in the vicinity rebroadcasts the
1090 ES data over the 978 MHz UAT frequency. This is also true for an aircraft when can only receive 1090
ES data; it would need an ADS-R ground station to ‘see’ another aircraft operating on the UAT frequency.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE-BROADCAST (TIS-B)
TIS-B provides a link between the secondary surveillance radar (SSR)-based system ATC uses and the ADSB-based system. When an ADS-B In or Out capable aircraft is within the service volume of an FAA ADS-B
ground station, the ground station broadcasts a portion of the ATC radar data to the aircraft. This aircraft is
then included in the list of aircraft being provided TIS-B service and is then considered a “TIS-B participant.”
AFCS
TIS-B coverage is available when the aircraft is within ground station coverage, in SSR coverage, and the
other aircraft is also in SSR coverage, and is transmitting its altitude.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The ground station provides ATC radar information for other aircraft within ±3,500 feet and 15 NM of the
participant, to include altitude, position, ground speed, and ground track. TIS-B broadcasts occur once every
three to thirteen seconds, depending on the characteristics of the ground station providing the TIS-B service.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The following table describes the aircraft that are observed by a GTX 345R-equipped aircraft according to
the level of equipment installed in the other aircraft.
340
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Other Aircraft Equipment
Viewable by GTX 345R Equipped Aircraft
1090ES Out Equipped
Yes
UAT Receive Only Capable
No
UAT Transmit Equipped
Yes
No Transponder, No ADS-B
No
Non ADS-B Equipped, but with Mode C or S Transponder
Yes*
* Only when in ADS-B ground station coverage and when the other aircraft is in ATC radar coverage.
Table 6-22 Aircraft Available for Viewing by an ADS-B Equipped Own Aircraft
EIS
ADS-B WITH TAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When an optional Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is also installed and operating with the UAT, the UAT
receives traffic from the active traffic system and attempts to match (or “correlate”) this traffic with ADS-B
traffic the UAT is tracking. When a correlation is made, only the traffic with the most accurate information
is displayed to the flight crew. Any traffic that is not correlated (i.e., only detected by one system but not the
other) is also displayed for the flight crew. This correlation of traffic by the UAT improves the accuracy of the
traffic displayed, while reducing the occurrence of the same aircraft being displayed twice.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: In certain situations, a single aircraft may be depicted as two aircraft on the display if the system
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
is unable to correlate the traffic. This may occur, for example, when operating on the edges of ATC radar
coverage, or when using an optional active traffic system providing intermittent data. This may also occur
if TIS-B traffic data does not closely match the traffic data from other sources, especially while the traffic
tracked by ATC radar is turning.
NOTE: The TAS system issues alerts for traffic it is tracking using TAS alerting criteria. The ADS-B system
issues alerts for traffic it is tracking using the Conflict Situational Awareness & Alerting (CSA) criteria.
AFCS
Either the TAS or the UAT unit can issue a traffic alert. If both systems determine an alert is necessary, and
the traffic is correlated, only the TAS-generated alert is issued. If traffic is not correlated, and both systems
determine an alert is necessary, the TAS-generated alert occurs first, followed by the UAT-generated alert.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
CONFLICT SITUATIONAL AWARENESS & ALERTING (CSA)
Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA) is an alerting algorithm which provides ADS-B traffic alerting similar to
the TAS system discussed previously.
APPENDICES
When a TA occurs with this equipment, the system displays a ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation and provides a voice
alert for example “Traffic! Two O’clock, Low, Two Miles.”.
The own aircraft altitude above terrain determines the sensitivity of the CSA algorithm to minimize nuisance
alerts. Height Above Terrain, and Geodetic Sea Level (GSL) altitude are used to adjust the sensitivity of the CSA
algorithm in accordance with the following table:
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
341
Height Above
Terrain (HAT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
Any
Any
Unavailable
Any
>1000
<=2350
Unavailable
Unavailable or
>2350
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Sensitivity
Level
EIS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
7
Unavailable or
>2350
8
Unavailable or
>2350
9
Unavailable or
>2350
10
Unavailable or
>2350
GPS Phase of Flight
Any
Any
Approach
Any
Any
Terminal
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Vertical
Protected
Own Altitude Look-ahead
Threshold for Volume
(Feet)
time (sec)
Alert (feet)
(NM)
Any
20
850
0.20
Any
20
850
0.20
Any
20
850
0.20
Any
25
850
0.20
Any
25
850
0.20
Any
<=5000
25
30
850
850
0.20
0.35
>5000
<=10,000
40
850
0.55
>10,000
<=20,000
45
850
0.80
>20,000
<=42,000
48
850
1.10
> 42,000
48
1200
1.10
Table 6-23 CSA Alerting Thresholds for ADS-B Traffic
AFCS
When the system detects a new Traffic Advisory (TA), the following occur:
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The system issues a single “Traffic!” voice alert, followed by additional voice information about the bearing,
relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA. For example, the
announcement “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own aircraft,
above own altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
Bearing
Relative Altitude
Approximate Distance (nm)
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Zero miles”, “Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
Table 6-24 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
INDEX
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears to the right of the Airspeed Indicator on the PFD, flashes for five seconds,
and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area..
342
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• If the PFD Inset Map or HSI Map was already displayed, the traffic is shown on the displayed map. Otherwise
the Traffic Map is shown on the PFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, a yellow text banner will be displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA symbol. The text will indicate ‘TA’
followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if known.
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer a factor.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-78 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: ADS-B traffic voice alerts are suppressed when below 500 feet.
AIRBORNE AND SURFACE APPLICATIONS
AFCS
ADS-B traffic can help the pilot visually acquire traffic both in the air and on-the-ground. There are two ADS-B
applications or modes: Airborne Situational Awareness (AIRB) and Surface Situational Awareness (SURF). The
system automatically selects the appropriate application based on conditions.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The AIRB application is on when the aircraft is more than five NM and 1,500 feet above the nearest airport.
When the AIRB application is active, the system only displays traffic which is airborne.
APPENDICES
The SURF application is on when the aircraft is within five NM and less than 1,500 feet above field elevation.
When the SURF applications is on, the system displays airborne and on the ground traffic. At a Traffic Map
Page range of one nm or less, the airport environment (including taxiways and runways) appears in addition to
traffic. The airport displays are derived from the SafeTaxi database. Refer to the Additional Features section for
more information about SafeTaxi displays.
NOTE: Do not rely on the solely on the traffic display to determine the runway alignment of traffic, especially
when runways are in close proximity to each other.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
343
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Due to the varying precision of the data received via ADS-B, ADS-R, and TIS-B services, not all traffic symbols
may be depicted on the traffic display. Because higher data precision is required for traffic to be displayed in the
SURF environment, some traffic eligible for AIRB will not be displayed while SURF is on. Availability for AIRB
and SURF is depicted on the Aux - ADS-B Status Page, discussed later in this section.
SURF Application On
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Ground-based
vehicle
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Aircraft on the
ground
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-79 Traffic Map Page with SURF Mode On
344
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRAFFIC DESCRIPTION
The symbols used to display ADS-B traffic are shown in the following table.
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Symbol
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
EIS
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range with directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range without directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper
bearing.
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Other Non-Threat traffic with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Other Non-Threat traffic without directional information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own
aircraft is on the ground.
AFCS
Non-aircraft ground traffic with ADS-B directional information. Pointed end indicates direction of travel. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic without ADS-B directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface
(SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-25 ADS-B Traffic Symbology
OPERATION
APPENDICES
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and
altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading.
Map range is adjustable with the Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper right corner of the page.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
345
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AIRB Application On
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Other Non-Threat
Traffic, 1000 below,
climbing
Traffic Advisory,
200’ above,
climbing
EIS
No-bearing
Traffic Advisory,
4.0 nm away,
1100’ above,
descending
Traffic Display
Range Rings
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity
Advisory, 1200’
feet below,
descending
Figure 6-80 Traffic Map Page
Enabling/disabling the display of ADS-B traffic:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
2) Press the ADS-B Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘ADS-B On’ or ‘ADS-B Off’.
AFCS
b) Press the ENT Key.
Testing the display of ADS-B traffic:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) If necessary, turn the Joystick to select a map range of 2 and 6 nm to ensure full test pattern display.
3) Ensure the ADS-B Softkey is disabled.
4) If the optional TAS is installed, ensure the TAS STBY Softkey is enabled.
APPENDICES
5) Press the Test Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Test Mode’.
INDEX
c) Press the ENT Key.
A test pattern of traffic symbols appears during the test, and a ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears on the
PFD. At the conclusion of the test, the system issues the voice alert “Traffic System Test”. If the test pattern
is displayed and the voice alert is heard, the system has passed the test.
346
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADS-B Test Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-81 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which Other Non-Threat and Proximity traffic is displayed.
TAs occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
Changing the altitude range:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) On the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, press the ALT Mode Softkey.
2) Press one of the following softkeys:
• Above: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
AFCS
• Normal: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
•
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Below: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9000 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
3) To return to the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, press the Back Softkey.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight one of the following options (see softkey description in the previous step
2):
Above
•
Normal
•
Below
•
Unrestricted
INDEX
•
3) Press the ENT Key.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
347
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
DISPLAYING MOTION VECTORS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When Absolute Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the traffic symbols depict the
traffic’s reported track and speed over the ground. When Relative Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors
extending from the traffic symbols display how the traffic is moving relative to own aircraft. These vectors
are calculated using the traffic’s track and ground speed and own aircraft’s track and ground speed. These two
values are combined to depict where the traffic is moving purely with respect to own aircraft, and provide a
forecast of where the traffic will be, relative to own aircraft, in the near future.
Absolute
Motion Vectors
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Absolute Motion Vectors
selected
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-82 Traffic Map Page with Absolute Motion Vectors Enabled
348
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Relative Motion
Vectors
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Relative Motion Vectors
selected
Figure 6-83 Traffic Map Page with Relative Motion Vectors Enabled
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Enabling/disabling the Motion Vector display:
1) Select the ‘Map -Traffic Map’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Select the Motion Softkey.
3) Select one of the following softkeys:
Absolute: Displays the motion vector pointing in the absolute direction.
•
Relative: Displays the motion vector relative to own aircraft
•
Off: Disables the display of the motion vector.
AFCS
•
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map -Traffic Map’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Relative Motion’, ‘Absolute Motion’ or ‘Motion Vector Off’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Adjusting the duration for the Motion Vector projected time:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
2) Select the Motion Softkey.
3) Select the Duration Softkey.
INDEX
4) Select a softkey for the desired duration (30 SEC, 1 MIN, 2 MIN, 5 MIN).
5) When finished, select the Back Softkey to return to the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
349
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Additional Traffic Information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page can display additional information for a selected aircraft symbol. This may
include the aircraft tail number/Flight ID, type of aircraft (e.g., glider, small/medium/large aircraft, service
vehicle, unmanned airborne vehicle (UAV), course, track, groundspeed), and other information.
Showing additional traffic information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob. A cyan border appears on the first selected traffic symbol. Additional information appears
in a window in the lower-left corner of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
3) To select a different aircraft symbol, turn the FMS Knob to move the cyan border until another symbol is
selected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob again to disable the traffic selection.
Traffic Map Page Display Range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The display range on the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable
with the Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the Joystick.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) The following range options are available:
•
750 feet
•
750 feet and 1500 feet
•
1500 feet and 0.5 nm
•
0.5 and 1 nm
•
1 and 2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
•
24 and 40 nm
NOTE: ADS-B traffic can be displayed as an overlay to navigation maps and IFR/VFR Charts. Refer to the
INDEX
APPENDICES
previous TAS discussions for information about these additional traffic displays.
350
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADS-B SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
TEST MODE
ADS-B: AIRB
None
ADS-B: SURF
None
ABS-B Traffic Off
ADS-B: OFF
ADS-B TRFC OFF
ADS-B Traffic Not
Available
ADS-B: N/A
ADS-B TRFC N/A
ADS-B Failed*
ADS-B: FAIL
ADS-B TRFC FAIL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ADS-B: TEST
ADS-B System Test
Initiated
ADS-B Operating in
Airborne Mode
ADS-B Operating in
Surface Mode
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
EIS
Traffic Map Page Center
Banner Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
ADS-B Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
* See Table 6-28 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-26 ADS-B Modes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: If the optional TAS fails, the display of ADS-B traffic (ADS-B In) also fails, unless a GTX 345R
transponder is installed. In this case, if the TAS fails, the display of ADS-B traffic continues even if the TAS
has failed.
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the ‘ Map - Traffic
Map’ Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
AFCS
Description
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
Data is being received from the traffic unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the traffic unit
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Map Page Center
Annunciation
NO DATA
DATA FAILED
FAILED
Table 6-27 Traffic Failure Annunciations
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
351
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TA OFF SCALE
EIS
TA X.X ± XX ↕
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend
arrow (climbing/descending).
Traffic unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-28 Traffic Status Annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Additional information about the status of ADS-B traffic products is available on the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’
Page.
Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page.
INDEX
Figure 6-84 Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status on ADS-B Status Page
352
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Available to Run
Not Available
Fault
Not Configured
TIS-B/ADS-R Coverage
GPS Status: GPS
Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Ground Uplink Status:
Last Uplink
---------------Available
Not Available
--------------External #1
External #2
--------Number of minutes, or
‘------’
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic application is currently on. Required input data is available, and it meets
performance requirements.
Traffic application is not currently active, but application is ready to run when
condition(s) determine the application should be active. Required input data is
available, and it meets performance requirements.
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is available, but it does
not meet performance requirements.
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is not available or the
application has failed.
Traffic application is not available, because it has not been configured. If this
annunciation persists, the system should be serviced.
Traffic application status is invalid or unknown.
The system is receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
The system is not receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
ADS-R coverage is invalid or unknown.
The system is using the #1 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
The system is using the #2 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
The GPS source is invalid or unknown.
Displays the number of minutes since the last uplink from a ground station
occurred. If no uplink has been received, or the status is invalid, dashes appear
instead of the number of minutes.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
On
EIS
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Status Message
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADS-B Status Page
Item
Traffic Application
Status: Airborne
(AIRB), Surface (SURF),
Airborne Alerts (CSA)
Table 6-29 Aux-ADS-B Status Page Messages for ADS-B Traffic
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
353
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Blank Page
354
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7.1 AFCS OVERVIEW
NOTE: The approved Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS) always supersedes the information in this
Pilot’s Guide.
EIS
NOTE: A failure of the primary (#1) Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) results in loss of the Flight Director. Any
IAU failure results in loss of the autopilot and manual electric trim.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Garmin AFCS is a digital Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS), fully integrated within the avionics
architecture. The System Overview section provides a block diagram to support this system description.
The Garmin AFCS can be divided into these main operating functions:
• Flight Director (FD) — Flight Director operation takes place within the primary (#1) IAU. Flight Director
commands are displayed on the PFD. The Flight Director provides:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
– Pitch/roll mode selection and processing
– Autopilot communication
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch, roll, and pitch trim servo and provides servo
monitoring and automatic flight control in response to Flight Director steering commands, AHRS attitude and
rate information, and airspeed.
• Manual Electric Trim (MET) — The pitch trim servo provides manual electric trim capability when the
autopilot is not engaged.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
355
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
AFCS CONTROLS
The AFCS Controls are positioned on the MFD, and has the following controls:
AP Key
FD Key
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
2
NAV Key
ALT Key
3
EIS
4
VS Key
6 FLC Key
7 HDG Key
8 APR Key
9 VNV Key
10 NOSE UP/
NOSE DN
Keys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5
Engages/disengages the autopilot
Activates/deactivates the Flight Director only
Pressing once turns on the Flight Director in the default pitch and roll modes.
Pressing again deactivates the Flight Director and removes the Command Bars. If
the autopilot is engaged, the key is disabled.
Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode
Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
Selects/deselects Approach Mode
Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for Vertical Navigation flight control
Control the mode reference in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level
Change modes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11
AFCS
1
2
7
3
8
4
9
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5
APPENDICES
6
10
INDEX
Figure 7-1 Dedicated MFD AFCS Controls
356
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL AFCS CONTROLS
The following AFCS controls are located in the cockpit separately from the MFD:
Disengages the autopilot and interrupts pitch trim operation
CWS Button
(Control Wheel
Steering)
While pressed, allows manual control of the aircraft while the autopilot is engaged and
synchronizes the Flight Director’s Command Bars with the current aircraft pitch (if
not in Glideslope Mode) and roll (if in Roll Hold Mode)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AP DISC Switch
(Autopilot
Disconnect)
This switch may be used to mute the aural autopilot disconnect alert.
The AP DISC Switch is located on each control stick.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Upon release of the CWS Button, the Flight Director may establish new reference
points, depending on the current pitch and roll modes. CWS operation details are
discussed in the Flight Director modes section.
The CWS Button is located on the top of the left control stick.
GO AROUND
Button
Disengages the autopilot and selects Flight Director Takeoff (on ground) or Go Around
(in air) Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If an approach procedure is loaded this switch also activates the missed approach when
the selected navigation source is GPS or when the navigation source is VOR/LOC and
a valid frequency has been tuned.
The GO AROUND Button is located on the left hand throttle
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Used to command manual electric trim (MET)
AP TRIM Switch
(Autopilot Trim) This composite switch is split into left and right sides. The left switch is the ARM contact
and the right switch controls the DN (forward) and UP (rearward) contacts. The AP
TRIM ARM switch can be used to disengage the autopilot and to acknowledge an
autopilot disconnect alert and mute the associated aural tone.
AFCS
Manual trim commands are generated only when both sides of the switch are
operated simultaneously. If either side of the switch is active separately for more than
three seconds, MET function is disabled and ‘PTRM’ is displayed as the AFCS Status
Annunciation on the PFD. The function remains disabled until both sides of the switch
are inactivated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The AP TRIM Switch is located on the left control stick.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
357
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.2 FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight Director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFD.
With the Flight Director activated, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars.
Maximum commanded pitch (-15°/+16°) and roll (22°) angles, vertical acceleration, and roll rate are limited to
established values. The Flight Director also provides commands to the autopilot.
ACTIVATING THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR
EIS
An initial press of a key listed in following table (when the Flight Director is not active) activates the Flight
Director in the listed modes. The Flight Director may be turned off and the Command Bars removed from the
display by pressing the FD Key again. The FD Key is disabled when the autopilot is engaged.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Control Pressed
Modes Selected
FD Key
AP Key
CWS Button
GO-AROUND
Button
ALT Key
VS Key
VNV Key
Lateral
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Takeoff (on ground)
Go Around (in air)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
NAV Key
Navigation**
ROL
ROL
ROL
TO
GA
ROL
ROL
ROL
GPS
VOR
LOC
BC
APR Key
Approach**
GPS
VOR
LOC
HDG Key
Heading Select
HDG
Vertical
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Takeoff (on ground)
TO
Go Around (in air)
GA
Altitude Hold
ALT
Vertical Speed
VS
Vertical Path Tracking* VPTH
Pitch Hold (default)
Pitch Hold (default)
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
PIT
GP
GS
PIT
*Valid VNV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates the Flight Director.
**The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS
course before NAV or APR Key press activates the Flight Director.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 7-1 Flight Director Activation
358
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AFCS STATUS BOX
Lateral Modes
Active
Vertical Modes
Active
Mode
Reference
Armed
EIS
Armed
Autopilot
Status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFD when the Flight Director is active. Autopilot
status is displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Lateral Flight Director modes are displayed on the left
and Vertical Modes on the right. Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green.
AFCS Status Box
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected
Altitude
Figure 7-2 PFD AFCS Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
359
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise
specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific mode selection,
the Flight Director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll mode(s).
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green in the AFCS Status Box. Under normal operation,
when the control for the active Flight Director mode is pressed, the Flight Director reverts to the default
mode(s) for the axis(es). Automatic transition from armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed mode
annunciation moving to the green active mode field and flashing for 10 seconds.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
If the information required to compute a Flight Director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the Flight
Director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. A flashing yellow mode annunciation and
annunciator light indicate loss of sensor (ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS, VNV, SBAS) required to
compute commands. When such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins to roll the wings level (enters
Roll Hold Mode) or maintain the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode), depending on the affected axis. The
flashing annunciation stops when the affected mode key is pressed or another mode for the axis is selected. If
after 10 seconds no action is taken, the flashing annunciation stops.
Figure 7-3 Loss of GPS Signal
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to compute the default flight
director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.
COMMAND BARS
AFCS
Upon activation of the Flight Director, Command Bars are displayed on the PFD as a single magenta cue.
The Command Bars move together vertically to indicate pitch commands and bank left or right to indicate roll
commands. The Command Bars do not override the aircraft symbol.
If the attitude information sent to the Flight Director becomes invalid or unavailable, the Command Bars are
removed from the display. The Flight Director Command Bars also disappear if either pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚
or bank exceeds 65˚.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars
APPENDICES
Aircraft Symbol
INDEX
Figure 7-4 Single-cue Command Bars
360
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.3 AFCS MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The AFCS is capable of operating in a variety of independent Lateral Modes, Vertical Modes and Combination
of both the Lateral and Vertical Modes.
VERTICAL MODES
Pitch Hold
Vertical Speed
Reference
Change
Increment
(default)
-15° to
+16°
0.5°
nnnn fpm
-3000 to
+1500 fpm
100 fpm
nnn kt
90 to
185 kt
1 kt
PIT
*
ALTS
ALT Key ALT nnnnn ft
VS Key
VS
FLC Key FLC
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Level Change
Holds the current aircraft pitch
attitude; may be used to climb/
descend to the Selected Altitude
Captures the Selected Altitude
Holds the current Altitude Reference
Maintains the current aircraft vertical
speed; may be used to climb/descend
to the Selected Altitude
Maintains the current aircraft
airspeed while the aircraft is
climbing/descending to the Selected
Altitude
Reference
Range
Control Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Altitude Capture
Altitude Hold
Description
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical Mode
EIS
The following table lists the vertical modes with their corresponding controls and annunciations. The mode
reference is displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level
Change modes. The NOSE UP/DN Keys can be used to change the vertical mode reference while operating
under Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode.
AFCS
* ALTS armed automatically when PIT, VS, FLC, TO, or GA active, and under VPTH when Selected Altitude is to be captured
instead of VNV Target Altitude
Table 7-2 Flight Director Vertical Modes
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PITCH HOLD MODE (PIT)
APPENDICES
When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed), Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default. Pitch
Hold Mode is indicated as the active vertical mode by the ‘PIT’ annunciation. This mode may be used for
climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Selected Altitude Capture Mode
is automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude, the pitch reference. The pitch
reference is set to the aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the aircraft pitch attitude
exceeds the flight director pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch angle equal to
the nose-up/down limit.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
361
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Changing the Pitch Reference
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Using the NOSE UP/DN Keys
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new pitch reference, then releasing the
CWS Button
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed
EIS
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Command Bars Maintain
Desired Pitch Reference
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 7-5 Pitch Hold Mode
362
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTED ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTS)
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the following modes:
• Pitch Hold
• Vertical Speed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Takeoff/Go Around (if the Selected Altitude is at
least 400 feet above the current aircraft altitude)
• Vertical Path Tracking (if the Selected Altitude
is to be captured instead of the VNV Target
Altitude)
• Flight Level Change
EIS
The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed (see previous figure for
example). The ALT SEL Knob is used to set the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) until Selected
Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to Selected Altitude
Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed (next figure). This automatic transition is indicated by the
green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation.
The Selected Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTS’ annunciation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from Selected Altitude
Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and holds the Selected Altitude (shown as the Altitude Reference). As Altitude
Hold Mode becomes active, the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes
green for 10 seconds to indicate the automatic transition.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude Reference
(in this case, equal to
Selected Altitude)
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
AFCS
Figure 7-6 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Changing the Selected Altitude
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in Selected Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
APPENDICES
Use of the ALT SEL Knob to change the Selected Altitude while Selected Altitude Capture Mode is active
causes the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode with Selected Altitude Capture Mode armed for the
new Selected Altitude.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
363
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ALTITUDE HOLD MODE (ALT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude Hold Mode can be activated by pressing the ALT Key; the flight director maintains the current
aircraft altitude (to the nearest 10 feet) as the Altitude Reference. The flight director’s Altitude Reference,
shown in the AFCS Status Box, is independent of the Selected Altitude, displayed above the Altimeter.
Altitude Hold Mode active is indicated by a green ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS Status Box.
Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when the flight director is in Selected Altitude Capture Mode.
Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically transitions to Altitude Hold Mode when the altitude error is
less than 50 feet. In this case, the Selected Altitude becomes the flight director’s Altitude Reference.
EIS
Changing the Altitude Reference
NOTE: Turning the ALT SEL Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected Altitude, but not the
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
flight director’s Altitude Reference, and does not cancel the mode.
With the CWS Button depressed, the aircraft can be hand-flown to a new Altitude Reference. When the
CWS Button is released at the desired altitude, the new altitude is established as the Altitude Reference.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Altitude
Reference
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
to Maintain Altitude Reference
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-7 Altitude Hold Mode
364
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL SPEED MODE (VS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference. Current
aircraft vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical
Speed Mode activation. This mode may be used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above
the Altimeter) since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when Vertical Speed Mode is
selected.
EIS
When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the VS Key, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the AFCS
Status Box along with the Vertical Speed Reference. The Vertical Speed Reference is also displayed above the
Vertical Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed Reference Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is
shown on the indicator.
Changing the Vertical Speed Reference
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Vertical Speed Reference (shown both in the AFCS Status Box and above the Vertical Speed Indicator)
may be changed by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Vertical Speed Reference, then releasing
the CWS Button
NOTE: If the Selected Altitude is reached during CWS maneuvering, the Altitude Reference is not changed.
To adjust the Altitude Reference in this case, the CWS Button must be pressed again after the Selected
Altitude is reached.
Vertical
Speed
Reference
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical Speed
Mode Active
Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
AFCS
Selected
Altitude
Vertical
Speed
Reference
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Bug
APPENDICES
Command Bars Indicate Climb to
Attain Vertical Speed Reference
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
Figure 7-8 Vertical Speed Hold Mode
365
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE MODE (FLC)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Level Change Mode is selected by pressing the FLC Key. This mode acquires and maintains the
Airspeed Reference while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter). When
Flight Level Change Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors Selected Altitude, airspeed, and
altitude.
EIS
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation. Flight Level Change Mode is
indicated by a green ‘FLC’ annunciation beside the Airspeed Reference in the AFCS Status Box. The Airspeed
Reference is also displayed directly above the Airspeed Indicator, along with a bug corresponding to the
Airspeed Reference along the tape.
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before selecting Flight Level Change Mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding
to the desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining the Airspeed Reference. The flight director
maintains the current altitude until either engine power or the Airspeed Reference are adjusted and does not
allow the aircraft to climb or descend away from the Selected Altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Changing the Airspeed Reference
The Airspeed Reference (shown in both the AFCS Status Box and above the Airspeed Indicator) may be
adjusted by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Airspeed Reference, then releasing the
CWS Button
NOTE: If the Selected Altitude is reached during CWS maneuvering, the Airspeed Reference is not changed.
AFCS
To adjust the Airspeed Reference in this case, the CWS Button must be pressed again after the Selected
Altitude is reached.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flight Level
Change Mode
Active
Selected
Airspeed Altitude Capture
Reference Mode Armed
APPENDICES
Airspeed
Reference
INDEX
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
Command Bars Indicate Climb
to Attain Selected Altitude
Figure 7-9 Flight Level Change Mode
366
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
LATERAL MODES
The following table relates each Garmin AFCS lateral mode to its respective control and annunciation. Refer
to the combination modes section for information regarding Go Around and Takeoff modes.
Description
Control Annunciation
Roll Hold
Heading Select
Navigation, VOR Enroute Arm/Capture/Track
Navigation, LOC Capture/Track
(No Glideslope)
Captures and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR,
LOC)
NAV
Key
ROL
25°
HDG
25°
GPS
25°
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
VOR
LOC
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation, GPS
Maximum Roll
Command Limit
EIS
Holds the current aircraft roll
attitude or rolls the wings level,
(default)
depending on the commanded
bank angle
Captures and tracks the Selected HDG
Heading
Key
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Lateral Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 7-3 Flight Director Lateral Modes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The CWS Button does not change lateral references for Heading Select, Navigation, Backcourse, or Approach
Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading/Course upon release of the CWS Button.
ROLL HOLD MODE (ROL)
NOTE: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the flight director rolls the wings level.
AFCS
When the flight director is activated or switched, Roll Hold Mode is selected by default. This mode is annunciated
as ‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box. The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank angle condition.
Flight Director Response
Rolls wings level
Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
Limits bank to 25°
APPENDICES
Bank Angle
< 6°
6 to 25°
> 25°
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-10 Roll Hold Mode Annunciation
Table 7-4 Roll Hold Mode Responses
Changing the Roll Reference
INDEX
The roll reference can be changed by pressing the CWS Button, establishing the desired bank angle, then
releasing the CWS Button.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
367
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
HEADING SELECT MODE (HDG)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains
the Selected Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a cyan bug on the HSI and in the box to the upper
left of the HSI.
Changing the Selected Heading
NOTE: Pressing the HDG Knob synchronizes the Selected Heading to the current heading.
EIS
The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG Knob. Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying
the aircraft does not change the Selected Heading. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected
Heading upon release of the CWS Button.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turns are commanded in the same direction as Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the bug is turned
more than 180° from the present heading (e.g., a 270° turn to the right). However, Selected Heading
changes of more than 330° at a time result in turn reversals.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Heading Select
Mode Active
Selected
Heading
Selected
Heading
Bug
Command Bars Track
Selected Heading
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-11 Heading Select Mode
368
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NAVIGATION MODES (GPS, VOR, LOC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
Pressing the NAV Key selects Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation
source (GPS, VOR, LOC). The flight director follows GPS roll steering commands when GPS is the selected
navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director creates roll steering
commands from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can also be used to fly non-precision
GPS and LOC approaches where vertical guidance is not required.
EIS
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV Key is pressed, the
selected mode is armed. If the CDI shows less than one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically captured when
the NAV Key is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active lateral mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-12 GPS Navigation Mode Armed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the CDI has automatically switched from GPS to LOC during a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation
Mode remains active, providing GPS steering guidance until the localizer signal is captured. LOC Navigation
Mode is armed automatically when the navigation source switch takes place if the APR Key is not pressed
prior to the automatic source switch.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode
(wings rolled level):
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation Mode reverts to armed)
• Navigation source manually switched (with the CDI Softkey)
AFCS
• During a LOC/ILS approach, the FAF is crossed while in GPS Navigation Mode after the automatic navigation
source switch from GPS to LOC
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
369
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Changing the Selected Course
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob. Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does
not change the Selected Course while in Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the
Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the CWS Button is released.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
GPS Navigation
Mode Active
GPS is Selected
Navigation Source
Selected
Course
Command Bars Indicate Left
Turn to Track GPS Course
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 7-13 Navigation Mode
370
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
COMBINATION MODES (VNV, APR, NAV, BC, GA)
The following table lists the modes that operating by using both Vertical and Lateral Modes with their
corresponding controls and annunciations.
Description
Vertical Path Tracking
Glideslope
VPTH
ALTV
GP
GS
Approach, GPS Arm/Capture/Track
GPS
25°
Approach, VOR Arm/Capture/Track Captures and tracks the
selected navigation source APR Key
Approach, ILS Arm/Capture/Track (GPS, VOR, LOC)
(Glideslope Mode automatically
armed)
Commands a constant pitch
GOangle and wings level on the
Takeoff
AROUND
ground in preparation for
Button
takeoff
VAPP
25°
LOC
25°
TO
6°
GA
6°
Level
Autopilot engages and
commands
pitch angle
necessary to establish zero
vertical fpm
LVL
N/A
***
APPENDICES
Commands a constant pitch
GOangle and wings level in the AROUND
air
Button
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Go Around**
AFCS
25°
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
BC
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Backcourse Arm/Capture/Track
Captures and tracks descent
legs of an active vertical VNV Key
profile
Captures
the
Vertical
Navigation (VNV) Target
*
Altitude
Captures and tracks the
SBAS glidepath on approach
APR Key
Captures and tracks the ILS
glideslope on approach
Captures
and
tracks
a localizer signal for BC Key
backcourse approaches
Reference
Range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Glidepath
Annunciation
EIS
VNV Target Altitude Capture
Control
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Mode
Maximum
Roll
Command
Limit
* ALTV is armed automatically under VPTH when VNV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of Selected Altitude.
**Go Around mode disengages the autopilot unless a compatible lift computer is installed.
INDEX
*** Level mode can only become activated as a function of Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP). Refer to the Additional
Features section for a detailed discussion of the optional ESP feature.
Table 7-5 Flight Director Combination Modes
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
371
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VERTICAL NAVIGATION MODES (VPTH, ALTV)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: VNV is disabled when parallel track or Dead Reckoning Mode is active.
NOTE: The Selected Altitude takes precedence over any other vertical constraints.
Vertical Navigation (VNV) flight control is available for enroute/terminal cruise and descent operations any
time that VNV flight planning is available. Refer to the GPS Navigation Section for more information on VNV
flight plans. Conditions for availability include, but are not limited to:
EIS
• The selected navigation source is GPS.
• A VNV flight plan (with at least one altitude-constrained waypoint) or vertical direct-to is active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• VNV is enabled (VNV Softkey pressed on the MFD).
• Crosstrack error is valid and within certain limits.
• Desired/actual track are valid or track angle error is within certain limits.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The VNV Target Altitude of the active waypoint is no more than 250 ft above the current aircraft altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The flight director may be armed for VNV at any time, but no target altitudes are captured during a climb.
The Command Bars provide vertical profile guidance based on specified altitudes (entered manually or loaded
from the database) at waypoints in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to. The appropriate VNV flight
control modes are sequenced by the flight director to follow the path defined by the vertical profile. Upon
reaching the last waypoint in the VNV flight plan, the flight director transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and
cancels any armed VNV modes.
Vertical Path Tracking Mode (VPTH)
NOTE: If another vertical mode key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is selected, Vertical Path
AFCS
Tracking Mode reverts to armed.
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
autopilot guides the aircraft back to the descent path upon release of the CWS Button.
APPENDICES
When a vertical profile (VNV flight plan) is active and the VNV Key is pressed, Vertical Path Tracking
Mode is armed in preparation for descent path capture. ‘VPTH’ (or ‘/V’ when Glidepath or Glideslope
Mode is concurrently armed) is annunciated in white in addition to previously armed modes. If applicable,
the appropriate altitude capture mode is armed for capture of the next VNV Target Altitude (ALTV) or the
Selected Altitude (ALTS), whichever is greater.
INDEX
Figure 7-14 Vertical Path Tracking Armed Annunciations
372
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Prior to descent path interception, the Selected Altitude must be set below the current aircraft altitude
by at least 75 feet. For the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode,
acknowledgment is required within five minutes of descent path interception by:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Pressing the VNV Key
• Adjusting the Selected Altitude
If acknowledgment is not received within one minute of descent path interception, the white ‘VPTH’
annunciation starts to flash. Flashing continues until acknowledged or the descent path is intercepted. If
the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and
the descent is not captured.
EIS
In conjunction with the “TOD [top of descent] within 1 minute” annunciation in the Navigation Status
Box and the “Vertical track” voice message, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, vertical deviation, and
vertical speed required) appear on the PFD in magenta.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Vertical Path Tracking
Armed (Flashing Indicates
Acknowledgment Required
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VNV Target
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
Enroute
Phase of
Flight
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
AFCS
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
APPENDICES
Figure 7-15 Vertical Path Capture
When a descent leg is captured (i.e., vertical deviation becomes valid), Vertical Path Tracking becomes
active and tracks the descent profile (next figure). An altitude capture mode (‘ALTS’ or ‘ALTV’) is armed as
appropriate.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
373
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VNV Target Altitude
Capture Armed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Vertical Path
Tracking Active
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
VNV Target
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
Command Bars Indicate Descent to
Maintain Required Vertical Speed
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
Figure 7-16 Vertical Path Tracking Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the altimeter barometric setting is adjusted while Vertical Path Tracking is active, the flight director
increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the aircraft on the descent path
(without commanding a climb). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV
vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
aircraft to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV
Target Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
Automatic Reversion to Pitch Hold Mode
AFCS
Several situations can occur while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active which cause the flight director
to revert to Pitch Hold Mode:
• Vertical deviation exceeds 200 feet during an overspeed condition.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Vertical deviation experiences a discontinuity that both exceeds 200 feet in magnitude and results in
the vertical deviation exceeding 200 feet in magnitude. Such discontinuities are usually caused by
flight plan changes that affect the vertical profile.
• Vertical deviation becomes invalid (the Vertical Deviation Indicator is removed from the PFD).
APPENDICES
• A display enters Reversionary Mode (this does not apply to an active vertical direct-to).
Unless VNV is disabled, Vertical Path Tracking Mode and the appropriate altitude capture mode become
armed following the reversion to Pitch Hold Mode to allow for possible profile recapture.
Non-Path Descents
INDEX
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes can also be used to fly non-path descents
while VNV flight control is selected. If the VS or FLC Key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is
selected, Vertical Path Tracking Mode reverts to armed along with the appropriate altitude capture mode
to allow profile re-capture.
374
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Figure 7-17 Flight Level Change VNV Non-Path Descent
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
To prevent immediate profile re-capture, the following must be satisfied:
• At least 10 seconds have passed since the non-path transition was initiated
• Vertical deviation from the profile has exceeded 250 feet, but is now less than 200 feet
Pressing the VNV Key twice re-arms Vertical Path Tracking for immediate profile re-capture.
EIS
VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode (ALTV)
NOTE: Armed VNV Target Altitude and Selected Altitude capture modes are mutually exclusive. However,
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed implicitly (not annunciated) whenever VNV Target Altitude Capture
Mode is armed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VNV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture Mode and is armed automatically
after the VNV Key is pressed and the next VNV Target Altitude is to be intercepted before the Selected
Altitude. The annunciation ‘ALTV’ indicates that the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured. VNV Target
Altitudes are shown in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to, and can be entered manually or loaded
from a database (see the GPS Navigation Section for details). At the same time as “TOD within 1 minute”
is annunciated in the Navigation Status Box, the active VNV Target Altitude is displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to VNV Target
Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation.
The VNV Target Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTV’ annunciation and remains
displayed above the Vertical Speed Indicator. The Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) is removed
once VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
At 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from VNV Target
Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and tracks the level leg. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active,
the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 10 seconds to
indicate the automatic transition. The flight director automatically arms Vertical Path Tracking, allowing
upcoming descent legs to be captured and subsequently tracked.
Altitude Reference (In This Case,
Equal To VNV Altitude Target)
APPENDICES
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
Figure 7-18 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
375
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Changing the VNV Target Altitude
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Changing the current VNV Target Altitude while VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is active causes
the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode. Vertical Path Tracking and the appropriate altitude
capture mode are armed in preparation to capture the new VNV Target Altitude or the Selected Altitude,
depending on which altitude is to be intercepted first.
EIS
VNV target altitudes can be changed while editing the active flight plan (see the Flight Management
Section for details).
GLIDEPATH MODE (GP)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Glidepath Mode is used to track the SBAS-based glidepath. When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is
annunciated in white in the AFCS Status Box.
Selecting Glidepath Mode:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Ensure a GPS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Some RNAV (GPS) approaches provide a vertical descent angle as an aid in flying a stabilized
approach. These approaches are NOT considered Approaches with Vertical Guidance (APV). Approaches
that are annunciated on the HSI as LNAV or LNAV+V should be flown to an MDA, until visual with the
landing surface, even though vertical glidepath (GP) information may be provided.
AFCS
WARNING: When flying an LNAV approach (with vertical descent angle) with the autopilot coupled, the
aircraft will not level off at the MDA even if the MDA is set in the altitude preselect.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Upon reaching the glidepath, the flight director transitions to Glidepath Mode and begins to capture and
track the glidepath.
APPENDICES
Figure 7-19 Glidepath Mode Armed
Once the following conditions have been met, the glidepath can be captured:
• A GPS approach with vertical guidance (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V) is loaded into the active flight plan.
• The active waypoint is at or after the final approach fix (FAF).
INDEX
• Vertical deviation is valid.
• The CDI is at less than full-scale deviation
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints has not been suspended (no ‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI)
376
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glidepath Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
guides the aircraft back to the glidepath upon release of the CWS Button.
GPS Approach
Mode Active
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Glidepath
Mode Active
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
LPV Approach
Active
Glidepath
Indicator
Figure 7-20 Glidepath Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GLIDESLOPE MODE (GS)
AFCS
Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the glideslope. When Glideslope
Mode is armed (annunciated as ‘GS’ in white), LOC Approach Mode is armed as the lateral flight director
mode.
Selecting Glideslope Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
INDEX
4) Press the APR Key.
Figure 7-21 Glideslope Mode Armed
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
377
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured. Upon reaching the
glideslope, the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to capture and track the glideslope.
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glideslope Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
guides the aircraft back to the glideslope upon release of the CWS Button.
Approach
Mode Active
Glideslope
Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Active ILS
Frequency Tuned
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV2 (localizer) is Selected
Navigation Source
Glideslope
Indicator
Figure 7-22 Glideslope Mode
APPROACH MODES (GPS, VAPP, LOC)
AFCS
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
flight director to enter Approach Mode.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the
selected navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC), depending on loaded approach. This mode uses the selected
navigation receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly the approach. Pressing the APR Key when the
CDI is greater than one dot arms the selected approach mode (annunciated in white to the left of the active
lateral mode). If the CDI is less the 1 dot, the LOC is automatically captured when the APR Key is pressed.
APPENDICES
VOR Approach Mode (VAPP) provides greater sensitivity for signal tracking than VOR Navigation Mode.
Selecting VOR Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a valid VOR frequency is tuned
INDEX
2) Ensure that VOR is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
When GPS Approach Mode is armed, Glidepath Mode is also armed.
378
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting GPS Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a GPS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
EIS
Figure 7-23 GPS Approach Mode Armed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
LOC Approach Mode allows the autopilot to fly a LOC/ILS approach with a glideslope. When LOC
Approach Mode is armed, Glideslope Mode is also armed automatically. LOC captures are inhibited if the
difference between aircraft heading and localizer course exceeds 105°.
Selecting LOC Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
AFCS
4) Press the APR Key.
If the following occurs, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
• Approach Mode is active and a Vectors-To-Final is activated
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Approach Mode is active and Navigation source is manually switched
• During a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation Mode is active and the FAF is crossed after the automatic
navigation source switch from GPS to LOC
APPENDICES
Changing the Selected Course
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in
Approach Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when
the CWS Button is released.
379
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
BACKCOURSE MODE (BC)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Backcourse Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction.Backcourse Mode is
armed if the CDI is greater than one dot when the mode is selected.The flight director creates roll steering
commands from the Selected Course and deviation when in Backcourse Mode.
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front course.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Backcourse
Mode Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
LOC2 is Selected Navigation Source
Figure 7-24 Backcourse Mode
Changing the Selected Course
AFCS
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not reset any reference data while in Backcourse
Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course when the CWS Button is released.
INTERCEPTING AND FLYING A DME ARC
APPENDICES
The AFCS will intercept and track a DME arc that is part of the active flight plan provided that GPS
Navigation Mode is engaged, GPS is the active navigation source on the CDI, and the DME arc segment is
the active flight plan leg. It is important to note that automatic navigation of DME arcs is based on GPS.
Thus, even if the APR key is pressed and LOC or VOR Approach Mode is armed prior to reaching the Initial
Approach Fix (IAF), Approach Mode will not activate until the arc segment is completed.
INDEX
If the pilot decides to intercept the arc at a location other than the published IAF (i.e. ATC provides vectors
to intercept the arc) and subsequently selects Heading Mode or Roll Mode, the AFCS will not automatically
intercept or track the arc unless the pilot activates the arc leg of the flight plan and arms GPS Navigation
Mode. The AFCS will not intercept and fly a DME arc before reaching an IAF that defines the beginning of the
arc segment. Likewise, if at any point while established on the DME arc the pilot deselects GPS Navigation
Mode, the AFCS will no longer track the arc.
380
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAKEOFF (TO) AND GO AROUND (GA) MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Go Around and Takeoff modes are coupled pitch and roll modes and are annunciated as both the vertical
and lateral modes when active. In these modes, the flight director commands a constant set pitch attitude and
wings level. The Go Around Button is used to select both modes. The mode entered by the flight director
depends on whether the aircraft is on the ground.
Takeoff Mode provides an attitude reference during rotation and takeoff. This mode can be selected only
while on the ground by pushing the Go Around Button. The flight director Command Bars assume a wingslevel, pitch-up attitude.
EIS
Pressing the Go Around Button while in the air activates the flight director in wings level, pitch-up attitudes,
allowing the execution of a missed approach or a go around.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Go Around
Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Command Bars Indicate Climb
Takeoff Mode Active
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-25 Takeoff and Go Around Modes
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
381
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
LEVEL MODE (LVL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
When the normal flight envelope thresholds have been exceeded for more than 50% of the last 20 seconds,
Level mode is activated. The autopilot will engage and provide input to bring the aircraft back into straight
and level flight based on zero degrees roll angle and zero feet per minute vertical speed. An aural “Engaging
Autopilot” alert sounds and the lateral and vertical flight director annunciations will display “LVL”. The AFCS
will remain in Level mode until the pilot selects another mode.
EIS
Level (LVL) mode becomes active only as a function of Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP). Refer to
the Additional Features section for a detailed discussion of the ESP feature.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-26 Level Mode
382
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.4 AUTOPILOT OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to the POH/AFM for specific instructions regarding emergency procedures.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The autopilot operate flight control surface servos to provide automatic flight control. The autopilot controls
the aircraft pitch and roll attitudes following commands received from the Flight Director. Pitch autotrim provides
trim commands to the pitch trim servo to relieve any sustained effort required by the pitch servo.
FLIGHT CONTROL
EIS
Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos, based on the active Flight Director modes. Servo motor
control limits the maximum servo speed and torque. The servo mounts are equipped with slip-clutches set to
certain values. This allows the servos to be overridden in case of an emergency.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PITCH AXIS AND PITCH TRIM
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during upsets and Flight
Director maneuvers. Flight Director pitch commands are rate and attitude-limited, combined with pitch
damper control, and sent to the pitch servo motor. The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque) and
provides this signal to the pitch trim servo. The pitch trim servo commands the motor to reduce the average
pitch servo effort.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim servo may be used to provide manual electric trim.
This allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control stick switch rather than the trim wheel. Manual trim
commands are generated only when both halves of the MEPT Switch are operated simultaneously. Trim
speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more consistent response.
ROLL AXIS
AFCS
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during upsets and Flight Director
maneuvers. The Flight Director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper
control, and sent to the roll servo motor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
383
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ENGAGEMENT
NOTE: Autopilot engagement/disengagement is not equivalent to servo engagement/disengagement. Use
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the CWS Button to disengage the pitch and roll servos while the autopilot remains active.
When the AP Key is pressed, the autopilot and flight director (if not already active) are activated and the
annunciator lights on the AFCS controller for the autopilot is illuminated. The flight director engages in Pitch
and Roll Hold Modes when initially activated.
EIS
Autopilot
Engaged
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-27 Autopilot Engaged
Autopilot status is displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Engagement is indicated by green ‘AP’
annunciation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CONTROL WHEEL STEERING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
During autopilot operation, the aircraft may be hand-flown without disengaging the autopilot. Pressing and
holding the CWS Button disengages the pitch and roll servos from the flight control surfaces and allows the
aircraft to be hand-flown. At the same time, the flight director is synchronized to the aircraft attitude during
the maneuver.
The ‘AP’ annunciation is temporarily replaced by ‘CWS’ in white for the duration of CWS maneuvers.
AFCS
Control Wheel Steering
Figure 7-28 CWS Annunciation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In most scenarios, releasing the CWS Button reengages the autopilot with a new reference. Refer to flight
director mode descriptions for specific CWS behavior in each mode.
384
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DISENGAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The autopilot is manually disengaged by pushing the AP DISC Switch, AP TRIM ARM Switch, or the AP Key
on the MFD. Manual disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘AP’ annunciation and a twosecond autopilot disconnect aural alert. After manual disengagement, the autopilot disconnect aural alert may
be cancelled by pushing the AP TRIM ARM or AP DISC Switch (AP DISC Switch also cancels the flashing ‘AP’
annunciation).
Figure 7-29 Manual Autopilot Disengagement
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red and white ‘AP’ annunciation and by the
autopilot disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP DISC or AP TRIM ARM
Switch. Automatic autopilot disengagement occurs due to:
• System failure
• Invalid sensor data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Stall warning
• Inability to compute default flight director modes (FD also disengages automatically)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
385
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.5 AFCS ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AFCS ALERTS
Alert Condition
Aileron Mistrim Right
EIS
Aileron Mistrim Left
Elevator Mistrim Down
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Elevator Mistrim Up
Pitch Trim Failure
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
(or Stuck AP TRIM
Switch)
Roll Failure
Pitch Failure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
System Failure
AFCS
Preflight Test
Annunciation
AIL→
←AIL
↓ELE
↑ELE
PTRM
ROLL
PTCH
AFCS
Description
Roll servo providing sustained force in indicated
direction
Pitch servo providing sustained force in the
indicated direction
If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and
disengage AP
If AP disengaged, move AP TRIM switches
separately to unstick
Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative
Pitch axis control failure; AP inoperative
AP and MET are unavailable; FD may still be
available
PFT
Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds
at completion
Do not press the AP DISC Switch during servo
power-up and preflight system tests. Doing so may
cause the preflight system test to fail or never to
start. Cycle power to the servos if this occurs.
PFT
Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at
failure
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 7-6 AFCS Alerts
386
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OVERSPEED PROTECTION
NOTE: Overspeed protection is not active in ALT, GS or GP modes.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Flight Level Change, Vertical Path Tracking, or an altitude capture mode is
active, airspeed is monitored by the flight director. Overspeed protection is provided to limit the flight director’s
pitch command in situations where the flight director cannot acquire and maintain the mode reference for the
selected vertical mode without exceeding Vne.
EIS
When Overspeed Protection is active, the Airspeed Reference appears in a box above the Airspeed Indicator,
flashing a yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation. Engine power should be reduced and/or the pitch reference adjusted
to slow the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is resolved.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-32 Overspeed Annunciation
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
387
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.6 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SUSPECTED AUTOPILOT MALFUNCTION
NOTE: Consult the aircraft documentation for the location of circuit breakers as well as specifics that may
supplement or amplify this procedure.
If an autopilot failure or trim failure is suspected to have occurred, perform the following steps:
EIS
1) Firmly grasp the control wheel.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press and hold the AP DISC Switch. The autopilot will disconnect and power is removed from the trim motor.
Power is also removed from all primary servo motors and engaged solenoids. Note the visual and aural alerting
indicating autopilot disconnect.
3) Retrim the aircraft as needed. Substantial trim adjustment may be needed.
4) Pull the appropriate circuit breaker(s) to electrically isolate the servo and solenoid components.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Release the AP DISC Switch.
OVERPOWERING AUTOPILOT SERVOS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In the context of this discussion, “overpowering” refers to any pressure or force applied to the pitch controls
when the autopilot is engaged. A small amount of pressure or force on the pitch controls can cause the autopilot
automatic trim to run to an out-of-trim condition. Therefore, any application of pressure or force to the
controls should be avoided when the autopilot is engaged.
Overpowering the autopilot during flight will cause the autopilot’s automatic trim to run, resulting in an outof-trim condition or cause the trim to hit the stop if the action is prolonged. In this case, larger than anticipated
control forces are required after the autopilot is disengaged.
AFCS
The following steps should be added to the preflight check:
1) Check for proper autopilot operation and ensure the autopilot can be overpowered.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Note the forces required to overpower the autopilot servo clutches.
388
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi®, ChartView, IFR/VFR, or FliteCharts®, it may be necessary to carry
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
another source of charts on-board the aircraft.
Additional features of the system include the following:
• SafeTaxi diagrams
• Flight Data Logging
EIS
• ChartView, FliteCharts, and IFR/VFR electronic • Iridium® Satellite Telephone and SMS text messaging
charts
• Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) System
(optional)
• Airport Directory
®
• Electronic Checklists
• SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 1300 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The optional ChartView, FliteCharts and IFR/VFR electronic charts provides on-board electronic terminal
procedures charts. Electronic charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information.
The Airport Directory offers detailed information for a selected airport, such as available services, hours of
operation, and lodging options.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL® 69A SXM Data Link Receiver
handles more than 170 channels of music, news, and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment
choices and longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD™ data card.
Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.
AFCS
Iridium Telephone Services and SMS messaging is an optional subscription service offered through Garmin
Connext® and Iridium Satellite LLC.
The optional Garmin Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP) system discourages aircraft operation outside the
normal flight envelope.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Electronic checklists allow a pilot to quickly find the proper procedure for a particular phase of flight.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
389
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 SAFETAXI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The
maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to
show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at
lower map ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport
provides enhanced position awareness.
EIS
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• Navigation Map Page
• VOR Information Page
• PFD Maps
• User Waypoint Information Page
• Weather Datalink Page
• Trip Planning Page
• Airport Information Page
• Nearest Pages
• Intersection Information Page
• Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• NDB Information Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo inside the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
390
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Taxiway
Identification
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Aircraft
Position
Airport Hot
Spot Outline
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport
Features
Detail Softkey
Removes
Taxiway
Markings
AFCS
Figure 8-1 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Detail Softkey (declutter) label advances to Detail All, Detail 3, Detail 2 and Detail 1 each time the
softkey is selected for easy recognition of decluttering level. Pressing the Detail All Softkey removes the taxiway
markings and airport feature labels. Pressing the Detail 3 Softkey removes VOR station ID, the VOR symbol,
and intersection names if within the airport plan view. Pressing the Detail 2 Softkey removes the airport runway
layout, unless the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Pressing the Detail 1 Softkey cycles back to
the original map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
391
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) While viewing the ‘Map-Navigation Map’ Page, press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu.’
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Map Settings’ Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aviation’ Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the ‘Aviation’ Group options to SafeTaxi.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map-Navigation Map’ Page.
392
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.2 CHARTS
Electronic charts that resemble the paper versions of terminal procedures charts (FliteCharts) and Jeppesen®
terminal procedures charts (ChartView) can be displayed on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the databases for both chart types are purchased and loaded in the system, the desired charts brand, or
source, can be selected for viewing. The active chart source for a particular procedure is shown on the information
pane under Source.
Selecting Preferred Charts Source:
EIS
1) While viewing a chart press the MENU Softkey to display the ‘Page Menu’ options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Chart Setup’ menu option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the ‘Preferred Charts Source’ option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the available options (FliteCharts, ChartView).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Preferred Charts Source Option
Chart Setup Option
AFCS
Figure 8-2 Preferred Charts Source
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Chart Source
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-3 Chart Source
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
393
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHARTVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed
in full color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the
planview of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes are not considered within the chart boundaries.
Therefore, when the aircraft symbol reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the aircraft symbol is removed
from the display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The following figure shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, the grey shading
is for illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the published chart or MFD display. These off-scale
areas appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of
this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the
aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview,
not to the off-scale area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Inset Box
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off-Scale
Area
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Off-Scale
Areas
Figure 8-4 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
APPENDICES
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• NOTAMs
INDEX
• Approaches
394
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the ‘Map-Navigation Map’ Page, ‘NRST-Nearest Airport’ Page, or ‘FPL-Active Flight Plan’ Page,
press the Charts Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu.’
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the ‘Options’ Menu to Charts.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map Page Options Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page Options Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-5 Option Menus
On the Waypoint Airport Information Page Options Menu, select the desired chart and press the ENT Key
to display the chart.
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner Chart Not Available appears on the screen.
The Chart Not Available banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability of a
particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-6 Chart Not Available Banner
APPENDICES
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the
banner Unable To Display Chart is then displayed.
INDEX
Figure 8-7 Unable To Display Chart Banner
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
395
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
When a chart is not available by pressing the Charts Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts may
be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing
the Charts Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
EIS
The chart shown is one associated with the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ page. Usually this is the airport
runway diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are
available, that page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport
is shown.
Selecting a chart:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) While viewing the ‘Map-Navigation Map’ Page, ‘FPL-Active Flight Plan’ Page, or ‘NRST-Nearest Airports’ Page,
press the Charts Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the ‘WPT-Airport Information’
Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the ‘Approach’ Box. (Press the APR
Softkey if the ‘Approach’ Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Approach’ Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
Chart Scale
Figure 8-8 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
396
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
While the Approaches Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. Once the desired chart
is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within the
boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears. If
the Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The Aircraft Not
Shown Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
EIS
Pressing the Chart Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the Chart Softkey switches between the Gainesville, FL (KGNV) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart. If
the displayed chart is the airport diagram, the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey has no effect. The aircraft position is
shown in magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is within the chart boundaries.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Another source for additional airport information is from the Info Box above the chart for certain airports.
This information source is not related to the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey. When the Info Box is selected using the
FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. The Charlotte, NC airport has five additional charts offering information;
the Airport Diagram, Take-off Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates, and Airline
Parking Gate Location. (The numbers in parentheses after the chart name are Jeppesen designators.)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft
Current
Position
APPENDICES
Figure 8-9 Airport Information Page, Info View, Full Screen Width
In the example shown in following figure, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Charlotte Class B Airspace Chart.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
397
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-10 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from Info View
- Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
- Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
AFCS
- Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and includes weather data such
as METAR and TAF from the SiriusXM Data Link Receiver, when available. Weather information is available
only when a SiriusXM Data Link Receiver is installed and the SiriusXM Weather subscription is current.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Pressing
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When
NOTAMS are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled. The NOTAM
Softkey may appear on the Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections. Pressing the
NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
APPENDICES
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
NOTE: Only NOTAMs applicable to specific information conveyed on the displayed Jeppesen chart are
INDEX
available when the NOTAM Softkey is pressed. There may be other NOTAMs available pertaining to the flight
that may not be displayed. Contact Jeppesen for more information regarding Jeppesen database published
NOTAMs.
398
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT Opt Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level.
Pressing the All Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Complete
Chart
Shown
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-11 Approach Information Page, All View
- Pressing the Header Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.
AFCS
- Pressing the Plan Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
- Pressing the Profile Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Pressing the Minimums Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of the
approach chart.
- If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, pressing the Fit WDTH Softkey changes
the chart size to fit the available screen width.
- Pressing the Full SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
399
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting Additional Information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the Full SCN Softkey to display the information windows (Airport,
Info).
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Airport, Info, Runways, or Frequencies Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Info Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
EIS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
Pressing the Back Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys. The full screen
view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Chart Setup’ Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the ‘Full Screen’ and ‘Color Scheme’ Options.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the ‘On’ and ‘Off’ ‘Full Screen’ Options.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-12 Page Menus
400
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a
dark environment. When the Chart Setup Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Chart Setup’ Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-13 Page Menu Chart Setup
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the ‘Color Scheme’ Option.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between ‘Day’, ‘Auto’, and ‘Night’ Options.
AFCS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the ‘Chart Setup’ Menu.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
401
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-14 Arrival Information Page, Day View
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-15 Arrival Information Page, Night View
FLITECHARTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts are
displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Not all charts are geo-referenced. These charts will display an
Aircraft Not Shown Icon in the lower right corner of the MFD.
Figure 8-16 Aircraft Not Shown Icon
402
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An aircraft symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area depicted on some charts. Off-scale areas are
indicated by the grey shading. Note, these areas are not shaded on the published chart. These off-scale areas
appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of
this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the
aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview,
not to the off-scale area.
The FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Approaches
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• Airport Diagrams
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Off-Scale
Areas
Off-Scale
Area
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Off-Scale
Areas
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Off-Scale
Area
APPENDICES
Figure 8-17 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
403
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLITECHARTS SOFTKEYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the Charts Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT Opt, Chart, Info, DP, STAR, APR, WX, and Go
Back. The chart selection softkeys appear on the Airport Information Page.
Pressing the Go Back Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT Opt Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: All, Fit WDTH, Full SCN, and Back.
EIS
While viewing the CHRT Opt Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
While viewing the ‘Map-Navigation Map’ Page, ‘NRST-Nearest Airport’ Page, or ‘FPL-Active Flight Plan’ Page,
press the Charts Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu.’
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the ‘Options’ Menu to ‘Charts.’
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
On the Waypoint Airport Information Page Options Menu, select the desired chart and press the ENT Key
to display the chart.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner No Available Charts appears on the screen.
The No Available Charts banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability of a
particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
Figure 8-18 No Available Charts Banner
APPENDICES
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the
banner Unable To Display Chart is then displayed.
INDEX
Figure 8-19 Unable To Display Chart Banner
404
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a chart is not available by pressing the Charts Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts may
be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing
the Charts Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ page. Usually this is the airport
runway diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are
available, that page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport
is shown.
EIS
Selecting a chart:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) While viewing the ‘Map-Navigation Map’ Page, ‘FPL-Active Flight Plan’ Page, or ‘NRST-Nearest Airports’ Page,
press the Charts Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the ‘WPT-Airport Information’
Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the ‘Approach’ Box. (Press the APR
Softkey if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Approach’ Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
AFCS
While the Approach Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. Once the desired chart
is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE,
and the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the Chart Softkey switches between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the Chart Softkey switches between the Gainesville, FL (KGNV) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ page.
APPENDICES
Pressing the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart.
If the displayed chart is the airport diagram, the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey has no effect.
Another source for additional airport information is from the Info Box above the chart or to the right of the
chart for certain airports. This information source is not related to the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey. When the Info
Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank.
INDEX
Pressing the ENT Key displays the IFR Alternate Minimums Chart.
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
405
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data if a data link weather receiver is installed.
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the WX Softkey to display the information windows.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Info’ Box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Info’ Box choices. When the ‘Info’ Box is selected the softkeys are blank.
If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to
complete the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
Pressing the Go Back Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT Opt Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level.
Pressing the All Softkey shows the complete chart on the screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the Fit WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the chart at close range is replaced with the full width chart.
Pressing the Full SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
Pressing the Back Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
AFCS
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Options.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Chart Setup’ Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the ‘Full Screen’ and ‘Color Scheme’ Options.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the ‘On’ and ‘Off’ Full Screen Options.
406
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a
dark environment. When the Chart Setup Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu ‘Options.’
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Chart Setup’ Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
EIS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the ‘Color Scheme’ Option.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between ‘Day’, ‘Auto’, and ‘Night’ Options.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the ‘Chart Setup’ Menu.
IFR/VFR CHARTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
IFR/VFR charts resemble the paper version and are displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable
charts.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Not all charts are geo-referenced. IFR/VFR charts may be viewed
by selecting the ‘Map - IFR/VFR Charts’ Page.
AFCS
Selecting IFR Low, IFR High, VFR Charts:
Select the ‘Map - IFR/VFR Charts’ Page.
1) Press the VFR, IFR Low, or IFR High Softkey to display the desired chart.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu.’
2) Select ‘Display VFR’, ‘Display IFR Low’ or ‘Display IFR High’ to display the desired chart.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
407
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AIRPORT DIRECTORY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association™ (AOPA) and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory databases
offer detailed information regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more. This information
is viewed on the Airport Information Page by pressing the Info Softkey until Info 2 is displayed.
Both Airport Directories are available for downloading at flygarmin.com. However, copy only one of the
databases to the Supplemental Data Card. The system cannot recognize both databases simultaneously.
Selecting the Airport Directory Page:
EIS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT’ page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Airport Information Page. Initially, information for the airport closest to
the aircraft’s present position is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) If necessary, press the Info softkey until Info 2 is displayed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-20 AOPA Information on the Airport Information Page
408
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.3 DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISIONS
CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Databases that may be available include FliteCharts, Obstacle, Terrain, IFR/VFR, Navigation, ChartView,
SafeTaxi, Airport Directory. Data is revised and expiration dates vary. Data is still viewable during a period that
extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page
displays the current status of the databases. As an example, see the table below for the various FliteCharts
Power-up Page displays and the definition of each. The expiration date and disables date varies for each database.
EIS
Example Power-up Page Display Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 8-1 Database Power-up Page Annunciations
White text, such as ‘FliteCharts Data Expires’ plus a date, indicates the chart database is current. Yellow text,
such as ‘Chart data is out of date!’ or ‘FliteCharts Data: Disabled”, indicates charts are no longer viewable and
have expired.
AFCS
Database time critical information can also be found on the ‘Aux - System Status’ page. The database Region,
Cycle number, Effective, Expires, and Disables dates of the subscription appear in either blue or yellow text.
Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not within the current
subscription period.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
APPENDICES
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the Database window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the applicable database information is shown.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
409
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Database cycle numbers are in a format such as YYTI or YYII, which are deciphered as follows:
YYTI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
YY – Indicates the last two digits of the year (ex. 18 represents 2018)
T – Indicates the database type (ex. S is for SafeTaxi, D is for Airport Directory)
I – Indicates the numerical issue of the database for the year (ex. 5 is the fifth issue of the year)
YYII
EIS
YY – Indicates the last two digits of the year (ex. 18 represents 2018)
II – Indicates the numerical issue of the database for the year (ex. 05 is the fifth issue of the year)
Revision Cycle
28 days
YYMI
Not Applicable
YYTI
Not Applicable
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Example Power-up Page Display Text
YYBI
56 days
YYSI
56 days
YYDI
56 days
YYII
28 days
YYII
14 days
YYII
28 days
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Database Cycle Number Format
YYII
AFCS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix for instructions on revising databases.
INDEX
Table 8-2 Database Cycle Number and Revision
410
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.4 SIRIUSXM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about SiriusXM Weather products.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A SXM Data Link Receiver is available
for the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The GDL 69A SXM can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment
services at any altitude throughout the Continental U.S.
EIS
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.siriusxm.com.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ACTIVATING SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICES
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on
the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the entertainment subscription.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A SXM.
Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send
an activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69A SXM, allows it to play entertainment programming.
These IDs are located:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
AFCS
Activating the SiriusXM Satellite Radio services:
1) Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio. Follow the instructions provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio services.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Select the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Select the ‘Aux - XM Radio’ page.
4) Press the Info Softkey to display the ‘Aux-XM Information’ Page.
5) Verify that the desired services are activated.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
411
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Audio
Radio ID
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Data
Radio ID
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Weather
Products
Window
Figure 8-21 XM Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If SiriusXM Weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are blank on the XM
Information Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather Data
Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for
subscription.
USING SIRIUSXM RADIO
AFCS
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio.
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the displayed ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
3) Press the Radio Softkey to show the ‘XM Radio’ Page where audio entertainment is controlled.
APPENDICES
ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the SiriusXM
Radio is using.
INDEX
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category.
Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.
412
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
1) While on the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page, press the Channel Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the ‘Channels’ Box, or move down the list with the
CH – Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the channels.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
EIS
Selecting a channel directly:
1) While on the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page, press the Channel Softkey.
2) Press the Direct CH Softkey. The channel number in the ‘Active Channel’ Box is highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel number.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
CATEGORY
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is Presets to view channels that have been programmed.
Selecting a category:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the Category Softkey on the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page.
2) Press the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
Or:
AFCS
Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category with the small FMS Knob
and press the ENT Key. Selecting All Categories places all channels in the list.
PRESETS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are selected by
pressing the Presets and More Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to the
channel list for the Presets category.
Setting a preset channel number:
APPENDICES
1) On the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page, while listening to an ‘Active Channel’ that is wanted for a preset, press the
Presets Softkey to access the first five preset channels (Preset 1 - Preset 5).
2) Press the More Softkey to access the next five channels (Preset 6 – Preset 10), and again to access the
last five channels (Preset 11 – Preset 15). Pressing the More Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset
channels.
INDEX
3) Press any one of the (Preset 1 - Preset 15) softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.
4) Press the Set Softkey on the desired channel number to save the channel as a preset.
Pressing the Back Softkey, or 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the top level softkeys.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
413
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
VOLUME
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Radio volume is shown as a percentage. Volume level is controlled by pressing the Volume Softkey, which
brings up the Mute Softkey and the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
Adjusting the volume:
1) With the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page displayed, press the Volume Softkey.
2) Press the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or press the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is pressed, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob.)
EIS
Muting SiriusXM audio:
1) Select the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page or ‘Aux-XM Information’ Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the Mute Softkey to mute the audio. Press the Mute Softkey again to unmute the audio.
414
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.5 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being logged by the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
system.
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data card (up
to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each
1GB of available space on the card.
EIS
Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged on a
specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes the date, time, and nearest airport identifier. The
file is created automatically each time the system is powered on, provided an SD card has been inserted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The status of the Flight Data Logging feature can be viewed on the ‘Aux-Utility’ Page. If no SD card has been
inserted, “NO CARD” is displayed. When data is being written to the SD card, “LOGGING DATA” is displayed.
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
The following is a list of data parameters the system is capable of logging.
• CDI Deflection (0.0 to 1.0)
• VDI Deflection (0.0 to 1.0)
• Normal Acceleration (g)
• Heading (degrees magnetic)
• Course (deg)
• Wind Direction (degrees mag.)
• Wind Speed (kts)
• Gnd Trk (degrees magnetic)
• Fuel Flow (gph)
• Fuel Press. (psi)
• Oil Temperature (deg. F)
• Oil Pressure (psi)
• Engine Speed (rpm)
• Power (%)
• Torque (ft. lbs.)
• Np (rpm)
• Ng (%)
• ITT (deg. C)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
190-02257-00 Rev. A
• Roll Commanded (degrees)
• OAT (deg. C)
• True Airspeed (kts)
• Selected Vertical Speed (fpm)
• Vertical Speed (fpm)
• HSI Selection (GPS,NAV1/2)
• GPS Fix (e.g. 2D, 3D, 3DDiff)
• Indicated Airspeed (kts)
• Horizontal Alert Limit (HAL,
meters)
• Gnd Speed (kts)
• Vertical Alert Limit (VAL, meters)
• Vertical Speed (fpm)
• NAV1 Frequency (MHz)
• NAV2 Frequency (MHz)
• Horizontal Protection Level
(HPLWAS, meters)
• Pitch (degrees)
• Roll (degrees)
• Horizontal Protection Level
(HPLFD, meters)
• Vertical
Protection
Level
(VPLWAS, meters)
• COM1 Frequency (MHz)
• COM2 Frequency (MHz)
• Lateral Acceleration (g)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Local Date (YYYY-MM-DD)
• Local Time (HH:MM:SS)
• Active Waypoint Distance (nm)
• Active
Waypoint
Bearing
(degrees mag.)
• UTC Offset (HH:MM)
• Mag. Variation (degrees)
• Active Waypoint Identifier
• Voltage 1 (volts)
• Voltage 2 (volts)
• Amps 1 (amps)
• Amps 2 (amps)
• AFCS On ( 0 – false, 1 – true)
• Latitude (degrees)
• AFCS Roll Mode (e.g. HDG,
LOC, GPS, VOR, ROL)
• Longitude (degrees)
• Right Fuel Qty (gals or lbs)
• Left Fuel Qty (gals or lbs)
• Center Fuel Qty (gals or lbs)
• AFCS Pitch Mode (e.g. ALT, GS,
GP, VS)
• Barometric Altitude (feet)
• Altimeter Setting (in. Hg.)
• GPS Altitude (ft)
• Pitch Commanded (degrees)
415
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The file containing the recorded data will appear in the format shown in the following figure. This file can be
imported into most computer spreadsheet applications.
Local Date
YYMMDD
Local 24hr Time
HHMMSS
Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
inserted if no
airport is found)
EIS
log_170610_104506_KIXD.csv
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-22 Log File Format
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Data logging status can be monitored on the ‘Aux-Utility’ Page.
416
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.6 SATELLITE TELEPHONE AND SMS MESSAGING
NOTE: An account must be established to access the Iridium satellite network for voice/SMS.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver provides an airborne low speed data link, Iridium Satellite Telephone service,
and Short Message Service (SMS).
The telephone is available to the flight crew through the audio panel and headsets.
REGISTERING WITH GARMIN CONNEXT
EIS
A subscriber account must be established prior to using the Iridium Satellite System. Before setting up an
Iridium account, obtain the serial number of the Iridium Transceiver and the System ID by selecting the ‘AuxSystem Status’ Page. Contact Garmin at 1-866-739-5687 in the United States or 913-397-8200, ext. 1135.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DISABLE/ENABLE IRIDIUM TRANSCEIVER
Iridium telephone and data communications may be turned on or off by performing these simple steps.
Disabling/enabling telephone and low speed data services:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-23 Report Status Page
3) Press the MENU Key. The Page Menu window is now displayed.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Disable Iridium Transmission’ in the menu list.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
417
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-24 Select Disable Iridium Transmission
5) Press the ENT Key. The Iridium transceiver is now disabled.
6) To enable the Iridium transceiver, repeat steps 1 through 3, then select ‘Enable Iridium Transceiver’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION
The pilot or copilot can place and answer calls on the Iridium satellite network. Control and monitoring of
telephone functions are accomplished through the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Viewing the Telephone Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Telephone’ or ‘Aux - Text Messaging’ Page.
3) If necessary, press the Phone Softkey to display the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The phone status display gives a graphical representation of the current disposition of voice and/or data
transmissions.
418
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
External
Phone
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Internal
Phone
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Phone is Idle
Phone is ringing
Phone has a dial tone (off hook) or connected to another phone
EIS
Phone dialed is busy
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Phone is dialing another phone
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Phone has failed
Phone status not known
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Phone is disabled
Phone is reserved for data transmission
AFCS
Calling other phone or incoming call from other phone
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Other phone is on hold
Phones are connected
APPENDICES
Table 8-3 Telephone Symbols
CONTACTS
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
The names, telephone number, and email addresses can be saved in a list of contacts for easy use when
making telephone calls.
419
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Entering a new contact:
1) With the ‘Aux - Telephone’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) If necessary, turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘New Entry’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves the ‘Name’ field of the ‘Contact Details’ window.
4) Enter the desired name of the new contact. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the
MFD Controller, or the FMS Knobs on the controller or the MFD.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the ‘Phone Number’ field.
EIS
6) Enter the desired telephone number. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD
Controller, or the FMS Knobs on the controller or the MFD.
7) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the ‘Email’ field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Enter the desired email address. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD
Controller, or the FMS Knobs on the controller or the MFD.
9) Press the ENT Key. The Save button is highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
10) Press the ENT Key. The new contact entry is added to the list of saved contacts.
Deleting a contact:
1) With the ‘Aux - Telephone’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired contact name.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the Delete Softkey. A confirmation window is displayed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the selected contact.
Figure 8-25 Editing a Contact
420
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Editing a contact:
1) With the ‘Aux - Telephone’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired contact name.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Edit Softkey. The cursor is placed in the ‘Name’ field. Enter the desired changes. Entry can be
accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD Controller, or the FMS Knobs on the controller or the
MFD.
4) Press the ENT Key when each field is complete. The Save Button is now highlighted.
5) Press the ENT Key to save the changes.
EIS
INCOMING CALLS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When viewing MFD pages other than the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page, a pop-up alert will be displayed and an
aural alert “Incoming Call” will be heard. If the incoming call is an Iridium network call, Iridium will be
displayed. The pop-up alert may be inhibited at times, such as during takeoff. In addition to the pop-up
alert, a ringing phone symbol will be displayed to the right of the MFD page title. Also, the voice alert
“Incoming Call” will be heard on the selected cockpit audio.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Answering an incoming call in the cockpit:
1) Press the Phone Key on the appropriate audio panel.
2) Press the Answer Softkey on the MFD.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
While viewing the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page
NOTE: The Push-to-Talk switch is not utilized for telephone communication. The microphone is active after
pressing the Answer Softkey, and stays active until the call is terminated.
AFCS
1) Press the Phone Key on the appropriate audio panel.
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
3) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Answer Incoming Call’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
Pressing the Ignore Softkey will extinguish the pop-up window and leave the call unanswered. Pressing
the Phone Softkey will display the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page allowing additional call information to be viewed
before answering.
APPENDICES
Muting incoming call alerts:
1) With the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable Incoming Call Alerts’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The voice and pop-up alert will not be displayed now when an incoming call is received.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
421
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OUTGOING CALLS
Making an external call from the cockpit using the Iridium satellite network:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the Phone Key on the appropriate audio panel.
2) Press the Dial Softkey on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Iridium’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor has now moved to the phone number entry field.
EIS
The International dialing sequence is necessary to place a call from the cockpit to an external phone:
Country Code + City/Area Code (if any) + Telephone Number. The following country codes may be used
when calling other satellite telephone systems.
Country Code
870
8810 or 8811
8812 or 8813
8816 or 8817
8818 or 8819
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Satellite System
Inmarsat
ICO
Ellipso
Iridium
Globalstar
Figure 8-26 Enter Phone Number
5) Enter the desired telephone number (country code first) by pressing the number softkeys on the MFD.
INDEX
6) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ is highlighted.
422
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-27 Make the Call
7) Press the ENT Key. The system will begin calling the number.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-28 System is Making the Connection
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
When the phone is answered, the connection is established. To exit the call, press the Hangup Softkey.
423
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-29 Phone is Answered, Connection Complete
Making an external call from the cockpit by using the Contact List:
1) Press the Phone Key on the appropriate audio panel.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired contact name in the list of contacts.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
4) Press the Call Softkey. The external call is initiated and the number associated with the contact name is dialed.
424
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PLACING THE COCKPIT PHONE ON HOLD
Placing a call on hold:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the Hold Softkey on the MFD.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Put Current Call On Hold’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
The cockpit phone is now isolated from the call. This figure illustrates a call between the cockpit and an
external phone in which the cockpit phone has been put on hold. Press the Hold Softkey again to resume
the call.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 8-30 Cockpit Phone on Hold
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
425
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TEXT MESSAGING (SMS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The pilot or copilot can send and receive text messages on the Iridium satellite network. Messages may be
sent to an email address or text message capable cellular telephone. Message length is limited to 160 characters,
including the email address. Senders should address text messages to aircraft by entering [aircraft Iridium
phone number]@msg.iridium.com.
The text messaging user interface is mainly through the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page.
Viewing the Text Messaging Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux-Telephone’ or ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) If necessary, press the SMS Softkey to display the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-31 Text Messaging Page
426
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message Symbol
Description
Received text message that has not been opened
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Received text message that has been opened
Saved text message, draft not sent
EIS
System is sending text message
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Text message has been sent
System failed to send text message
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Predefined text message
Table 8-4 Text Message Symbols
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VIEWING A TEXT MESSAGE WHEN RECEIVED
When viewing MFD pages other than the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, a pop-up alert will be displayed when
a new text message is received.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
New Text Message Pop-up
New Text Message Symbol on MFD Page
Figure 8-32 New Text Message Received
APPENDICES
Press the View Softkey to view the message. Pressing the Ignore Softkey will extinguish the pop-up
window and leave the text message unopened. Pressing the Ignore All Softkey will extinguish the popwindow and ignore all future incoming text messages. Pressing the SMS Softkey will display the ‘Aux-Text
Messaging’ Page.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
427
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-33 Text Message Displayed from Pop-Up Alert
The pop-up alerts may be enabled or disabled through the Page Menu.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling incoming text message pop-up alerts:
1) With the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable New Message Popups’ or ‘Enable New Message Popups’.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key. The pop-up alert will not be displayed when an incoming text message is received.
INDEX
Figure 8-34 Disabling New Text Message Pop-Ups
428
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
REPLY TO A TEXT MESSAGE
After reading a text message, a reply may be sent.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Replying to a text message:
While viewing the text message, press the Reply Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Reply To Message’.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key.
SENDING A TEXT MESSAGE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Text messages may be sent from the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page.
Sending a new text message:
1) While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the New Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Draft New Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
Figure 8-35 Composing a New Text Message
429
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) The SMS Text Message Draft Window is now displayed with the cursor in the ‘To’ field. Enter the desired
telephone number or email address. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD
Controller, or combination of the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used
to enter letters and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD by pressing the Numbers Softkey. Press
the CapsLock Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha characters. Special characters can be accessed by
pressing the Symbols Softkey.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘Message’ field.
4) Enter the desired message using any combination of entry methods as described in step 2.
EIS
5) Press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Press the Send Softkey to send the message immediately, or press the Save Softkey to save the message in
Outbox for sending at a later time. Press the Cancel Softkey to delete the message.
PREDEFINED TEXT MESSAGES
Time and effort can be saved in typing text messages that are used repeatedly by saving these messages as
a predefined message.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Creating a predefined text message:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
Figure 8-36 Creating/Editing Predefined Messages
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select ‘Edit Predefined Messages’.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key. The Predefined Messages view is now displayed.
4) Press the New Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
INDEX
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Draft New Predefined Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The Predefined SMS Text Message Window is now displayed.
430
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-37 Composing a Predefined Message
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) The cursor is displayed in the ‘Title’ field. Enter the desired message title. Entry can be accomplished through
the alphanumeric keys on the MFD Controller, or combination of the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys
on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used to enter letters and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD by
pressing the Numbers Softkey. Press the CapsLock Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha characters.
Special characters can be accessed by pressing the Symbols Softkey.
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘Message’ field.
7) Enter the desired message using any combination of entry methods as described in step 5.
AFCS
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the Save Softkey. The new predefined message is now shown in the displayed list. Pressing the Cancel
Softkey will delete the message without saving.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
10) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
11) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Cancel Drafting Message’.
12) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
431
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Sending a predefined text message:
1) While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the New Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) The Predefined SMS Text Message Window is now displayed with the cursor in the ‘To’ field. Enter the desired
telephone number or email address. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD
Controller, or combination of the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used
to enter letters and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD by pressing the Numbers Softkey. Press
the CapsLock Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha characters. Special characters can be accessed by
pressing the Symbols Softkey.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘Message’ field.
Figure 8-38 Predefined Message Softkey Shown When Composing a Message
4) Press the Predefined Softkey. The Predefined Message Menu Window is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired predefined message.
6) Press the ENT Key. The predefined message text is inserted into the message field. If desired, the message can
be edited by using the FMS Knobs.
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
8) Press the Send Softkey to transmit the message.
432
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TEXT MESSAGE BOXES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Received text messages reside in the Inbox as ‘Read’ or ‘Unread’ messages. The Outbox contains ‘Sent” and
‘Unsent’ text messages. Saved messages that are meant to be sent later are stored as Drafts. Each text message
box may be viewed separately, or together in any combination.
Showing Inbox messages:
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Inbox Softkey.
Or:
EIS
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Inbox Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left of the list window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-39 Text Message Inbox
Showing Outbox messages:
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Outbox Softkey.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Outbox Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left of the list window.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
433
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Showing Draft messages:
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Drafts Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Draft Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left of the list window.
EIS
MANAGING TEXT MESSAGES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The viewed messages may be listed according to the date/time the message was sent or received, the type of
message (read, unread, sent, unsent, etc.), or by message address.
Viewing messages sorted by message date/time:
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Time Softkey.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Date/Time’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Viewing messages sorted by message type:
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Type Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
AFCS
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Type’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list window.
Viewing messages sorted by address:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Address Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
APPENDICES
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Address’.
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list window.
434
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing the content of a text message:
1) While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, select the desired message box.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
4) Press the VIEW Softkey.
Or:
Press the ENT Key.
EIS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘View Selected Message’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Press the ENT Key.
Message content is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-40 Viewing Message Content
APPENDICES
5) To close the text message, press the Close Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Close Message’.
INDEX
c) Press the ENT Key.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
435
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Marking selected message as read:
1) While viewing the Inbox on the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
3) Press the MRK Read Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mark Selected Message As Read’.
EIS
c) Press the ENT Key.
The message symbol now indicates the message has been opened.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Marking all messages as read:
1) While viewing the Inbox on the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mark All New Messages As Read’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.
4) With cursor highlighting ‘YES’, press the ENT Key. The message symbols now indicate all the message have
been opened.
Deleting a message:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) While viewing the Inbox on the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
3) Press the Delete Softkey.
Or:
AFCS
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Delete Selected Message’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
c) Press the ENT Key.
436
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.7 ELECTRONIC STABILITY AND PROTECTION (ESP)
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual to determine approval of ESP functionality.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
The Garmin Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP) is designed to provide automatic control inputs to
discourage aircraft operation outside a normal flight envelope. Garmin ESP works to maintain the desired pitch,
roll, and airspeed operating envelope by automatically engaging one or more servos when the aircraft is near a
defined pitch, roll, and/or airspeed operating limit. While ESP utilizes the same sensors, processors, and actuators
as the autopilot, it is a separate function. The ESP system only operates when autopilot is not engaged and the
aircraft is above 200 feet AGL.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ESP engages when the aircraft exceeds one or more conditions (pitch, roll, and airspeed) beyond the normal flight
parameters. Enhanced stability for each condition is provided by applying a force to the appropriate control surface
to return the aircraft to the normal flight envelope. This is perceived by the pilot as resistance to control movement
in the undesired direction when the aircraft approaches a steep attitude or high airspeed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
As the aircraft deviates further from the normal attitude and/or airspeed range, the force increases (up to an
established maximum) to encourage control movement in the direction necessary to return to the normal attitude
and/or airspeed range. Except in the case of high airspeed, when maximum force is reached, force remains constant
up to the maximum engagement limit. Above the maximum engagement limit, forces are no longer applied. There
is no maximum engagement related to a high airspeed condition.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When ESP has been engaged for more than ten seconds (cumulative; not necessarily consecutive seconds) of a
20-second interval, the autopilot is automatically engaged with the flight director in Level Mode, bringing the aircraft
into level flight. An aural “Engaging Autopilot” alert is played and the flight director mode annunciation will indicate
‘LVL’ for vertical and lateral modes.
AFCS
The pilot can interrupt ESP by pressing and holding the Autopilot Disconnect (AP DISC) switch or the Control
Wheel Steering (CWS) button. Upon releasing AP DISC or CWS, ESP force will again be applied, provided aircraft
roll attitude is within engagement limits. ESP can also be overridden by overpowering the servo’s mechanical torque
limit.
ESP can be enabled or disabled on the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page on the MFD.
Enabling/disabling ESP:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
APPENDICES
3) If necessary, press the Setup 2 Softkey to display the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page. If the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’
Page is already displayed, proceed to step 4.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the Stability & Protection field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
INDEX
ESP is automatically enabled on system power up.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
437
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
ROLL ENGAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Roll Limit Indicators are displayed on the roll scale at 45° right and left, indicating where ESP will engage. As
roll attitude exceeds 45°, ESP will engage and the on-side Roll Limit Indicator will move to 30°. The Roll Limit
Indicator is now showing where ESP will disengage as roll attitude decreases.
Roll Limit Indicator
ESP Engage (45°)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Roll Limit Indicator
ESP Engage (45°)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-41 ESP Roll Engagement Indication (ESP NOT Engaged)
ESP Disengage (30°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 46°
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ESP Engage (45°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 44°
Before ESP Engage
After ESP Engage
APPENDICES
Figure 8-42 Roll Increasing to ESP Engagement
INDEX
Once engaged, ESP force will be applied between 30° and 75°, as illustrated in the following figure. The
force increases as roll attitude increases and decreases as roll attitude decreases. The applied force is intended
to encourage pilot input that returns the airplane to a more normal roll attitude. As roll attitude decreases, ESP
will disengage at 30°.
438
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
10º
0º
10º
20º
5º
30
º
EIS
60
º
90º
90º
75º
75º
º
60
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
º
45
4
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
º
30
20º
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-43 ESP Roll Operating Range When Engaged
(Force Increases as Roll Increases & Decreases as Roll Decreases)
ESP is automatically disengaged if the aircraft reaches the autopilot roll engagement attitude limit of 75°.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ESP Upper Disengage Limit (75°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 74°
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-44 Roll Attitude Autopilot Engagement Limit (ESP Engaged)
PITCH ENGAGEMENT
APPENDICES
ESP engages at 17° nose-up and 15° nose-down. Once ESP is engaged, it will apply increasing opposing
force between 17° and 20° nose-up and between 15° and 18° nose-down, as indicated in the following figure.
Maximum opposing force is applied between 20° and 50° nose-up and between 18° and 50° nose-down. ESP
disengages when 50° is exceeded in a nose-up or nose-down attitude.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
With ESP engaged, and the aircraft in a nose-up condition, opposing force steadily decreases from 20° noseup to 15° nose-up as aircraft pitch moves toward zero degrees. ESP disengages at 15° nose-up. With ESP
engaged, and the aircraft in a nose-down condition, opposing force steadily decreases from 18° nose-down to
13° nose-down as aircraft pitch moves toward zero degrees. ESP disengages at 13° nose-down.
439
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The opposing force increases or decreases depending on the pitch angle and the direction of pitch travel. This
force is intended to encourage movement in the pitch axis in the direction of the normal pitch attitude range
for the aircraft.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
50˚
45˚
45˚
40˚
40˚
35˚
30˚
35˚
30˚
ESP
50˚
25˚
25˚
20˚
20˚
15˚
15˚
10˚
10˚
5˚
5˚
0˚
0˚
5˚
5˚
10˚
10˚
15˚
15˚
20˚
20˚
25˚
25˚
30˚
35˚
30˚
ESP
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
There are no indications marking the pitch ESP engage and disengage limits in these nose-up/nose-down
conditions.
35˚
40˚
40˚
45˚
45˚
50˚
50˚
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-45 - ESP Pitch Operating Range When Engaged
(Force Increases as Pitch Increases & Decreases as Pitch Decreases)
440
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ANGLE OF ATTACK PROTECTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Angle of attack protection is provided as part of the ESP feature. ESP force may be applied if a stall warning
condition is imminent. In this condition, the Pitch Limit Indicator will be initially displayed 4° below this
computed pitch attitude. When pitch attitude equals that indicated by the Pitch Limit Indicator, ESP will
engage, applying a force in the direction necessary to lower the nose of the aircraft.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pitch Limit Indicator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-46 Pitch Limit Indicator
HIGH AIRSPEED PROTECTION
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Exceeding Vmo/Mmo will result in ESP applying force to raise the nose of the aircraft. When the high
airspeed condition is remedied, ESP force is no longer applied.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
441
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.8 ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The optional checklists presented here are for example only and may differ from checklists available
for the DA40NG. The information described in this section is not intended to replace the checklist information
described in the POH or the Pilot Safety and Warning Supplements document.
NOTE: Garmin is not responsible for the content of checklists. Checklists are created by the aircraft
EIS
manufacturer. Modifications or updates to the checklists are coordinated through the aircraft manufacturer.
The user cannot edit these checklists.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The MFD is able to display optional electronic checklists which allow a pilot to quickly find the proper procedure
on the ground and during each phase of flight. The system accesses the checklists from an SD card inserted into
the bezel slot. If the SD card contains an invalid checklist file or no checklist, the Power-up Page messages display
‘Checklist File: Invalid’ or ‘Checklist File: N/A’ (not available) and the Checklist Softkey is not available.
Accessing and navigating checklists:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) From any page on the MFD (except the EIS Pages), press the Checklist Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to
select the Checklist Page.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Group’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired procedure and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Checklist’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key. The selected checklist item is
indicated with white text surrounded by a white box.
6) Press the ENT Key or Check Softkey to check the selected checklist item. The line item turns green and a
checkmark is placed in the associated box. The next line item is automatically selected for checking.
AFCS
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
Press the CLR Key or Uncheck Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be checked, ‘*Checklist Not Finished*’ will be
displayed in yellow text.
8) Press the ENT Key. ‘Go To Next Checklist?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
APPENDICES
9) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
INDEX
10) Press the Exit Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
442
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Accessing emergency procedures:
1) From any page on the MFD (except the EIS Pages), press the Checklist Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to
select the Checklist Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the EMER Softkey.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired emergency checklist and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key or Check Softkey to check the selected emergency checklist item. The line item turns green
and a checkmark is placed in the box next to it. The next line item is automatically highlighted for checking.
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
EIS
Press the CLR Key or Uncheck Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be checked, ‘*Checklist Not Finished*’ will be
displayed in yellow text.
6) Press the ENT Key. ‘Go To Next Checklist?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
7) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the Return Softkey to return to the previous checklist.
9) Press the Exit Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
443
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.9 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SIRIUSXM DATA LINK RECEIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page for
GDL 69A SXM status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the
GDL 69A SXM the status is marked with a red X.
Selecting the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page:
EIS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page.
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Ensure the installed Data Link Receiver or Iridium Transceiver has an active subscription or account
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver or
Iridium Transceiver
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Ensure that nothing is plugged into the MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2 jacks because that would prevent SiriusXM
radio from being heard
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
Message
Message Location
CHECK ANTENNA
XM Information Page (MFD)
UPDATING
XM Information Page (MFD)
XM Information Page Weather Datalink Page Loss of signal; signal strength too low for
(MFD)
receiver
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
NO SIGNAL
LOADING
XM Radio Page (MFD)
Acquiring channel audio or information
OFF AIR
XM Radio Page (MFD)
Channel not in service
--------
XM Radio Page (MFD)
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILED
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
ACTIVATION REQUIRED
XM Information Page (MFD)
Missing channel information
No communication from Data Link Receiver
within last 5 minutes
SiriusXM subscription is not activated
DETECTING ACTIVATION
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
WAITING FOR DATA...
SiriusXM subscription is activating.
SiriusXM subscription confirmed downloading
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
weather data.
Table 8-5 GDL 69A SXM Data Link Receiver Messages
INDEX
APPENDICES
Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service
required
Data Link Receiver updating encryption code
444
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
NOTE: The Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) supersedes information found in this document.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Alerting System conveys alerts to the pilot using a combination of the following items:
EIS
• Annunciation Window: The Annunciation Window displays abbreviated annunciation text. Text color is based
on alert levels described later in the Alert Levels Definitions section. The Annunciation Window is located to the
right of the Altitude and Vertical Speed boxes on the display. All annunciations can be displayed simultaneously
in the Annunciation Window. A white horizontal line separates annunciations that are acknowledged from
annunciations that are not yet acknowledged. Higher priority annunciations are displayed toward the top of
the window. Lower priority annunciations are displayed toward the bottom of the window.
System
Annunciation
Red‘X’
Annunciation
Window
Annunciation
Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
System
Annunciation
Amber 'X'
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
System
Annunciation
Red ‘X’
System
Annunciation
Amber 'X'
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Alerts Window: The Alerts Window displays alert text messages (Warning, Caution, Advisory). Up to 64
prioritized alert messages can be displayed in the Alerts Window. Pressing the Alerts Softkey displays the Alerts
Window. Pressing the Alerts Softkey a second time removes the Alerts Window from the display. When the
Alerts Window is displayed, the pilot can use the large FMS Knob to scroll through the alert message list.
Alerts Window
AFCS
Figure A-1 Alerting System
Alerts Softkey Annunciation
after acknowledgement
Figure A-2 Alerting System
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Alerts Softkey
Annunciation
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
445
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Softkey Annunciation: During certain alerts, the Alerts Softkey may appear as a flashing annunciation to
accompany an alert. The Alerts Softkey assumes a new label consistent with the alert level (Warning, Caution,
or Advisory). By pressing the softkey annunciation, the pilot acknowledges awareness of the alert and causes
the Alerts Window to display. The softkey then returns to the previous Alerts label. If alerts are still present, the
Alerts label will be displayed in inverse video (white background with black text). Pressing the Alerts softkey
when alerts are present will allow the pilot to view the Alerts window.
• Audio Alerting System: The system issues audio alert tones when specific system conditions are met. See
the Alert Level Definitions Section for more information. The annunciation tone may be tested from the Aux System Status Page.
EIS
Testing the system annunciation tone:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the Aux - System Status Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Select the ANN Test Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ALERT LEVEL DEFINITIONS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.
• Warning: This level of alert requires immediate pilot attention. A warning alert is annunciated in red in the
Annunciation Window and is accompanied by a continuous aural tone. A warning alert is also accompanied
by a flashing Warning Softkey annunciation, as shown in Figure A-3. Pressing the Warning Softkey
acknowledges the presence of the warning alert and stops the aural tone, if applicable.
The Alerting System uses four alert levels.
AFCS
• Caution: This level of alert indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may require
pilot intervention. A caution alert is annunciated in amber in the Annunciation Window and is accompanied
by a single aural tone. A caution alert is also accompanied by a flashing Caution Softkey, as shown in Figure
A-4. Pressing the Caution Softkey acknowledges the presence of the caution alert.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Advisory: This level of alert provides general information to the pilot. A message advisory alert is annunciated
in white in the Annunciation Window. Advisory alerts issue an Advisory Softkey annunciation, as shown
in Figure A-5. Pressing the Advisory Softkey acknowledges the presence of the message advisory alert and
displays the alert text message in the Alerts Window.
Figure A-4 Caution Softkey
Annunciation
Figure A-5 Advisory Softkey
Annunciation
INDEX
Figure A-3 Warning Softkey
Annunciation
446
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM MESSAGE ADVISORY ANNUNCIATIONS
NOTE: Upon power-up, certain windows remain invalid as system equipment begins to initialize. All windows
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window continues to remain flagged, the
system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
EIS
When a new message is issued, the Message Softkey flashes to alert the flight crew. It continues to flash
until acknowledged by pressing the softkey. Active messages are displayed in the Alerts window in white text.
Messages that have become inactive change to gray text. The Message Softkey flashes again if the state of a
displayed message changes or a new message is displayed. Inactive messages can be removed from the Alerts
Window by pressing the Alerts Softkey.
System Messages Advisories convey messages to the flight crew regarding problems with the system. Typically,
a large red or amber ‘X’ appears in a window when a related LRU fails or detects invalid data.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
System
Annunciation
Amber 'X'
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following section describes various system message advisory annunciations. Refer to the AFM/POH for
additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
System
Annunciation
Amber 'X'
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
System
Annunciation
Red ‘X’
System
Annunciation
Red ‘X’
Alerts
Window
AFCS
Figure A-6 System Message Softkey
Alerts Annunciation
(After softkey is
pressed)
Figure A-7 System Messages in Alerts Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Message Annunciation
(Prior to softkey being
pressed)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
447
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
WARNING ANNUNCIATIONS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Annunciation Window Text
ALTN AMPS
ALTN FAIL
DOOR OPEN
ENG TEMP
FUEL PRES
GBOX TEMP
L FUEL TEMP
OIL PRES
OIL TEMP
R FUEL TEMP
STARTER
Alerts Window Message
Engine alternator output is > 70 amps.
Engine alternator has failed.
Front or rear door is not closed.
Engine coolant temp is >105 deg. C.
Engine fuel pressure is low.
Engine gearbox temp is > 120 deg. C.
Left fuel temp is greater than 60 deg. C.
Engine oil pressure is less than 0.9 bar.
Engine oil temp is greater than 140 deg. C.
Right fuel temp is greater than 60 deg. C.
Engine starter is engaged.
Audio Alert
Continuous Aural Tone
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CAUTION ANNUNCIATIONS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Annunciation Window Text
COOL LVL
ECU A FAIL
ECU B FAIL
FUEL LOW
VOLTS LOW
PITOT FAIL
PITOT HT OFF
Alerts Window Message
Engine coolant level is low.
Engine ECU A has failed.
Engine ECU B has failed.
Left fuel quantity is low
Bus voltage is less than 25 volts.
Pitot heat has failed.
Pitot heat is off.
Audio Alert
Single Aural Tone
AFCS
ADVISORY ANNUNCIATIONS
Audio Alert
None
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Annunciation Window Text
Alerts Window Message
GLOW ON
Engine glow plug active.
FUEL XFER
Fuel transfer in progress
448
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VOICE ALERTS
The following audio alerts are announced by the system using a voice of male or female gender.
Alert Trigger
Issued when the aircraft transitions through the minimum descent altitude/decision height (MDA/DH)
Aircraft is one minute from Top of Descent - issued only when vertical navigation is enabled
TIS voice alert - issued when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued
TIS voice alert - issued when the TIStraffic system fails or cannot communicate
TAS voice alert - issued when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued
TAS voice alert - issued when the TAS passes a pilot-initiated self test
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
TAS voice alert - issued when the TAS fails a pilot-initiated self test
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Voice Alert
“Minimums, Minimums”
“Vertical Track”
“Traffic”
“Traffic Not Available”
“Traffic, Traffic”
“Traffic Advisory System
Test Passed”
“Traffic Advisory System
Test Failed”
Selecting the audio alert voice:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the voice in the Audio Alert Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired voice, press the ENT Key.
SYSTEM MESSAGE ADVISORIES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: This section provides information regarding message advisories that may be displayed by the system.
Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities must be
considered when responding to a message.
Comments
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
The GDC1 should be serviced..
The GDC2 should be serviced.
APPENDICES
Message Advisory
ABORT APR – Loss of GPS navigation.
Abort approach.
ADC1 SERVICE – ADC1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
ADC2 SERVICE – ADC1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
AHRS1 CAL – AHRS1 calibration version
error. Srvc req’d.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using backup
GPS source.
AFCS
This section describes various system message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU or LRU
function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red or amber ‘X’ annunciation
as shown previously in the System Message Annunciations section.
The #1 AHRS calibration version error. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The system
should be serviced when possible.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
449
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
any GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
backup GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 operating
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
AHRS1 SRVC – AHRS1 Magnetic-field
model needs update.
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving
airspeed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
APR DWNGRADE – Approach
downgraded.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead less
than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less
than 2 nm.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
APR INACTV – Approach is not active.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
AUDIO MANIFEST - Audio software
mismatch, communication halted.
CHECK CRS – Database course for
LOC2 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
CNFG MODULE – PFD1 configuration
module is inoperative.
COM1 CONFIG – COM1 config error.
Config service req’d.
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
APPENDICES
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
INDEX
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM2 CONFIG – COM2 config error.
Config service req’d.
450
Comments
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
limitations. The system system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
when practical.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The system should be
serviced.
Use LNAV minima when approach is downgraded.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace within
10 minutes.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active. Activate approach
when required.
The GIA 63W has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
Selected course for LOC2 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
degrees.
The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed. The system should be
serviced.
The COM1 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system system should be serviced
The COM1 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or “pressed”) position.
Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The COM1 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) position. Press the
transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
The system has detected a failure in COM1. COM1 may still be usable. The system
should be serviced when possible.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1. The transmitter
operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The COM2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message Advisory
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Comments
The COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or “pressed”) position.
Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote
The COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) position. Press the
transfer key is stuck.
transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs
The system has detected a failure in COM2. COM2 may still be usable. The system
service. Return unit for repair.
should be serviced when possible.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM2. The transmitter
Reducing transmitter power.
operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
DATA LOST – Pilot stored data was
The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings. The
lost. Recheck settings.
pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFD with preferred settings, if desired.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have been manually
Verify user modified procedures.
edited. This alert is issued only after an navigation database update. Verify that the
user-modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and up to date.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent
Verify stored airways.
with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after an navigation database
update. Verify use of airways in stored flight plans and reload airways as needed.
DB MISMATCH – Navigation
The PFD and MFD have different navigation database versions or types installed.
database mismatch. Xtalk is off.
Crossfill is off. Check the Aux-System Status Page to determine versions or regions.
Also, check the Aux-System Status Page for a database synchronization function not
completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle database The PFD and MFD have different obstacle database versions or types installed. Check
mismatch.
the Aux-System Status Page to determine versions or regions. Also, check the AuxSystem Status Page for a database synchronization function not completed. After
synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Standby Navigation The PFD and MFD have different standby navigation database versions or types
database mismatch.
installed. Check the Aux-System Status Page to determine versions or regions. Also,
check the Aux-System Status Page for a database synchronization function not
completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database
The PFD and MFD have different terrain database versions or types installed. Check
mismatch.
the Aux-System Status Page to determine versions or regions. Also, check the AuxSystem Status Page for a database synchronization function not completed. After
synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
ESP CONFIG– ESP config error. Config ESP is not configured properly. The system should be serviced.
service req’d.
ESP DEGRADE – ESP IAS mode is
IAS mode of ESP is inoperative. The system should be serviced.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
inoperative.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
The ESP function has failed and is inoperative. The system should be serviced.
Electronic Stability and Protection has been disabled on the Aux-System Setup 2 page.
INDEX
ESP FAIL – ESP is inoperative.
ESP OFF – ESP selected off.
FAILED PATH – A data path has
failed.
A data path connected to the GDU or the GIA 63W has failed.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
451
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
Comments
This occurs when a newly installed navigation database eliminates an obsolete
approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed
from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan waypoint Upon power-up, the system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is locked. This
is locked.
occurs when an navigation database update eliminates an obsolete waypoint. The
flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message. This can also
occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted.
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database,
OR
update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1. The system should be serviced.
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs service. A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1. The receiver may still be
Return unit for repair.
available. The system should be serviced when possible.
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 2. The system should be serviced.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs service. A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 2. The receiver may still be
Return unit for repair.
available. The system should be serviced when possible.
GDC1 MANIFEST – GDC1 software
The GDC 72 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69 config
GDL 69A SXM configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
error. Config service req’d.
memory. The system system should be serviced.
GDL69 FAIL – GDL 69 has failed.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 69A SXM. The receiver is unavailable. The
system system should be serviced.
GDL69 MANIFEST – GDL software
The 69A SXM has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 config error.
The GEA1 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
Config service req’d.
The system should be serviced.
GEA1 MANIFEST – GEA1 software
The #1 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too far North/ The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading is
South, no magnetic compass.
flagged as invalid.
GFC MANIFEST – GFC software
Incorrect servo software is installed, or gain settings are incorrect.
mismatch, communication halted.
GIA FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for
The cooing fan in the GIAs has failed. The system should be serviced.
the GIAs is inoperative.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio config
The GIA1 have an error in the audio configuration. The system should be serviced.
error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 config error.
The GIA1 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
Config service req’d.
system should be serviced.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 temperature The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
too low.
warm up to operating temperature.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over
The GIA1 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
temperature.
GIA1 MANIFEST – GIA1 software
The GIA1 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been
truncated.
452
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
The GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
The GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to warm up to
operating temperature.
The GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The system should be serviced.
The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable. The
system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio functions may
still be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The system should be serviced
when possible.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellites.
AFCS
Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
The #1 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GSR 56. The transceiver is unavailable. The system
should be serviced.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
The GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The system should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GTX MANIFEST – GTX software
mismatch, communication halted.
HDG FAULT – AHRS1 magnetometer
fault has occurred.
The GIA1 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The system should be serviced.
EIS
GMU1 MANIFEST – GMU1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Insufficient satellites.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Position error.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. GPS fail.
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GRS1 MANIFEST – GRS1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GSR1 FAIL – GSR1 has failed.
Comments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GMA1 MANIFEST – GMA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message Advisory
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over
temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 temperature
too low.
GIA2 MANIFEST – GIA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is inoperative.
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
A fault has occurred in the #1 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
GPS for backup mode operation. The system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
453
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA1 communication
halted.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA2 communication
halted.
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
INVALID ADM – Invalid ADM: ATN
communication halted.
LOCKED FPL – Cannot navigate
locked flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
LOI – GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck
with other NAVS.
LRG MAG VAR – Verify all course
angles.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MANIFEST – MFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – PFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MFD FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for
the MFD is inoperative..
MFD1 CARD 1 ERR – Card 1 is
invalid.
MFD1 CARD 1 REM – Card 1 was
removed. Reinsert card.
MFD1 CARD 2 ERR – Card 2 is
invalid.
MFD1 CARD 2 REM – Card 2 was
removed. Reinsert card.
MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Airport
Directory database error exists.
INDEX
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 basemap
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Chartview
database error exists.
454
Comments
A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is SBAS capable.
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Data link avionics were not configured correctly and therefore will not be able to
communicate with the ground network.
This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains
locked waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan with
current waypoint.
GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight.
The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for
geographic locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic course angles may
differ from the actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.
The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The cooing fan in the MFD has failed. The system should be serviced.
The SD card in the top card slot of the specified MFD contains invalid data.
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the specified MFD. The SD card
needs to be reinserted.
The SD card in the bottom card slot of the specified MFD contains invalid data.
The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the specified MFD. The SD
card needs to be reinserted.
The MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
The MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming the display.
If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the Airport Directory database. Ensure that the data
card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the basemap database.
The MFD detected a failure in the ChartView database (optional feature). Ensure that
the data card is properly inserted. data card. If problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
The MFD self-test has detected a problem. The system should be serviced.
A key is stuck on the MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it several
times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
AFCS
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database missing.
MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
MFD1 KEYSTK – MFD1 [key name]
is stuck.
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
The MFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database. Ensure that the data card
is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the terrain card is
properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the terrain card is
properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database error exists.
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database error exists.
EIS
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
Comments
The MFD detected a failure in the FliteCharts database (optional feature). Ensure that
the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in more than one database. If problem persists, the
system should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the navigation database. Attempt to reload the
navigation database. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the obstacle database. Ensure that the data card
is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 multiple
database errors exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 navigation
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message Advisory
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 FliteCharts
database error exists.
The MFD voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
INDEX
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
APPENDICES
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The remote NAV1 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) state. Press
the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs service. A failure has been detected in the NAV1 receiver. The receiver may still be available.
Return unit for repair.
The system should be serviced.
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote
The remote NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) state. Press
transfer key is stuck.
the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs service. A failure has been detected in the NAV2 receiver. The receiver may still be available.
Return unit for repair.
The system should be serviced.
NON WGS84 WPT – Do not use GPS The position of the selected waypoint [xxxx] is not calculated based on the WGS84
for navigation to [xxxx]
map reference datum and may be positioned in error as displayed. Do not use GPS to
navigate to the selected non-WGS84 waypoint..
455
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
PFD1 CARD 1 ERR – Card 1 is invalid.
PFD1 CARD 1 REM – Card 1 was
removed. Reinsert card.
PFD1 CARD 2 ERR – Card 2 is invalid.
PFD1 CARD 2 REM – Card 2 was
removed. Reinsert card.
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 basemap
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 multiple
database errors exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1
navigation database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
database error exists.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
database missing.
PFD FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for
the PFD is inoperative.
PFD1 KEYSTK – PFD1 [key name] is
stuck.
PFD1 SERVICE – PFD1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
invalid leg type.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
past IAF.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
bad geometry.
456
Comments
The SD card in the top card slot of the specified PFD contains invalid data.
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the specified PFD. The SD card
needs to be reinserted.
The SD card in the bottom card slot of the specified PFD contains invalid data.
The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the specified PFD. The SD card
needs to be reinserted.
The PFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
The PFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming the display.
If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The PFD detected a failure in the basemap database.
The PFD detected a failure in more than one database. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The PFD detected a failure in the navigation database. Attempt to reload the
navigation database. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
The PFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database. Ensure that the data card is
properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
The PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the terrain card is
properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
The cooing fan in the PFD has failed. The system should be serviced.
A key is stuck on the PFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it several
times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
The PFD self-test has detected a problem. The system should be serviced.
The PFD1 voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
Invalid leg type for parallel offset.
IAF waypoint for parallel offset has been passed.
Bad parallel track geometry.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
Stormscope has failed. The system should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Synthetic Vision is disabled because the aircraft is not within the boundaries of the
installed terrain database.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution (4.9 arcsecond or better) is not currently installed.
The MFD and PFD have different software versions installed. The system should be
serviced.
The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.
The system is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The traffic device
should be serviced.
The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum flight path
angle and vertical speed constraints. The system automatically transitions to the next
vertical waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The current crosstrack exceeds the limit, causing vertical deviation to go invalid.
AFCS
The current track angle error exceeds the limit, causing the vertical deviation to go
invalid.
A parallel course has been selected, causing the vertical deviation to go invalid.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn, vector, or other unsupported leg
type prior to the active vertical waypoint. This prevents vertical guidance to the active
vertical waypoint.
Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
APPENDICES
A failure has been detected in the 1090 receiver.
ADS-B is inoperative. The transponder may not be receiving a valid GPS position.
Other transponder functions may be available. Service when possible.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
EIS
WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at waypoint
-[xxxx]
XPDR1 ADS-B 1090 – Datalink:
ADS-B 1090 receiver has failed.
XPDR1 ADS-B FAIL – Transponder:
XPDR1 is unable to transmit ADS-B
messages.
Comments
Message criteria entered by the user.
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate NAV
receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
The system notifies the pilot to set the Nav Angle units on the Avionics Settings Screen
to Magnetic.
The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the CDI to
the correct NAV receiver.
The system notifies the pilot to set the Nav Angle units on the Avionics Settings Screen
to True.
A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
VNV UNAVAILABLE. – Excessive
crosstrack error.
VNV UNAVAILABLE. – Excessive track
angle error.
VNV UNAVAILABLE. – Parallel course
selected.
VNV UNAVAILABLE. – Unsupported
leg type in flight plan.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message Advisory
SCHEDULER [#] – <message>.
SLCT FREQ – Select appropriate
frequency for approach.
SLCT MAG– Select MAGNETIC NAV
ANGLE display units.
SLCT NAV – Select NAV on CDI for
approach.
SLCT NON-MAG– Select alternate
NAV ANGLE display units.
STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead.
STRMSCP FAIL – Stormscope has
failed.
SVT DISABLED – Out of available
terrain region.
SVT DISABLED – Terrain DB
resolution too low.
SW MISMATCH – GDU software
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has expired.
TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic device has
failed.
UNABLE V WPT – Can’t reach current
vertical waypoint.
457
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
Comments
The transponder is not able to receive position information.
The Transponder is incapable of processing traffic information.
A failure has been detected in the UAT receiver.
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
ADS-B Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA) is unavailable.
There is no communication with the #1 or #2 transponder.
The transponder is unable to receive ADS-B information.
The transponder is unable to receive FIS-B weather information.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in XPDR1. The transmitter
operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
Unable to provide pressure altitude information.
The #1 transponder should be serviced when possible.
The system has detected an under temperature condition in XPDR1. The transmitter
operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The MFD and PFD are not communicating with each other. The system should be
serviced.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
XPDR1 ADS-B NO POS –
Transponder: ADS-B is not transmitting
position.
XPDR1 ADS-B TRFC – Transponder:
ADS-B traffic has failed
XPDR1 ADS-B UAT – Datalink:
ADS-B in UAT receiver has failed.
XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 config error.
Config service req’d.
XPDR1 CSA FAIL - Traffic: ADS-B In
traffic alerting has failed.
XPDR1 FAIL – XPDR1 is inoperative.
XPDR1 FAULT – Datalink: ADSB-B in
has failed.
XPDR1 FIS-B WX – Datalink: FIS-B
Weather has failed.
XPDR1 OVER TEMP - Transponder:
Transponder over temp.
XPDR1 PRES ALT –Transponder:
ADS-B no pressure altitude.
XPDR1 SRVC – XPDR1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
XPDR1 UNDER TEMP - Transponder:
Transponder under temp.
XTALK ERROR – A flight display
crosstalk error has occurred.
458
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DATABASE MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Database information is obtained from third party sources. Inaccuracies in the data may be discovered from
time to time. Garmin communicates this information by issuing a Database Alert. These notifications are available
on http://fly.garmin.com.
EIS
Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information. These
discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles and fixes;
or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go to http://fly.
garmin.com and select Aviation Data Error Report.
The system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load various types of data. For basic flight operations, SD cards
are required for database storage as well as database updates. Not all SD cards are compatible with the system.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Loading a database in the system prior to its effective date will result in the expiration date on the
power-up screen and the effective date on the Aux – Databases Page being displayed in amber.
LOADING UPDATED DATABASES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CAUTION: Never disconnect power to the system when loading a database. Power interruption during the
database loading process could result in maintenance being required to reboot the system.
NOTE: When loading database updates, the ‘DB Mismatch’ system messages will be displayed until
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
database synchronization is complete, followed by turning system power off, then on. Synchronization can
be monitored on the Aux-Database Page.
AFCS
All databases are updated through a single SD card in the bottom slot of the MFD. When the card is inserted,
the databases on the card will be copied to standby and synchronized across all powered, configured units.
After update, the card is removed and the databases are stored on the system. When in standby, databases are
not immediately available for use, but stored to be activated at a later time.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The cycles and dates for both standby and active databases are displayed on the “Aux – Databases” page on
the MFD. Any active databases with expiration dates in the past will be highlighted with amber text. When
an expired active database has a standby database that is ready to become effective, a cyan double-sided arrow
will be displayed between the database cycles. When this arrow is visible, it indicates that the standby and
active databases in that row will be switched on the next power cycle, activating the current standby database.
Databases can also be manually selected (or deselected) by highlighting a list item and pressing the ENT key,
provided a valid, verified standby database is present.
APPENDICES
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
459
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
The navigation database contains the aeronautical data used by the system for the flight management and
flight planning functions. Included is detailed data for waypoints, procedures (arrivals, departures, approaches),
and airways. The navigation database is updated every 28 days.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and towns.
It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is no expiration date.
The terrain database contains the terrain mapping data. These databases are updated periodically and have
no expiration date.
EIS
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft.
Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all
obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is
updated on a 56-day cycle.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin
accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of
the data.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the U.S. or
worldwide, respectively. The AOPA Directory offers detailed information for over 5,300 U. S. airports, along
with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs. These databases are updated every 56 days. The
AC-U-KWIK Directory offers detailed information for more than 8,000 airports with runways longer than 3,000
feet worldwide.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following
ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways,
ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States only. This database is updated on a
28-day cycle. If not updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no longer function.
AFCS
The ChartView database is updated on a 14-day cycle. If the ChartView database is not updated within 70
days of the expiration date, ChartView will no longer function. The ChartView database must be purchased
directly from Jeppesen, but can be updated at www.jeppesen.com or www.flygarmin.com.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The IFR/VFR charts database contains VFR and IFR raster charts. The VFR Charts are digital representations
of the Sectional Aeronautical Charts and Terminal Area Charts. The IFR Charts include both IFR High (designed
for navigation at or above 18,000 ft) and IFR Low (designed for navigation below 18,000 ft). IFR/VFR Charts
are updated every 28 days except for Canadian IFR/VFR Charts which are updated every 56 days.
APPENDICES
UPDATING DATABASES
Database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Aviation Databases’ section
of the Garmin website (fly.garmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded from the website, a
PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the new databases onto an
existing Supplemental Data Card. Equipment required to perform the update is as follows:
INDEX
• Windows-compatible PC computer
• SD Card Reader: SanDisk SDDR-93, SanDisk SDDR-99, Verbatim #96504, or equivalent
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin website
• Supplemental SD Cards
460
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Updating Databases:
1) With the system OFF, remove an SD Card from the bottom SD card slot of the MFD.
2) Download the databases and install them on an SD card.
3) Put the SD Card in the bottom SD card slot of the MFD.
4) Turn the system ON.
EIS
5) Press the ENT Key or the right most softkey on MFD display to acknowledge the startup screen.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux page group on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Database page group on the MFD.
8) Monitor the Sync Status on the Database page. Wait for all databases to complete syncing, indicated by ‘Sync
Complete’ being displayed. A cyan double arrow will appear between the Standby and Active columns to show
which Standby databases will be transferred to Active at the next power cycle.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure B-1 Aux - Databases Page before Activation of Standby Databases
APPENDICES
9) Verify the correct database cycle information is shown in the Standby Database column.
10) Remove power from the system.
11) Remove the SD card from the bottom slot of the MFD.
12) After restarting the system, turn the large FMS Knob and select the Aux page group on the MFD.
INDEX
13) Turn the small FMS Knob and select the Databases page.
14) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database column.
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
461
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
Figure B-2 Aux - Databases Page with Updated Databases
15) To view database information for an individual display, press and then turn the FMS Knob to select the database,
and then press the Details Softkey. Press the ENT Key or the FMS Knob to exit.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
16) To manually activate any databases that did not transfer to the active column:
a) Press the FMS Knob. The first database title on the screen will be selected.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob as necessary to select the database title.
AFCS
c) Press the ENT Key. A cyan double-sided arrow will appear indicating that the standby database will become
active.
d) Remove and reapply power to the system.
e) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database column.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MAGNETIC FIELD VARIATION DATABASE UPDATE
INDEX
APPENDICES
A copy of the current magnetic field variation database (MV DB) is included with the navigation database.
At startup, the system compares this version of the MV DB with that presently being used by the AHRS. If the
system determines the MV DB needs to be updated, a prompt is displayed on the Navigation Map Page.
Figure B-3 Magnetic Field Variation Database Update Prompt
462
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Loading the magnetic field variation database update:
With ‘OK’ highlighted, as seen in Figure B-3, press the ENT Key on the MFD. A progress monitor is displayed
as shown in Figure B-4. When the upload is complete, the system is ready for use.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure B-4 Uploading Database
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
463
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
Blank Page
464
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GARMIN AVIATION GLOSSARY
ACARS
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Degrees Celsius
Center Runway
Course to Altitude Leg
Calibrated
AFCS
°C
C
CA
CAL
BFO
BKSP
Bluetooth
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
BOC
BOD
BRG
Both Runways
Barometric Altitude
Barometer, Barometric
Battery
Backcourse
The compass direction from the present
position to a destination waypoint.
Beat Frequency Oscillator
Backspace
Wireless standard for data exchange over
short distances
Bottom of Climb
Bottom of Descent
see also Bearing
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
B
B ALT
BARO
BATT
BC
Bearing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Approach
Airport, Aerodrome
Airport Signs
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
Airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center
Arrival
Airspeed
Aviation Support Branch
Automated Surface Observing System
Auto Throttle
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
Automatic Terminal Information Service
Along Track
Automatic Sequence
Auxiliary
Average
Aviation VHF Link Control
Automated Weather Observing System
EIS
190-02257-00 Rev. A
APPR, APR
APT
APTSIGNS
ARINC
ARSPC
ARTCC
ARV
AS
ASB
ASOS
AT
ATC
ATCRBS
ATIS
ATK
AUTOSEQ
AUX
AVG
AVLC
AWOS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airborne Communications Addressing
and Reporting System
ACC
Accuracy
ACT, ACTV
Active, Activate, Altitude Compensated
Tilt
ADAHRS
Air Data, Attitude and Heading Reference
System
ADC
Air Data Computer
ADF
Automatic Direction Finder
ADI
Attitude Direction Indicator
ADIZ
Air Defense Identification Zone
ADS-B
Automatic Dependent SurveillanceBroadcast
ADS-R
Automatic Dependent SurveillanceRebroadcast
AF
Arc to Fix Leg
AFCS
Automatic Flight Control System
AFM
Airplane Flight Manual
AFMS
Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
AFRM
Airframe
AGL
Above Ground Level
AHRS
Attitude and Heading Reference System
AIM
Aeronautical Information Manual
AIRB
Airborne
AIRMET
Airman’s Meteorological Information
AIRREP
Air Reports
ALRT
Alert
ALT
Altitude
ALT, ALTN
Alternator
ALTS
Selected Altitude Capture Mode
ALTV
VNAV Altitude Capture Mode
AMPS
Amperes
ANNUNC/ANN Annunciation/Annunciator
ANT
Antenna
AOA
Angle of Attack, ACARS Over AVLC
AOC
Aeronautical Operational Control
AOG
Aircraft On Ground
AOPA
Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association
AP
Autopilot
AP DISC
Autopilot Disconnect
465
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CALC
Calibrated
Airspeed
CAS
CD
CDI
CDU
CF
CG
CH, CHNL
CHT
CHKLIST
CI
CLD
CLR
CM
CMC
CN
CNS
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CO
COM
CONFIG
COOL
COPLT
Course
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Course to
Steer
INDEX
APPENDICES
CPDLC
CPL
CR
CRG
CRNT
Crosstrack
Error
CRS
CRSR
CSA
466
Calculator
Indicated airspeed corrected for
installation and instrument errors.
Crew Alerting System
Course to DME Distance Leg
Course Deviation Indicator
Control Display Unit
Course to Fix Leg
Center of Gravity
Channel
Cylinder Head Temperature
Checklist
Course to Intercept Leg
Cloud
Clear
Centimeter
Central Maintenance Computer
Canada
Communication, Navigation, &
Surveillance
Carbon Monoxide
Communication Radio
Configuration
Coolant
Copilot
The line between two points to be
followed by the aircraft.
The recommended direction to steer
in order to reduce course error or stay
on course. Provides the most efficient
heading to get back to the desired course
and proceed along the flight plan.
Controller Pilot Datalink Communications
Couple
Course to Radial Leg
Cockpit Reference Guide
Current
The distance the aircraft is off a desired
course in either direction, left or right.
see also Course, Course to Steer
Cursor
Conflict Situational Awareness
CSC
CTA
CTR
CTRL
Cumulative,
CUM
CVDR
CVR
CVRG
CWS
CYL
Current Speed Control
Control Area
Center
Control
The total of all legs in a flight plan.
D ALT
D-ATIS
DB, DBASE
dBZ
DCL
DCLTR, DECLTR
DEC FUEL
DEG
DEIC, DEICE
DEP
Desired Track
Density Altitude
Digital Automatic Terminal Info Service
Database
Decibels ‘Z’ (Radar Return)
Departure Clearance
Declutter
Decrease Fuel
Degree
De-icing
Departure
The desired course between the active
“from” and “to” waypoints.
Destination
Deviation
Direct to Fix Leg
Default
Directional Gyro
Degrade
Decision Height
A measure of GPS satellite geometry
quality on a scale of one to ten (lower
numbers equal better geometry, where
higher numbers equal poorer geometry).
Direction
Distance
The ‘great circle’ distance from the
present position to a destination
waypoint.
Datalink Lightning
Data Link System
DES, DEST
DEV
DF
DFLT
DG
DGRD
DH
Dilution of
Precision
DIR
DIS
Distance
DL LTNG
DLS
Cockpit Voice Data Recorder
Cockpit Voice Recorder
Coverage
Control Wheel Steering
Cylinder
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FMS
AFCS
FDE
FF, FFLOW
FIS-B
FISDL
FL
FLC
FLT
FLTA
FM
Degrees Fahrenheit
Course From Fix to Altitude Leg
Federal Aviation Administration
Full Authority Digital Engine Control
Final Approach Fix
Failure
Future Air Navigation System
Fixed Base Operator
Course From Fix to Distance Leg
Federal Communication Commission
Forecast
Flight Director, Course From Fix to DME
Distance Leg
Fault Detection and Exclusion
see also Fuel Flow
Flight Information Services-Broadcast
Flight Information Service Data Link
Flight Level
Flight Level Change
Flight Timer
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
Course From Fix to Manual Termination
Leg
Flight Management System
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
°F
FA
FAA
FADEC
FAF
FAIL
FANS
FBO
FC
FCC
FCST
FD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ETA
ETE
EVS
EXPIRD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Empty, East
Engine and Airframe Systems
Engine Control Unit
Emergency Descent Mode
Expected Further Clearance
A measure of fuel consumption,
expressed in distance per unit of fuel.
EGNOS
European Geostationary Navigation
Overlay Service
EGT
Exhaust Gas Temperature
EICAS
Engine Indication and Crew Alerting
System
EIS
Engine Indication System
ELEV
Elevation, Elevator
ELT
Emergency Locator Transmitter
EMER, EMERG, Emergency
EMERGCY
EMI
Electromagnetic Interference
END, ENDUR
Endurance
Endurance
Flight endurance, or total possible flight
time based on available fuel on board.
ENG
Engine
ENGD
Engaged
ENR
Enroute; ETE to Final Destination
Enroute Safe Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe
Altitude (ESA) altitude within ten miles left or right of
the desired course on an active flight
plan or direct-to.
ENT
Enter
EPE
see also Estimated Position Error
EPU
Estimated Position Uncertainty
Error
Extended Squitter
see also Enroute Safe Altitude
Electronic Stability and Protection
A measure of horizontal GPS position
error derived by satellite geometry
conditions and other factors.
The estimated time at which the aircraft
should reach the destination waypoint,
based upon current speed and track.
The estimated time it takes to reach
the destination waypoint from the
present position, based upon current
groundspeed.
see also Estimated Time of Arrival
see also Estimated Time Enroute
Enhanced Vision System
Expired
EIS
E
EAS
ECU
EDM
EFC
Efficiency
ERR
ES
ESA
ESP
Estimated
Position Error
(EPE)
Estimated
Time of Arrival
(ETA)
Estimated
Time Enroute
(ETE)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DTK
DQR
Distance Measuring Equipment
Down
see also Dilution of Precision
Departure Procedure
Departure
Dead Reckoning
Disabled
Distance To Go, Remaining distance to
last active FPL waypoint
see also Desired Track
Data Quality Requirements
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DME
DN
DOP
DP
DPRT
DR
DSBL
DTG
467
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
FOB
FOD
FPA
FPL
FPM
FREQ
FRMT
FRZ
FSM
FSS
FT
Fuel Flow
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
see also Fuel On Board
see also Fuel Over Destination
Flight Path Angle
Flight Plan
Feet Per Minute, Flight Path Marker
Frequency
Format
Freezing
Flight System Messages
Flight Service Station
foot/feet
The fuel flow rate, expressed in units of
fuel per hour.
Fuel On Board The total amount of usable fuel on board
the aircraft.
Fuel Over
The estimated fuel remaining when the
Destination
aircraft reaches the destination waypoint,
based upon current fuel flow.
FWD
Forward
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
G/S
GA
GAL, GL
GBOX
GBT
GCU
GCS
GDC
GDL
GDR
GDU
GEA
GEO
GFC
GIA
GLONASS
INDEX
GLS
GMA
GMC
468
Glideslope
Go-Around
Gallon(s)
Gearbox
Ground Based Transceiver
Garmin Control Unit
Ground Clutter Suppression
Garmin Air Data Computer
Garmin Satellite Data Link
Garmin Data Radio
Garmin Display Unit
Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit
Geographic
Garmin Flight Control
Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit
Global Orbiting Navigation Satellite
Landing System
Global Navigation Satellite Landing
System
Garmin Audio Panel System
Garmin Mode Controller
GMT
GMU
GND
GPH
GPN
GPS
GPWS
Grid MORA
(Minimum
Off—Route
Altitude)
Groundspeed
Ground Track
GRS
GS
GSA
GSD
GSL
GSR
GSU
GTC
GTS
GTX
GWX
HA
HDG
HDOP
Heading
HF
HFOM
Hg
HI
HI SENS
HM
Greenwich Mean Time
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
Ground
Gallons per Hour
Garmin Part Number
Global Positioning System
Ground Proximity Warning System
One degree latitude by one degree
longitude in size and clears the highest
elevation reference point in the grid by:
a) 1,000 feet where the highest elevation
is <5001MSL or b) 2,000 feet where the
highest elevation is >5000MSL
The velocity that the aircraft is travelling
relative to a ground position.
See Track
Garmin Reference System
Ground Speed, Glideslope
Garmin Servo Adapter
Garmin Data Concentrator
Geodetic Sea Level
Garmin Satellite Radio
Garmin Sensor Unit
Garmin Touchscreen Controller
Garmin Traffic System
Garmin Transponder
Garmin Weather Radar
Hold Terminating at Altitude Leg
see also Heading
Horizontal Dilution of Precision
The direction an aircraft is pointed,
based upon indications from a magnetic
compass or a properly set directional
gyro.
High Frequency, Hold Terminating at Fix
Leg
see also Horizontal Figure of Merit
Mercury
High
High Sensitivity
Hold with Manual Termination Leg
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
L
LAT
LBL
LB
LCD
LCL
LDA
LDG
LED
Left Over Fuel
On Board
Left, Left Runway
Latitude
Label
Pound
Liquid Crystal Display
Local
Landing Distance Available
ETA at Final Destination
Light Emitting Diode
The amount of fuel remaining on board
after the completion of one or more legs
of a flight plan or direct-to.
Left Over Fuel The amount of flight time remaining,
Reserve
based on the amount of fuel on board
after the completion of one or more legs
of a flight plan or direct-to, and a known
consumption rate.
Leg
The portion of a flight plan between two
waypoints.
LGND
Legend
LIFR
Low Instrument Flight Rules
LMM
Location Middle Marker
LNAV
Lateral Navigation
LO
Low
LOA
Letter of Authorization
LOC
Localizer
LOI
Loss of Integrity (GPS)
LOM
Location Outer Marker
LON
Longitude
LP
Localizer Performance
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Key Stuck
Kilogram
Kilohertz
Kilometer
Knot
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
INFO
IN Hg
INS
INT
INTEG
KEYSTK
KG
kHz
KM
KT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Inner Marker
Initial Approach Fix
Indicated Air Speed
Indicated Air Temperature
Integrated Avionics Unit
International Civil Aviation Organization
Intercom System
Identification/Morse Code Identifier
Identification
Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers
Initial Fix
Instrument Flight Rules
Imperial Gallon
Instrument Landing System
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
Inch
Inactive
Increase Fuel
Indicator, Indicated
Information provided by properly
calibrated and set instrumentation on the
aircraft panel.
Information
Inches of Mercury
Inertial Navigation System
Intersection(s)
Integrity (RAIM unavailable)
ITT
Infrared Data Association
International Standard Atmosphere; ISA
Relative Temperature
Inter-Turbine Temperature, Interstage
Turbine Temperature
EIS
I
IAF
IAS
IAT
IAU
ICAO
ICS
ID
IDENT, IDNT
IEEE
IF
IFR
IG
ILS
IMC
IN
INACTV
INC FUEL
IND
Indicated
Hectopascal
Horizontal Protection Level
Hour
Horizon Heading
High-Speed Data Bus
Horizontal Situation Indicator
Heat
Horizontal Uncertainty Level
Hertz (cycles per second)
IrDA, IRDA
ISA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hybrid Navigation System
A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s horizontal position.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HNS
Horizontal
Figure of
Merit
hPa
HPL
HR
HRZN HDG
HSDB
HSI
HT
HUL
Hz
469
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
LPV
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
LRU
LT
LTNG
LVL
Localizer Performance with Vertical
Guidance
Line Replaceable Unit
Left
Lightning
Level
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
M
Meter, Middle Marker, Mach
MMO (VMO)
Maximum Speed
Mach Number Mach number is the ratio of the true
airspeed to the speed of sound.
MAG
Magnetic
MAG VAR
Magnetic Variation
MAHP
Missed Approach Hold Point
MAN IN
Manifold Pressure (inches Hg)
MAN SQ
Manual Squelch
MANSEQ
Manual Sequence
MAP
Missed Approach Point
MASQ
Master Avionics Squelch
MAX
Maximum
MAXSPD
Maximum Speed (overspeed)
MB
Marker Beacon
MDA
Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude
MEPT
Manual Electric Pitch Trim
MET
Manual Electric Trim
METAR
Aviation Routine Weather Report
MFD
Multi Function Display
MFW
Multi Function Window
MGRS
Military Grid Reference System
MHz
Megahertz
MIC
Microphone
MIN
Minimum
Minimum Safe Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe
Altitude (MSA) altitude within ten miles of the aircraft
present position.
MKR
Marker Beacon
MOA
Military Operations Area
MON
Monitor
MOV
Movement
MORA
Minimum Off-Route Altitude
470
MPEL
MPM
MSA
MSAS
MSG
MSL
MT, M
mV
MVFR
N
NAV
NAVAID
NDB
NEXRAD
NM
NoPT
NOTAM
NRST
O
OAT
OBS
OFST
OOOI
Maximum Permissible Exposure Level
Meters per Minute
see also Minimum Safe Altitude
Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation
System
Message
Mean Sea Level
Meter
Millivolt(s)
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
North
Navigation
Navigation Aid
Non-Directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar
Nautical Mile(s)
No Procedure Turn Required (procedure
shall not be executed without ATC
clearance)
Notice To Airman
Nearest
OXY
Outer Marker
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
Offset
Out of the gate, Off the ground, On the
ground, and In the gate
Oxygen
P ALT
PA
PASS
PC
PDC
PFD
PG
PI
Pressure Altitude
Passenger Address, Proximity Advisory
Passenger(s)
Personal Computer
Pre-Departure Clearance
Primary Flight Display
Pilot’s Guide
Procedure Turn to Course Intercept Leg
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
INDEX
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
APPENDICES
190-02257-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
RMI
RMT
AFCS
RAM
RAT
RCVR
REF
REM
REQ
RES
REV
RF
SID
SIG/AIR
SIGMET
SIM
SLD
SLP/SKD
SMBL
SMS
SNGL
SPC
SPD
SPI
SPKR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Right, Right Runway
Resolution Advisory, Radio Altimeter
Radial
Radio Altimeter
Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring
Random Access Memory
Ram Air Temperature
Receiver
Reference
Remaining (fuel remaining), Reminder
Required
Reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
Reverse, Revision, Revise
Radio Frequency, Constant Radius Turn to
Fix Leg
Radio Magnetic Indicator
Remote
South
Selective Availability
Search and Rescue
Static Air Temperature
Satellite-Based Augmentation System
Storm Cell Identification and Tracking
Secure Digital
Second(s)
Select
Selective Calling
Sense
Surface
Standard Instrument Approach
Procedures
Standard Instrument Departure
SIGMET/AIRMET
Significant Meteorological Information
Simulator
Supercooled Large Droplet
Slip/Skid
Symbol
Short Message System
Single
Space
Speed
Special Position Identification
Speaker
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
R
RA
RAD
RAD ALT
RAIM
S
SA
SAR
SAT
SBAS
SCIT
SD
SEC
SEL, SLCT
SELCAL
SENS
SFC
SIAP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Field Elevation Pressure
Sea Level Pressure
Quantity
Area Navigation
Range
Required Navigation Performance
Runway
Roll
Read Only Memory
Revolutions Per Minute
Reset Fuel
Reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
Right
Reversionary
Reduced Vertical Separation Minimums
Receive
EIS
QFE
QNH
QTY
RNAV
RNG
RNP
RNWY, RWY
ROL
ROM
RPM
RST FUEL
RSV
RT
RVRSNRY
RVSM
RX
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Report
Pitch
Plain Old ACARS
Pilot’s Operating Handbook
Pilot’s Operating Handbook Supplement
Position
Pounds per Hour
Parts per Million
Present Position
Pressure
Procedure(s), Procedure Turn
Propeller
Proximity
Pounds per Square Inch
Procedure Turn
Parallel Track
Push-to-Talk
Power
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PIREP
PIT, PTCH
POA
POH
POHS
POS, POSN
PPH
PPM
P. POS
PRES, PRESS
PROC
PROP
PROX
PSI
PT
PTK
PTT
PWR
471
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
472
SQ
SRVC, SVC
SSID
STAB
STAL
STAR
STATS
STBY
STD
STRMSCP
SUA
SURF
SUSP
SVT
SW
SYNC
SYN TERR
SYN VIS
SYS
Squelch
Service
Wireless Service Set Identifier
Stabilization
Stall
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
Statistics
Standby
Standard
Stormscope
Special Use Airspace
Surface
Suspend
Synthetic Vision Technology
Software
Synchronize
Synthetic Terrain
Synthetic Vision
System
T
TA
TACAN
TAF
TAS
TAT
TAWS
TCA
TCAS
TEL
TEMP
TERM
TF
TFR
TGT
T HDG
TIS
TIS-B
TIT
TKE
True
Traffic Advisory
Tactical Air Navigation System
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
True Airspeed, Traffic Advisory System
Total Air Temperature
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
Terminal Control Area
Traffic Alert Collision Avoidance System
Telephone
Temperature
Terminal
Track Between Two Fixes Leg
Temporary Flight Restriction
Target
True Heading
Traffic Information Service
Traffic Information Service-Broadcast
Turbine Inlet Temperature
see also Track Angle Error
TMA
TMR/REF
TOC
TOD
TOGA, TO/GA
TOLD
TOPO
TORA
TOT
TPA
Track
Track Angle
Error
TRK
TRSA
TRUNC
TTL
TURB
TURN
TWIP
TX
Terminal Maneuvering Area
Timer/Reference
Top of Climb
Top of Descent
Take-Off, Go-Around
Takeoff and Landing Data
Topographic
Takeoff Run Available
Total
Traffic Pattern Altitude
Direction of aircraft movement relative to
a ground position; also ‘Ground Track’.
The angle difference between the desired
track and the current track.
see also Track
Terminal Radar Service Area
Truncated
Total
Turbulence
Procedure Turn
Terminal Weather Information for Pilots
Transmit
UAT
UHF
UNAVAIL
US
USR
UTC
UTM/UPS
Universal Access Transceiver
Ultra-High Frequency
Unavailable
United States
User
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Transverse Mercator/ Universal
Polar Stereographic Grid
V
V, Vspeed
V1
V2
VA
VAPP , VAC
VFE
VLE
VLNDx
Volts
Velocity (airspeed)
Takeoff Decision Speed
Takeoff Safety Speed
Maneuvering Speed
Approach Climb Speed
Maximum Flap Extended Speed
Maximum Landing Gear Extended Speed
Approach Speed (Flaps at x°)
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
YD
Yaw Damper
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Transfer
SiriusXM Lightning
Transponder
Cross-Talk
Cross-Track, Crosstrack Error
AFCS
XFER, XFR
XM LTNG
XPDR
XTALK
XTK
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WOG
WOW
WPT
WT
WW
WX
Watt(s), West
Wide Area Augmentation System
Warning
Weather Attenuated Color Highlight
World Geodetic System - 1984
Wireless Local Area Network based on
IEEE 802.11
Weight on Gear
Weight on Wheels
Waypoint(s)
Weight
World Wide
Weather
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
W
WAAS
WARN
WATCH
WGS-84
WI-FI, WIFI
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical Path
Vertical Protection Level
VNAV Profile, Vertical Profile
Heading Vector to Radial Leg
Visual Reporting Point
Vertical Speed
Vertical Situation Display
Vertical Speed Indicator
see also Vertical Speed Required
Vector to Final
EIS
190-02257-00 Rev. A
VPATH, VPTH
VPL
VPROF
VR
VRP
VS
VSD
VSI
VSR, VS REQ
VTF
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Maximum Landing Gear Operating Speed
Minimum Control Speed
Maximum Operating Speed
Never-Exceed Speed
Takeoff Rotate Speed
Landing Approach Speed, Reference
Landing Speed
VSB
Maximum Speedbrake Speed
VSR
Stall Speed
VT
Takeoff Flap Retraction Speed
VTIRE
Maximum Tire Speed
VX
Best Angle of Climb Speed
VY
Best Rate of Climb Speed
VYSE
Best Single-Engine Rate of Climb Speed
V DEV
Vertical Deviation
VA
Heading Vector to Altitude Leg
VAC
Volts Alternating Current
VAPP
VOR Approach
VAR
Variation
VD
Heading Vector to DME Distance Leg
VDC
Volts Direct Current
VDL
VHF Datalink
VERT
Vertical
Vertical Figure A measure of the uncertainty in the
of Merit
aircraft’s vertical position.
Vertical Speed The vertical speed necessary to descend/
Required
climb from a current position and altitude
to a defined target position and altitude,
based upon current groundspeed.
VFOM
see also Vertical Figure of Merit
VFR
Visual Flight Rules
VHF
Very High Frequency
VI
Heading Vector to Intercept Leg
VLOC
VOR/Localizer Receiver
VM
Heading Vector to Manual Termination
Leg
VMC
Visual Meteorological Conditions
VNAV, VNV
Vertical Navigation
VOL
Volume
VOR
VHF Omnidirectional Range
VORTAC
VHF Omnidirectional Range Station and
Tactical Air Navigation
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VLO
VMC
VMO (MMO)
VNE
VR
VREF
473
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
Blank Page
474
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX D
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a particular aspect of system NXi operational capability is not addressed by these commonly asked questions
or in the index, contact Garmin (see the copyright page or back cover for contact information) or a Garminauthorized dealer. Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers.
What is SBAS?
EIS
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) uses a system of ground stations to correct any GPS signal
errors. These ground stations correct for errors caused by ionospheric disturbances, timing, and satellite
orbit errors. It also provides vital integrity information regarding the health of each GPS satellite. The signal
correction is then broadcast through geostationary satellites. This correction information can then be received
by any SBAS-enabled GPS receiver.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SBAS is designed to provide the additional accuracy, availability, and integrity necessary to enable users to rely
on GPS for all phases of flight.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
There are several SBAS systems serving different parts of the world. The Wide Area Augmentation System
(WAAS) is currently available in the United States, including Alaska and Hawaii. The European Geostationary
Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS) offers coverage of Europe, parts of the middle east and northern Africa.
The Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation System (MSAS) covers mainly Japan and parts of northern Australia.
How does SBAS affect approach operations?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Both LNAV/VNAV and LPV approaches use the accuracy of SBAS to include vertical (glide path) guidance
capability. The additional accuracy and vertical guidance capability allows improved instrument approaches to
an expanded number of airports throughout the U.S.
AFCS
The implementation of LPV approaches further improves precision approach capabilities. LPV approaches
are designed to make full use of the improved GPS signal from the SBAS. This approach combines the LNAV/
VNAV vertical accuracy with lateral guidance similar to the typical Instrument Landing System (ILS). LPV
approaches allow lower approach minimums.
What is RAIM and how does it affect approach operations?
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When SBAS is unavailable, the GPS receivers use Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) to
perform the following functions:
• Monitor and verify integrity and geometry of tracked GPS satellites
• Notify pilot when satellite conditions do not provide necessary coverage to support a certain phase of flight
APPENDICES
• Predict satellite coverage of a destination area to determine whether the number of available satellites is
sufficient to satisfy requirements (refer to the System Overview Section for instructions on RAIM prediction)
• Detect and exclude bad satellites from the navigation solution (Fault Detection and Exclusion, FDE)
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection
limit (4.0 nm for oceanic, 2.0 nm for enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches).
Without SBAS or RAIM, GPS position accuracy integrity cannot be monitored.
475
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D
Why might there be no approaches available for a flight plan?
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind
that some VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a
published approach, the system indicates “NONE” for the available procedures.
What happens when an approach is selected? Can a flight plan with an approach, a departure, or an
arrival be stored?
EIS
When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure,
or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan, along with a header line showing the title of the selected
instrument procedure. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active, unless the instrument
procedure is activated. This may be done either when the procedure is loaded or at a later time.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a departure, or an arrival. Note that the active flight plan
is erased when the system is turned off. Also, the active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is
activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an arrival, the system uses the waypoint
information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the
system automatically updates the information, provided the procedure has not been modified. Should an
approach, departure, or arrival procedure no longer be available, the flight plan becomes locked until the
procedure is deleted from the flight plan.
Can “slant Golf” (“/G”) be filed using the G1000 NXi?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. GPS approaches are not to be flown with an expired database. See
the approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) as well as the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for more
information.
What does the OBS Softkey do?
Normal (OBS not activated)
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints
OBS
• Manual sequencing - ‘holds’ on selected
waypoint
• Manual course change on HSI not possible
• Manually select course to waypoint from
HSI
• Always navigates ‘TO’ the active waypoint
• Indicates ‘TO’ or ‘FROM’ waypoint
• Must be in this mode for final approach
course
• Cannot be set for final approach course or
published holding patterns
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The OBS Softkey is used to select manual sequencing of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets the current
active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and prevents the system from sequencing to the next
waypoint in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled, automatic waypoint sequencing is continued, and
the system automatically activates the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present
active waypoint.
476
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX D
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When OBS mode is active, the system allows the pilot to set a desired course to/from a waypoint using the
CRS/BARO Knob and HSI (much like a VOR).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The most common application for using the OBS Softkey is the missed approach. The system suspends
automatic waypoint sequencing (indicated by a ‘SUSP’ annunciation placed on the HSI) when the missed
approach point (MAP) is crossed. This prevents the system from automatically sequencing to the missed
approach holding point (MAHP). During this time, the OBS Softkey designation changes to SUSP. Selecting
the SUSP Softkey reactivates automatic waypoint sequencing. The OBS Softkey then resumes its normal
functionality.
Why might the system not automatically sequence to the next waypoint?
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no ‘OBS’ or
‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI). For automatic sequencing to occur, the aircraft must also cross the bisector of
the turn being navigated. The bisector is a line passing through the waypoint common to two flight plan legs
at an equal angle from each leg.
How can a waypoint be skipped in an approach, a departure, or an arrival?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system allows the pilot to manually select any approach, departure, or arrival leg as the active leg of
the flight plan. This procedure is performed on the MFD from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the
desired waypoint and selecting the ACT Leg Softkey then the ENT Key to approve the selection. The GPS then
provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg.
When does turn anticipation begin?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system smooths adjacent leg transitions based on a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability to roll up to
30°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:
• A waypoint alert (‘Next DTK ###° in # seconds’ or ‘Next HDG ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10
seconds before the turn point and flashes as it counts down to zero.
AFCS
• A flashing turn advisory (‘Turn [right/left] to ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10 seconds before the
turn and flashes as it counts down to zero. ‘Turn [right/left] to ###° now’ or ‘Next [DTK/HDG] to ###° now’
is displayed when the pilot is to begin the turn and the HSI (GPS mode) automatically sequences to the next
DTK or HDG value.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The To/From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate that the midpoint of the turn has been
crossed.
When does the CDI scale change?
APPENDICES
Once a departure is activated, the system Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) full scale deflection is set to 0.3
nm. The CDI scale changes to 1.0 nm (terminal mode) then ramps up to 2.0 nm (enroute mode) at 30 nm
from the departure airport. When 31 nm from the destination, the CDI scale smoothly transition from 2.0 nm
back to 1.0 nm (terminal mode). At 2.0 nm before the FAF during an active approach, the CDI scale transitions
down further based on the type of approach activated (LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LPV). When a missed approach is
activated, the CDI is set to 0.3 nm. See the Flight Instruments Section for more details on CDI scaling.
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
477
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D
Why does the HSI not respond like a VOR when OBS mode is active?
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the crosstrack distance to the desired
course, not on the angular relationship to the destination. Therefore, the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant
regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when further away from the
destination.
What is the correct missed approach procedure? How is the missed approach holding point selected?
EIS
To comply with TSO specifications, the system does not automatically sequence past the MAP. The first
waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP Softkey is selected
after crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be followed, as indicated on the
approach plate.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP (not recommended), select the Active Flight Plan
Page and use the ACT Leg Softkey to activate the missed approach portion of the procedure.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
After a missed approach, how can the same approach be re-selected? How can a new approach be
activated?
NOTE: Do not attempt to reactivate the current approach prior to crossing the missed approach point
(MAP). If an attempt to do so is made, an alert message “Are you sure you want to discontinue the current
approach?” appears. The system directs the pilot back to the transition waypoint and does not take into
consideration any missed approach procedures, if the current approach is reactivated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
After flying the missed approach procedure, the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attempt by
pressing the PROC Key. Once the clearance is given for another attempt, activate the approach by highlighting
‘Activate Approach’ using the large FMS Knob and pressing the ENT Key. The system provides navigation along
the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that point.
AFCS
To activate a new approach for the same airport, select the new procedure by pressing the PROC Key. Choose
‘Select Approach’, select the desired approach from the list shown, and press the ENT Key. Select the desired
transition, then activate the approach using the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To activate a new approach to a different airport, press the Direct-to Key and select the desired airport using
the FMS Knobs. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected airport, then follow the steps in the preceding
paragraph to select an approach for the new airport.
478
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX E
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MISCELLANEOUS MAP SYMBOLS
Item
Symbol
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency
Map Pointer (when panning)
EIS
Measuring Pointer
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
User Waypoint
Vertical Navigation Along Track Waypoint
Parallel Track Waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Unanchored Flight Path Waypoint
Displayed when aircraft GPS location is
valid, but heading is invalid.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Top of Descent (TOD)
Bottom of Descent (BOD)
AFCS
Navigating using Dead Reckoning
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
479
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX E
Blank Page
480
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
INDEX
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
B
Backcourse Mode-------------------------------------------380
Backlighting-------------------------------------------------- 43
Barometric Altimeter Setting---------------------------46, 52
Bearing/distance, measuring------------------------------138
Bearing Information-------------------------------------47, 59
Bearing Pointer----------------------------------------------- 59
Bearing Source----------------------------------------------- 59
Bus voltage--------------------------------------------------- 93
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
C
AFCS
Calibrated Airspeed-----------------------------------------239
Chart Not Available-----------------------------------------395
Chart options----------------------------------------- 399, 406
CHART SETUP box----------------------------------- 401, 407
ChartView--------------------------------------------- 389, 394
Checklists--------------------------------------------- 442–443
Circle of Uncertainty----------------------------------------152
Clearance Recorder-----------------------------------------123
Closest Point-------------------------------------------------212
Cloud Tops---------------------------------------------------286
COM channel spacing--------------------------------------106
COM Frequency Box--------------------------------- 102, 107
Command Bars----------------------------------------------360
Communication (COM) Frequency Box------------------- 46
COM Tuning Failure-----------------------------------------125
Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA)--------------------341
Controls--------------------------------------------------------- 4
Control Wheel Steering (CWS)--------------------- 357, 384
Coolant temperature------------------------------------91, 93
Copy a Flight Plan------------------------------------------202
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
190-02257-00 Rev. A
APR softkey------------------------------------------- 234, 242
Arrival Alerts-------------------------------------------------- 38
Arrival procedure------------------ 186, 187, 198, 229, 230
Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)---- 1, 14
Attitude Indicator----------------------------------------46, 50
Audio alerting system--------------------------------------446
Audio Panel--------------------------------------------------- 10
Audio panel controls
SPKR-------------------------------------------------------121
Audio panel fail-safe operation---------------------------125
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS)------ 1, 355–388
Alerts and annunciations------------------------ 386–387
Controls-------------------------------------------- 356–357
Automatic squelch------------------------------------------102
Autopilot----------------------------------------355, 383–385
Disconnect------------------------------------------------357
Auto-tuning--------------------------------------------------110
Auto-tuning, COM------------------------------------------103
Auto-tuning, NAV-------------------------------------------109
Auto Zoom---------------------------------------------------134
AUX - system status page---------------------------------409
Aviation Symbols------------------------------- 143, 144, 148
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activate a Flight Plan---------------------------------------201
Active frequency------------------------------- 107, 108, 109
ADF---------------------------------------------------------112
AC-U-KWIK------------------------------------------- 408, 460
ADF
ADF mode------------------------------------------ 112, 114
ANT mode-------------------------------------------------114
Volume-----------------------------------------------------112
ADF audio----------------------------------------------------108
ADF/BFO-----------------------------------------------------114
ADF frequency tuning--------------------------------------113
ADF volume--------------------------------------------------114
ADS-R---------------------------------------------------------340
AHRS---------------------------------------449, 450, 452, 453
AIRB----------------------------------------------------------343
Aircraft Symbol----------------------------------------------- 56
Airport
Information-----------------------------------------------163
Airport Directory------------------------------------- 408, 460
Airspace Alerts--------------------------------------- 179, 244
Airspeed Indicator---------------------------------------46, 48
Airspeed Reference---------------------------------- 366–367
Airways
Collapsing/Expanding-----------------------------------211
Alerting system----------------------------------------------445
Alert levels---------------------------------------------------446
Alerts---------------------------------------------------------445
Arrival------------------------------------------------------- 39
Audio voice------------------------------------------ 39, 449
Along Track Offset------------------------------------------207
Altimeter--------------------------------------------------46, 51
Altitude
Constraints------------------------------------------------219
Altitude Alerting--------------------------------------------- 70
Altitude Hold--------------------------------------------------- 6
Altitude Hold Mode----------------------------------------364
Altitude Reference----------------------------- 363, 364, 375
Annunciations------------------------------------------------ 12
G1000 System--------------------------------------------447
System------------------------------------------------------ 11
Test tone---------------------------------------------------- 13
Annunciations, G1000 System
Test tone---------------------------------------------------446
Annunciator lights------------------------------------------121
ANT/BFO-----------------------------------------------------114
AOPA-------------------------------------------------- 389, 460
Approach-----------------------------------------------------476
Activating-------------------------------------------------234
Loading--------------------------------------- 200, 232, 234
Removing--------------------------------------------------235
Approach channel----------------------------------- 200, 232
Approach Mode---------------------------------------------378
Approach Mode (GPS, VAPP, LOC)-----------------------371
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A
I-1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INDEX
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Correlation---------------------------------------------------341
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)---------- 60–64, 231, 56
Changing scale-------------------------------------------477
Course Pointer------------------------------------------------ 56
Crew profiles------------------------------------------------- 33
Current Heading--------------------------------------------- 56
D
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Database(s)----------------------------------------------------- 8
Data Link Receiver------------------------------------------444
Datalink receiver troubleshooting------------------------444
Data logging-------------------------------------------------416
Date and time------------------------------------------------ 32
Day/Night views-------------------------------------- 401, 407
Day view-----------------------------------------------------402
DB Mismatch------------------------------------------------459
Dead Reckoning---------------------------------------------- 86
DEC FUEL softkey-------------------------------------------- 94
Decision Height---------------------------------------------- 71
Declutter, Display-------------------------------------------- 87
Delete Flight Plans------------------------------------------202
Deleting
An entire airway----------------------------------- 204, 205
An entire procedure------------------------------ 204, 205
An individual waypoint--------------------------- 203, 204
Flight Plan Items-----------------------------------------203
Density Altitude---------------------------------------------241
Departure
Procedure------------------------------------ 197, 227, 228
Select------------------------------------227, 229, 232, 235
Time--------------------------------------------------------239
Dilution of Precision (DOP)--------------------------------- 17
Direct-to--------- 156, 181, 182, 183, 184, 185, 217, 218
Display backup----------------------------------------- 10, 101
DME
Tuning mode----------------------------------------------112
DME audio---------------------------------------------------108
DME Information Window---------------------------------- 60
DME tuning--------------------------------------------------115
E
INDEX
APPENDICES
Electronic Checklists--------------------------------- 442, 443
Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP)-- 440, 441, 389,
51, 437
Emergency Checklist---------------------------------------443
Emergency frequency---------------------------------------125
Endurance, calculated (ENDUR)--------------------------- 94
Engine display------------------------------------------------ 90
Engine Indication System (EIS)------------------------ 89–96
Engine load indicator------------------------------------91, 93
Entering Flight ID-------------------------------------------116
Entertainment inputs---------------------------------------123
Estimated Position Error (EPE)----------------------------- 17
I-2
F
Fail-safe operation------------------------------------------125
Failure
Input-------------------------------------------------------- 15
Field of View (SVT)------------------------------------------151
Flight director------------------------------------------------355
Pitch modes---------------------------------------- 361–367
Flight Director (FD)------------------------------- 6, 358–359
Flight ID------------------------------------------------------120
Flight Instruments----------------------------------45, 45–60
Flight level change--------------------------------------------- 6
Flight Level Change Mode---------------------------------366
Flight Phase--------------------------------------------------- 56
Flight plan
Storing-----------------------------------------------------476
Flight Plan, Active
Creating---------------------------------------------------189
Leg Type---------------------------------------------------186
FliteCharts-------------------------------------- 389, 402, 403
Functions--------------------------------------------------404
FPA------------------------------------------------------------218
Frequency
Nearest----------------------------------------------------177
Frequency spacing------------------------------------------106
Frequently asked questions--------------------------------475
Fuel
Calculations------------------------------------------------ 94
Efficiency--------------------------------------------------241
Endurance-------------------------------------------------241
Flow indicator--------------------------------------------- 91
Quantity------------------------------------------------91, 93
Remaining-------------------------------------------- 241, 93
Required---------------------------------------------------241
Statistics---------------------------------------------------241
Temperature indicator------------------------------------ 91
Used--------------------------------------------------------- 93
Fuel on Board-----------------------------------------------241
G
Garmin Connext Weather-------------------------- 248, 249
Geodetic Sea Level (GSL)----------------------------------311
GFC 700 AFCS--------------------------------------- 355–388
Glidepath Indicator------------------------------------------ 55
Glidepath Mode (GP)-------------------------------- 376, 378
Glideslope Indicator----------------------------------------- 54
Glideslope Mode--------------------------------------------377
Global Positioning System (GPS)
Navigation----------------------------------------- 181–244
Receiver information--------------------------------- 17–19
GMA 1347------------------------------------------------------ 8
Go Around Mode-------------------------------------------381
GPS Receiver Operation------------------------------------- 16
Groundspeed------------------------------------------------- 41
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
INDEX
OBS Mode------------------------------------------------56, 65
Obstacles---------------------------------------------- 451, 454
Odometer----------------------------------------------------- 41
Oil
Pressure indicator-------------------------------------91, 93
Temperature Indicator--------------------------------91, 93
Omni Bearing Selector (OBS)----------------------- 476–477
optional equipment-------------------------------------------- 2
Other Statistics--------------------------------------- 239, 241
Outside Air Temperature------------------------------------ 46
APPENDICES
P
Page groups--------------------------------------------- 27–30
Parallel Track-------------------------------------------------208
Pitch hold------------------------------------------------------- 6
Pitch Hold Mode--------------------------------------------361
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
INDEX
190-02257-00 Rev. A
O
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Magnetometer----------------------------------------------- 15
Manual Electric Trim (MET)------------------------- 355, 383
Map
Panning----------------------------------------------------136
Marker Beacon----------------------------------------------111
Marker Beacon Annunciations----------------------------- 70
MASQ processing-------------------------------------------- 97
Measurement units, changing displayed----------------- 37
Menus--------------------------------------------------------- 26
Messages
Reminder--------------------------------------------------- 41
MFD Page Groups------------------------------------------- 27
MFD Power-up Page------------------------------------------- 8
AFCS
M
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Land Symbols------------------------------------------------142
Lateral Deviation Scale-------------------------------------- 56
Level Mode--------------------------------------------------437
lighting-------------------------------------------------------- 43
Line Replaceable Units---------------------------------------- 1
LO SENS------------------------------------------------------111
Low Altitude Annunciation--------------------------------- 71
Low speed data---------------------------------------------417
Lubber Line--------------------------------------------------- 56
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
L
National Weather Service (NWS)-------------------------296
NAV1 audio--------------------------------------------------108
NAV2 audio--------------------------------------------------108
Navigation
Database--------------------------------------------------219
Map--------------------------------------------------------184
Navigation Mode------------------------------------ 369–370
Navigation mode selection--------------------------------108
Navigation (NAV) Frequency Box-------------------------- 46
Navigation Source----------------------------------56, 60–61
Navigation Status Box-------------------------------------- 46
Nav radio selection-----------------------------------------108
Nearest
Airport--------------------------- 160, 161, 162, 163, 234
Airport Minimum Runway Length---------------------163
Airports Page-------------------------------------- 161, 163
Airport Surface Matching-------------------------------163
VOR--------------------------------------------------------169
VRP-------------------------------------------------- 170, 171
Nearest airports, frequency tuning-----------------------104
NEXRAD------------------------------------------------------277
NextGen------------------------------------------------------339
Night view---------------------------------------------------402
No Available Charts----------------------------------------404
Non-path descent-------------------------------------------374
Normal display operation------------------------------------- 9
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
IDENT function----------------------------------------------117
ID indicator--------------------------------------------------107
Import/Export Flight Plan
Messages--------------------------------------------------191
Indicated Airspeed------------------------------------------- 48
Indicated Altitude-------------------------------------------239
Inset Map----------------------------------------------------- 47
Intercom------------------------------------------------------121
Intersection
Information---------------------------------------- 164–165
Inverting a flight plan------------------------------- 202, 210
IOI-------------------------------------------------------------319
Iridium--------------------------------------------------------422
Iridium satellite network----------------417, 418, 422, 426
N
EIS
I
Minimum Descent Altitude--------------------------------- 71
Missed Approach------------------------------------ 186, 235
MKR/MUTE--------------------------------------------------111
Mode S-------------------------------------------------------116
Mode selection softkeys---------------------------- 116, 117
Morse code identifier---------------------------------------107
Motion Vectors----------------------------------------------348
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Heading------------------------------------------------------- 46
Heading Bug-------------------------------------------------- 46
Heading Select------------------------------------------------- 6
Heading Select Mode--------------------------------------368
HI SENS-------------------------------------------------------111
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)------- 231, 46, 56–58
HSI double green arrow------------------------------------108
HSI magenta arrow-----------------------------------------108
HSI single green arrow-------------------------------------108
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
H
I-3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INDEX
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pitch Modes, Flight Director------------------------ 361–367
Power ON settings------------------------------------------121
Power-up Page----------------------------------------------442
Predefined message--------------------------- 430, 431, 432
Primary Flight Display (PFD)---------------------------------- 1
Procedure Pages--------------------------------------------- 29
R
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
RAIM----------------------------------------------------------475
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM)-18–19,
231
Reminder messages----------------------------------------- 41
Reversionary mode-----------------------------------------125
Reversionary Mode------------------------------------------ 10
ROC-----------------------------------------------------------319
Roll Hold Mode---------------------------------------------367
Rotating Compass Card------------------------------------ 56
RS-232-------------------------------------------------------- 1, 2
RS-485----------------------------------------------------------- 1
RX indicator--------------------------------------------------103
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
S
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SafeTaxi------------------------------------------------ 389, 390
SBAS----------------------------------------------------- 20, 475
Scheduler------------------------------------------------- 41–42
Secure Digital (SD) card-------------------------- 7, 442, 459
Selected Altitude------361, 363, 364, 365, 366, 372, 375
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc----------------------------151
Selected Course----------------------------------, 47, 56, 370
Selected Heading-------------------------------------- , 47, 56
Selected Heading Bug--------------------------------------- 56
Sequencing, automatic-------------------------------------477
Servos---------------------------------------------------------383
SIGMET-------------------------------------------------------287
SiriusXM Radio--------------------------------------- 411, 412
SiriusXM Radio Active Channel---------------------------412
SiriusXM Radio Presets------------------------------------413
SiriusXM Radio Service Class-----------------------------412
SiriusXM Radio Volume------------------------------------414
SiriusXM Weather
AIREPs-----------------------------------------------------300
AIRMETs---------------------------------------------------287
Cell Movement-------------------------------------------284
Cloud Tops------------------------------------------------282
County Warnings-----------------------------------------296
Cyclones & Hurricanes----------------------------------297
Echo Tops--------------------------------------------------281
Freezing Level---------------------------------------------292
Icing--------------------------------------------------------298
Lightning--------------------------------------------------283
PIREPs-----------------------------------------------------300
SIGMETs---------------------------------------------------287
I-4
Surface Analysis------------------------------------------291
Turbulence-------------------------------------------------299
Winds Aloft------------------------------------------------293
Slip/Skid Indicator----------------------------------------46, 51
Softkeys----------------------------------------------21–28, 46
EIS-------------------------------------------------------24, 92
MFD--------------------------------------------------------- 24
PFD---------------------------------------------------------- 21
Speaker-------------------------------------------------------121
Split COM operation----------------------------------------123
Standby frequency-----------------------103, 107, 108, 109
ADF---------------------------------------------------------112
Standby frequency field----------------------------- 102, 107
Standby Navigation Database----------------------------461
Stereo headsets---------------------------------------------121
Stuck microphone-------------------------------------------125
Sunrise / Sunset---------------------------------------------240
SURF----------------------------------------------------------343
Surface Analysis---------------------------------------------291
SUSP----------------------------------------------------------- 65
SVT------------------------------------------------------------457
SVT Troubleshooting----------------------------------- 444, 87
Symbols, map------------------------------------------------479
Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)------------------------- 73
System Alerting----------------------------------------------- 70
System annunciations--------------------------------------447
System Settings---------------------------------------------- 30
System Status Page------------------------------------------ 13
System Time--------------------------------------------------- 46
T
Tachometer-----------------------------------------------91, 93
Takeoff Mode------------------------------------------------381
TAS------------------------------------------------------------450
TAS Traffic
Non-Threat Traffic----------------------------------------330
PA----------------------------------------------------------330
Proximity Advisory---------------------------------------330
Telephone------------------------------------ 2, 417, 418, 419
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast (TAF)----------------------289
Terminal procedures charts-------------393, 395, 404, 407
Terrain--------------------------------------------------------451
Terrain Proximity--------------------------------------------311
Terrain-SVS---------------------------------------------------437
Text messaging---------------------------426, 427, 430, 433
Timer----------------------------------------------------------- 39
Departure-----------------------------------------------39, 40
Flight----------------------------------------------------39, 40
Generic, PFD----------------------------------------------- 39
To/From Indicator-------------------------------------------- 56
TOPO Data-------------------------------------------- 140, 148
TOPO Scale---------------------------------------------------141
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
INDEX
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
W
WAAS-------------------------------------------------- 454, 475
Waypoint
Automatic sequencing--------------------------- 476, 477
Skipping---------------------------------------------------477
Waypoint Selection Submenu---------------------- 182, 193
Weather (real-time)-------------------------------------------- 2
Wind----------------------------------------------------------150
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
X
XM radio entertainment-----------------------------------123
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Total flight hours--------------------------------------------- 93
Track Indicator------------------------------------------------ 56
Traffic
Annunciation---------------------------------------------- 47
Traffic Information Service-Broadcast (TIS-B)-----------341
Transponder--------------------------------------------------- 23
Transponder data box--------------------------------------- 97
Transponder standby mode-------------------------------117
Transponder Status Box------------------------------------- 46
Trim adapter-------------------------------------------------383
Trim, Manual Electric-------------------------------- 355, 357
Trip Planning------------------------------------ 239, 240, 241
Trip Statistics--------------------------------------41, 240, 241
True Airspeed------------------------------------------------- 48
True Airspeed (TAS)------------------------------------ 241, 46
Turn anticipation--------------------------------------------477
Turn Rate and Heading Trend Vector---------------------- 56
Turn Rate Indicator--------------------------------------46, 58
TX indicator--------------------------------------------------103
U
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Unable to Display Chart---------------------------- 395, 404
User-Defined Holding Pattern-----------------------------216
Utilities-------------------------------------------------------- 39
V
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
AFCS
190-02257-00 Rev. A
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical deviation-------------------------------------------374
Vertical Navigation flight control------------------ 372–376
Vertical Navigation (VNAV)------------------------ 185, 219
Direct-to---------------------------------------------------218
Guidance--------------------------------------------------219
Vertical Path Tracking Mode------------------------ 372–373
Vertical Situation Display (VSD)---------------------------221
Vertical speed-------------------------------------------------- 6
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)--------------------------46, 54
Vertical Speed Mode---------------------------------------365
Vertical Speed Reference----------------------------------365
VFR code-----------------------------------------------------119
VNAV Target Altitude-------------------------------- 372–375
VNAV Target Altitude Capture Mode--------------------375
VNV guidance
Enabling---------------------------------------------------217
VNV Indications---------------------------------------------- 69
Voice alerts, TIS Traffic--------------------------------------449
Voice Alerts, TIS Traffic--------------------------------------325
VOL annunciation-------------------------------------------122
Volume-------------------------------------------------------414
Volume level
ADF-------------------------------------------------- 112, 114
VOR selection------------------------------------------------108
VRP---------------------------------------------- 143, 170, 171
VS TGT--------------------------------------------------------218
I-5
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INDEX
Blank Page
I-6
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
190-02257-00 Rev. A
G1000® NXi Pilot’s Guide
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503.581.8101
Fax 503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Tel: +44 (0) 238 052 4000
Fax: +44 (0) 238 052 4004
Aviation Support: +44 (0) 370 850 1243
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District,
New Taipei City, Taiwan
Tel: 34-93-357-2608
Fax: 34-93-429-4484
Diamond DA40NG
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913.397.8200
Fax: 913.397.8282
Aircraft On Ground (AOG)
Hotline: 913.397.0836
Aviation Dealer Technical
Support: 888.606.5482
www.garmin.com
190-02257-00
Revision A
®
Pilot’s Guide
Cirrus SR2x
Diamond DA40NG
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising